seuen of the clocke Northnorthwest 42 leagues to the ende to fall with Shotland then the wind veared to the West so that we could lie but North and by West continuing in the same course 40 leagues whereby we could not fetch Shotland then we sayled North 16 leagues by estimation after that North and by West Northnorthwest then Southeast with diuers other courses trauersing and tracing the seas ây reason of sundry and manifolde contrary windes vntill the 14 day of Iuly and then the sunne entring into Leo we discouered land Eastward of vs vnto the which we sayled that night as much as we might and after wee went on shore with our Pinnesse found little houses to the number of 30 where we knew that it was inhabited but the people were fled away as we iudged for feare of vs. The land was all full of little Islands and that innumerable which were called as we learned afterwards AEgeland and Halgeland which lieth from Orfordnesse North and by East being in the latitude of 66 degrees The distance betweene Orfordnesse and AEgeland 250 leagues Then we sailed from thence 12 leagues Northwest and found many other Islandes and there came to anker the 19 day and manned our Pinnesse and went on shore to the Islands and found people mowing and making of hay which came to the shore and welcomed vs. In which place were an innumerable sort of Islands which were called the Isles of Rost being vnder the dominion of the king of Denmarke which place was in latitude 66 degrees and 30 minutes The winde being contrary we remayned there three dayes there was an innumerable sort of foules of diuers kindes of which we tooke very many The 22 day the winde comming fayre we departed from Rost sailing Northnortheast keeping the sea vntill the 27 day and then we drew neere vnto the land which was still East of vs then went foorth our Pinnesse to seeke harborow found many good harbours of the which we entred into one with our shippes which was called Stanfew and the land being Islands were called Lewfoot or Lofoot which were plentifully inhabited and very gentle people being also vnder the king of Denmarke but we could not learne how farre it was from the maine land and we remained there vntil the 30 day being in latitude 68 degrees and from the foresaid Rost about 30 leagues Northnortheast The 30 day of Iuly about noone we weyed our ankers and went into the Seas and sayled along these Islands Northnortheast keeping the land still in sight ântill the second day of August then hailing in close aboord the land to the entent to knowe what land it was there came a skiffe of the Island aboord of vs of whom we asked many questions who shewed vnto vs that the Island was called Seynam which is the latitude of seuenty degrees and from Stanfew thirtie leagues being also vnder the king of Denmarke and that there was no merchandise there but onely dryed fish and traine oyle Then we being purposed to goe vnto Finmarke inquired of him if we might haue a pilot to bring vs vnto Finmarke he said that if we could beare in we should haue a good harbour and on the next day a pilot to bring vs to Finmarke vnto the wardhouse which is the strongest holde in Finmarke and most resorted to by report But when wee would haue entred into an harbour the land being very high on euâry side there came such flawes of winde and terrible whirle winds that we were not able to beare in but by violence were constrained to take the sea agayne our Pinnesse being vnshipt we sailed North and by East the wind increasing so sort that we were not able to beare any saile but tooke them in and lay a drift to the end to let the storme ouer passe And that night by violence of winde and thickenesse of mists we were not able to keepe together within sight and then about midnight we lost our pinnesse which was a discomfort vnto vs. Assoone as it was day and the fogge ouerpast we looked about and at the last we descried one of our shippes to Leeward of vs then we spred an bullocke of our fore-saile and bare roome with her which was the Confidence but the Edward we could not see Then the flaw something abating we and the Confidence hoysed vp our sailes the fourth day sayling Northeast and by North to the end to fall with the Wardhouse as we did consult to doe before in case we should part company Thus running Northeast and by North and Northeast fiftie leagues then we sounded and had 160 fadomes whereby we thought to be farre from land and perceiued that the land lay not as the Globe made mention Wherfore we changed our course the sixt day and sailed Southeast and by South eight and fortie leagues thinking thereby to find the Wardhouse The eight day much winde rising at the Westnorthwest we not knowing how the coast lay strook our sayles and lay a drift where we sounded and found 160 fadomes as afore The ninth day the wind âearing to the South Southeast we sailed Northeast 25 leagues The tenth day we sounded and could get no ground neither yet could see any land wherat we wondered then the wind comming at the Northeast we ran Southeast about 48 leagues The 11 day the wind being at South we sounded and found 40 fadoms aud faire sand The 12 day the winde being at South and by East we lay with our saile East and East and by North 30 leagues The 14 day early in the morning we descried land which land we bare with all hoising out our boat to discouer what land it might be but the boat could not come to land the water was so shoale where was very much ice also but there was no similitude of habitation and this land lyeth from Seynam East and by North 160 leagues being in latitude 72 degrees Then we plyed to the Northward the 15,16 and 17 day The 18 day the winde comming at the Northeast and the Confidence being troubled with bilge water and stocked we thought it good to seeke harbâur for her redresse then we bare roome the 18 day Southsoutheast about 70 leagues The 21 day we sounded and found 10 fadome after that we sounded againe and found but 7 fadome so shoalder and shoalder water and yet could see no land where we maruâiled greatly to auoide this danger we bare roomer into the sea all that night Northwest and by West The next day we sounded and had 20. fadoms then shaped our course and ran West Southwest vntill the 23. day then we descried Low land vnto which we bare as nigh as we could and it appeared vnto vs vnhabitable Then wee plyed Westward along by that lande which lyeth West Southwest and East Northeast and much winde blowing at the West we haled into the sea North and by East 30. leagues Then the
pinnesse to the riuer Dulce called Rio Dulce that they might haue the beginning of the market before the comming of the Iohn Euangelist At the riuer of Sesto we had a tunne of graines This riuer standeth in sixe degrees lacking a terce From the riuer of Sesto to Rio Dulce are fiue and twentie leagues Rio Dulce standeth in fiue degrees and a halfe The riuer of Sesto is easie to be knowen by reason there is a ledge of rockes on the Southeast part of the Rode And at the entring into the hauen are fiue or sixe trees that beare no leaues This is a good harborow but very narow at y e entrace into the riuer There is also a rocke in the hauens mouth right as you enter And all that coast betweene Cape de Monte and cape de las Palmas lieth Southeast by East Northwest by West being three leagues off the shore And you shal haue in some places rocks two leagues off and that betweene the riuer of Sesto and cape de las Palmas Betweene the riuer of Sesto and the riuer Dulce are fiue and twentie leagues the high land that is betweene them both is called Cakeado being âight leagues from the riuer of Sesto And to the Southeastwarde of it is a place called Shawgro and an other called Shyawe or Shauo where you may get fresh water Off this Shyawe lieth a ledge of rockes and to the Southeastward lieth a hedland called Croke Betweene Cakeado and Croke are nine or ten leagues To the Southeastward off is a harborow called S. Vincent Right ouer against S. Vincent is a rocke vnder the water two leagues a halfe off the shore To the Southeastward of that rocke you shal see an island about three or foure leagues off this island is not past a league off the shore To the Eastsoutheast of the island is a rocke that lieth aboue the water and by that rocke goeth in the riuer Dulce which you shall know by the said riuer and rocke The Northwest side of the hauen is flat sand and the Southeast side therof is like an Island and a bare plot without any trees and so is it not in any other place In the Rode you shall ride in thirteene or foureteene fadomes good oaze and sand being the markes of the Rode to bring the Island and the Northeast land together and here we ankered the last of December The third day of Ianuarie we came from the riuer Dulce Note that Cape de las Palmas is a faire high land but some low places thereof by the water side looke like red cliffes with white strakes like hie wayes a cable length a piece and this is the East part of the cape This cape is the Southermost land in all the coast of Guinea and standeth in foure degrees and a terce The coast from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes or de Tres Puntas is faire cleare without rocke or other danger Twentie and fiue leaues from Cape de las Palmas the land is higher then in any place vntill we come to Cape Trepointes And about ten leagues before you come to Cape Trepointes the land riseth still higher and higher vntill you come to Cape Trepointes Also before you come to the said Cape after other 5 leagues to the Northwest part of it there is certaine broken ground with two great rockes and within them in the bight of a bay is a castle called Arra perteining to the king of Portugall You shall know it by the said rockes that lie off it for there is none such from Cape de las Palmas to Cape Trepointes This coast lieth East and by North West and by South From Cape de las Palmas to the said castle is fourescore and fifteene leagues And the coast lieth from the said castle to the Westermost point of Trepoyntes Southeast and by South Northwest and by North. Also the Westermost point ofâ Trepoyntes is a low lande lying halfe a mile out in the sea and vpon the innermost necke to the land-ward is a tuft of trees and there we arriued the eleuenth day of Ianuary The 12 day of Ianuary we came to a towne called Samma or Samua being 8 leagues from Cape Trepointes toward Eastnortheast Betweene Cape Trepointes and the towne of Samua is a great ledge of rockes a great way out in the sea We continued foure dayes at that Towne and the Captaine thereof would needs haue a pledge a shore But when they receiued the pledge they kept him still and would traffike no more but shot off their ordinance at vs. They haue two or three pieces of ordinance and no more The sixteenth day of the said month we made reckoning to come to a place called Cape Corea where captaine Don Iohn dwelleth whose men entertained vs friendly This Cape Corea is foure leagues Eastwarde of the castle of Mina otherwise called La mina or Castello de mina where we arriued the 18 day of the moneth Here we made sale of all our cloth sauing two or three packes The 26 day of the same moneth we weighed anker and departed from thence to the Trinitie which was seuen leagues Eastward of vs where she solde her wares Then they of the Trinitie willed vs to go Eastward of that eight or nine leagues to sell part of their wares in a place called Perecow and another place named Perecow Grande being the Eastermost place of both these which you shal know by a great round hill neere vnto it named MoÌte Rodondo lying Westward from it and by the water side are many high palme trees From hence did we set forth homeward the thirteenth day of February plied vp alongst till we came within seuen or eight leagues to Cape Trepointes About eight of the clocke the 15 day at afternoone wee did cast about to seaward and beware of the currants for they will deceiue you sore Whosoeuer shall come from the coast of Mina homeward let him be sure to make his way good West vntill he reckon himselfe as farre as Cape de las Palmas where the currant setteth alwayes to the Eastward And within twentie leagues Eastward of Cape de las Palmas is a riuer called De los Potos where you may haue fresh water and balast enough and plenty of iuory or Elephants teeth This riuer standeth in foure degrees and almost two terces And when you reckon your selfe as farre shot as Cape de las Palmas being in a degree or a degree and a halfe you may go West and West by North vntill you come in three degrees and then you may go Westnorthwestâ and Northwest and by West vntill you come in fiue degrees and then Northwest And in sixe degrees we met Northerly windes and great ruffling of tides And as we could iudge the currants went to the Northnorthwest
there is a bracke looking toward the North. It is a very low countrey There is also betweene the Sea a certaine poole a plaine field and from that Cape of land and the poole vnto another Cape there are about 14 leagues The land is fashioned as it were halfe a circle all compassed about with sand like a ditch ouer which as farre as ones eye can stretch there is nothing but marrish grounds and standing pooles And before you come to the first Cape very neere the maine land there are two little Ilands About fiue leagues from the second Cape toward the Southwest there is another Iland very high and pointed which we named Alezai The first Cape we named S. Peters Cape because vpon that day we came thither Of the Cape called Cape Orleans of the Riuer of Boates of Wilde mens Cape and of the qualitie and temperature of the countrey FRom Brions Iland to this place there is good anckorage of sand and hauing sounded toward South west euen to the shoare about fiue leagues wee found twentie and fiue fadome water and within one league twelue fadome and very neere the shoare sixe fadome rather more then lesse and also good anckorage But because wee would bee the better acquainted with this stonie and rockie ground wee strooke our sailes lowe and athwart The next day being the last of the moneth saue one the winde blewe South and by East Wee sailed Westward vntill Tuesday morning at Sunne rising being the last of the moneth without any sight or knowledge of any lande except in the euening toward Sunne set that wee discouered a lande which seemed to be two Ilands that were beyond vs West southwest about nine or tenne leagues All the next day till the next morning at Sunne rising wee sailed Westward about fourtie leagues and by the way we perceiued that the land we had seene like Ilands was firme land lying South southeast and North northwest to a very good Cape of land called Cape Orleans Al the said land is low and plaine and the fairest that may possibly be seene full of goodly medowes and trees True it is that we could finde no harborough there because it is all full of shelues and sands We with our boats went on shore in many places and among the rest wee entred into a goodly riuer but very shallow which we named The riuer of boats because that there wee saw boates full of wild men that were crossing the riuer We had no other notice of the said wild men for the wind came from the sea and so beat vs against the shore that wee were constrained to retire our selues with our boates toward our ships Till the next day morning at Sunne rising being the first of Iuly we sailed Northeast in which time there rose great misles and stormes and therefore wee strucke our sailes till two of the clocke in the afternoone that the weather became cleare there we had sight of Cape Orleance and of another about seuen leagues from vs lying North and by East and that we called Wilde mens Cape On the Northside of this Cape about halfe a league there is a very dangerous shelfe and banke of stones Whilest wee were at this Cape we sawe a man running after our boates that were going along the coast who made signes vnto vs that we should returne toward the said Cape againe We seeing such signes began to turne toward him but he seeing vs come began to flee so soone as we were come on shoare we set a knife before him and a woollen girdle on a litle staffe and then came to our ships againe That day we trended the said land about 9. or 10. leagues hoping to finde some good harborough but it was not possible for as I haue said already it is a very low land and enuironed round about with great shelues Neuerthelesse we went that day on shore in foure places to see the goodly and sweete smelling trees that were there we found them to be Cedars eweârees Pines white elmes ashes willowes with many other sorts of trees to vs vnkowen but without any fruit The grounds where no wood is are very faire and all full of peason white and red gooseberies strawberies blackeberies and wilde corne euen like vnto Rie which seemed to haue bene sowen and plowed This countrey is of better temperature then any other that can be seene and very hote There are many thrushes stockdoues and other birds to be short there wanteth nothing but good harboroughs Of the Bay called S. Lunario and other notable Bayes and Capes of land and of the qualitie and goodnesse of those grounds THe next day being the second of Iuly we discouered and had sight of land on the Northerne side toward vs that did ioyne vnto the land abouesaid al compassed about and we knew that it had about * in depth and as much athwart we named it S. Lunarios Bay and with our boats we went to the Cape toward the North and found the shore so shallow that for the space of a league from land there was but a fadome water On the Northeast side from the said Cape about 7. or 8. leagues there is another Cape of land in the middest whereof there is a Bay fashioned triangle-wise very deepe as farre off as we could ken from it the same lieth Northeast The said Bay is compassed about with sands and shelues about 10. leagues from land and there is but two fadome water from the said Cape to the bank of the other there is about 15. leagues We being a crosse the said Capes discouered another land and Cape and as farre as we could ken it lay North and by East All that night the weather was very ill and great winds so that wee were constrained to beare a smal saile vntil the next morning being the thirde of Iuly when the winde came from the West and we sailed Northward to haue a sight of the land that we had left on the Northeast side aboue the low lands among which high and low lands there is a gulfe or breach in some places about 55. fadome deepe and 15. leagues in bredth By reason of the great depth and bredth of the gulfe and change of the lands we conceiued hope that wee should finde a passage like vnto the passage of The Castles The said gulfe lieth East Northeast and West southwest The ground that lieth on the Southside of the said gulfe is as good and easie to be manured and full of as goodly fields and meadowes as any that euer wee haue seene as plaine and smooth as any die and that which lyeth on the North is a countrey altogether hilly full of woods and very high and great trees of sundry sorts among the rest there are as goodly Ceders and Firre trees as possibly can be seene able to make mastes for ships of three hundred Tunne neither did we see any place that was not full of the saide trees
eare like vnto Rie the corne is like oates and smal peason as thicke as if they had bene sowen and plowed white and red gooseberies strawberies blackberies white and red Roses with many other floures of very sweet and pleasant smell There bâ also many goodly medowes full of grasse and lakes wherein great plentie of salmons be They call a hatchet in their tongue Cochi and a knife Bacon we named it The bay of heat ¶ Of another nation of wilde men of their maners liuing and clothing BEing certified that there was no passage through the said Bay we hoised saile and went from S. Martines Creeke vpon Sunday being the 12. of Iuly to goe and discouer further beyond the said Bay and went along the sea coast Eastward about eighteene leagues till we came to the Cape of Prato where we found the tide very great but shallow ground and the Sea stormie so that we were constrained to draw toward shore betweene the said Cape and an Iland lying Eastward about a league from the said Cape where we cast ancker for that night The next morning we hoised saile to trend the said coast about which lyeth North Northeast But there rose such a stormie and raging winde against vs that we were constrained to come to the place againe from whence we were come there did we stay all that day til the next that we hoised vp saile and came to the middest of a riuer fiue or sixe leagues from the Cape of Prato Northward and being ouerthwart the said Riuer there arose againe a contrary winde with great fogges and stormes So that we were constrained vpon Tuesday being the fourteenth of the moneth to enter into the riuer and there did we stay till the sixteenth of the moneth looking for faire weather to come out of it on which day being Thursday the winde became so raging that one of our ships lost an ancker and we were constrained to goe vp higher into the riuer seuen or eight leagues into a good harborough and ground that we with our boates found out and through the euill weather tempest and darkenesse that was wee stayed in the saide harborough till the fiue and twentieth of the moneth not being able to put out in the meane time wee sawe a great multitude of wilde men that were fishing for mackerels whereof there is great store Their boates were about 40 and the persons what with men women children two hundred which after they had hanted our company a while they came very familiarly with their boats to the sides of our ships We gaue them kniues combes beads of glasse and other trifles of small value for which they made many signes of gladnesse lifting their hands vp to heauen dancing and singing in their boates These men may very well and truely be called Wilde because there is no poorer people in the world For I thinke all that they had together besides their boates and nets was not worth fiue souce They goe altogether naked sauing their priuities which are couered with a little skinne and certaine olde skinnes that they cast vpon them Neither in nature nor in language doe they any whit agree with them which we found first their heads be altogether shauen except one bush of haire which they suffer to grow vpon the top of their crowne as long as a horse taile then with certaine leather strings binde it in a knot vpon their heads They haue no other dwelling but their boates which they turne vpside downe and vnder them they lay themselues all along vpon the bare ground They eate their flesh almost raw saue onely that they heate it a little vpon imbers of coales so doe they their fish Upon Magdalens day we with our boates went to the bancke of the riuer and freely went on shore among them whereat they made many signes and all their men in two or three companies began to sing and dance seeming to be very glad of our comming They had caused all the yong women to flee into the wood two or three excepted that stayed with them to ech of which we gaue a combe and a little bell made of Tinne for which they were very glad thanking ouâ Captaine rubbing his armes and breasts with their hands When the men saw vs giue something vnto those that had stayed it caused al the rest to come out of the wood to the end they should haue as much as the others These women were about twenty who altogether in a knot fell vpon our Captaine touching and rubbing him with their hands according to their maner of cherishing and making much of one who gaue to each of them a little Tinnebell then suddenly they began to dance and sing many songs There we found great store of Mackrels that they had taken vpon the shore with certaine nets that they make to fish of a kind of Hempe that groweth in that place where ordinarily they abide for they neuer come to the sea but onely in fishing time As farre as I vnderstand there groweth likewise a kinde of Millet as big as Peason like vnto that which groweth in Bresil which they eate instead of bread They had great store of it They call it in their tongue Kapaige They haue also Prunes that is to say Damsins which they dry for winter as we doe they call them Honesta They haue also Figs Nuts Apples and other fruits and Beans that they call Sahu their nuts Cahâhya If we shewed them any thing that they haue not nor know not what it is shaking their heads they will say Nohda which is as much to say they haue it not nor they know it not Of those things they haue they would with signes shew vs how to dresse them and how they grow They eate nothing that hath any taste of salt They are very great theeues for they will filth and steale whatsoeuer they can lay hold of and all is fish that commeth to neâ ¶ How our men set vp a great Câosse vpon the poinâ of the sayd Porte and the Captaine of those wild men after a long Oration was by our Captain appeased and contented that two of his Children should goe with him VPon the .24 of the moneth wee caused a faire hâgh Crosse to be made of the height of thirty foote which was made in the presence of many of them vpon the point of the entrance of the sayd hauen in the middest whereof we hanged vp a Shield with three Floure de Luces in it and in the top was carued in the wood with Anticke letters this posie Viue le Royde France Then before them all we set it vpon the sayd point They with great heed beheld both the making and setting of it vp So soone as it was vp we altogether kneeled downe before them with our hands toward Heauen yeelding God thankes and we made signes vnto them shewing them the Heauens and that all our saluation dependeth onely on him which in
them dwelleth whereat they shewed a great admiration looking first one at another and then vpon the Crosse. And after weâ were returned to our ships their Captaine clad with an old Beares skin with three of his sonnes and a brother of his with him came vnto vs in one of their boates but they came not so neere vs as they were wont to doe there he made a long Oration vnto vs shewing vs the crosse we had set vp and making a crosse with two fingers then did he shew vs all the Countrey about vs as if he would say that all was his and that wee should not set vp any crosse without his leaue His talke being ended we shewed him an Axe faining that we would giue it him for his skin to which he listned for by little and little hee came neere our ships One of our fellowes that was in our boate tooke hold on theirs and suddenly leapt into it with two or three more who enforced them to enter into our ships wherat they were greatly astonished But our Captain did straightwaies assure them that they should haue no harme nor any iniurie offred them at all entertained them very friendly making them eate and drinke Then did we shew them with signes that the crosse was but onely set vp to be as a light and leader which wayes to enter into the port and that wee would shortly come againe and bring good store of iron wares other things but that we would take two of his children with vs afterward bring them to the sayd port againe and so wee clothed two of them in shirts and coloured coates with red cappes and put about euery ones necke a copper chaine whereat they were greatly contented then gaue they their old clothes to their fellowes that went backe againe and we gaue to each one of those three that went backe a hatchet and some kniues which made them very glad After these were gone and had told the newes vnto their fellowes in the after noone there came to our ships sixe boates of them with fiue or sixe men in euery one to take their farewels of those two we had detained to take with vs and brought them some fish vttering many words which we did not vnderstand making signes that they would not remooue the crosse we had set vp ¶ How after we were departed from the sayd porte following our voyage along the sayd coast we went to discouer the land lying Southeast and Northwest THe next day being the 25 of the moneth we had faire weather and went from the said port and being out of the riuer we sailed Eastnortheast for after the entrance into the said riuer the land is enuironed about and maketh a bay iu maner of halfe a circle where bâing in our ships we might see all the coast sayling behind which we came to seeke the land lying Southeast and Northwest the course of which was distaut from the riuer about twentie leagues Of the Cape S. Aluise and Cape Memorancie and certaine other lands and how one of our Boates touched a Rocke and suddenly went ouer it ON munday being the 27 of the moneth about sunne-set we went along the said land as we haue said lying Southeast Northwest till Wednesday that we saw another Cape where the land beginneth to bend toward the East we went along about 15 leagues then doeth the land begin to turne Northward About three leagues from the sayd Cape we sâundâd and found 24 fadome water The said lands are plaine and the fairest and most without woods that we haue seene with goodly greene fields and medowes we named the sayd Cape S. Aluise Cape because that was his day it is 49 degrees and a halfe in latitude and in longitude* Ou Wednesday morning we were on the East side of the Cape and being almost night we went Northwestward for to approch neere to the sayd land which trendeth North and South From S. Aluise Cape to another called Cape Memorancie about fifâeene leagues the land beginneth to bend Northwest About three leagues from the sayd Cape we would needes sound but wee could finde no ground at 150 fadome yet went we along the said land about tenne leagues to the latitude of 50 degrees The Saturday following being the first of August by Sunne rising wee had certaine other landes lying North and Northeast that were very high and craggie and seemed to be mountaines betweene which were other low lauds with woods and riuers wee went abouâ the sayd lands as well on the one side as on the other still bending Northwest to see if it were either a gulfe or a passage vntill the fift of the moneth The distance from one land to the other is about fifteene leagues The middle bâtweene them both is 50 degrees and a terce in laâitude We had much adoe to go fiue miles farther the winds were fo great and the ride against vs. And at fiue miles end we might plainely see and perâeiue land on both sides which there beginneth to spread it selfe but because we rather fell then got way against the wind we went toward land purposing to goe to another Cape of land lying Southward which was the farthermost out into the sea that we could see abouâ fiue leagues from vs but so soâne as we came thither we found it to be naught else but Rockes stones craggie cliffes fuch as we had not found any where siââr we had sailed Southward from S. Iohns Cape and thâââ was the tide with vs which caried vs against the wind Westward so that as we were sayling along the sayd coast one of our boats touched a Rocke and suddenly went ouer but we were consârained to leape out for to direct iâ on according to the tide How after we had agreed and consuâted what was best to be done we purposed to returne and of S. Peters Streight and os Cape Tiennot AFter we had sailed along the sayd coastâ for the space of two houres âehold the tide began to turne against vs with so swift and raging a course that it was not possible for vs with 13 oares to row or get one stones cast farther so that we weâe constrained to leaue our boates with some of our men to guard them and 10 or 12 men went ashore to the sayd Cape where we found that the land beginneth to bend Southwest which hauing seene we came to our boats againe and so to our ships which were stil ready vnder saile hoping âo go forward but for all that they were fallen more then foure leagues to leeward from the place where we had left them where so soone as we came wee assembled together all our Captaines Masters and Mariners to haue their aduice and opinion what was best to be done and after that euery one had said considering that the Easterly winds began to bearesway and blow that the flood was so great that we did but fall and that there was nothing to be
course we had 45. fathom deep with white sand By this point or end of the Iland Marinduque beginneth the Iland of Myndoro which hath in length East and West fiue and twentie leagues and in bredth twelue leagues whereof the furthest point Southward lyeth vnder thirteene degrees and the furthest point Northward vnder thirteene degrees and 2 3. and the furthest point Westward vnder thirteene degrees This Iland with the Iland of Luçon maketh a chanell of fiue leagues broad and tenor twelue fathom deepe with muddie ground of diuers colours with white sande Fiue leagues forward from Marinâuque lyeth the riuer of the towne of Anagacu which is so shallowe that no shippes may enter into it From thence two leagues further lie the Ilands called Bacco which are three Ilands lying in a triangle two of them being distant from the land about three hundred cubits and between them and the land you may passe with small shippes And from the landâ to the other Iland are about two hundred cubites where it is altogether shallowes and sandes so that where the shippes may passe outward about 150. cubites from the landeâ you leaue both the Ilands on the South side running betweene the third Iland and the riuer called Rio del Bacco somewhat more from the middle of the chanell towardes the Iland which is about a league distant from the other the chanell is âenne fathom deepe with mud and shelles vpon the ground the riuer of Bacco is so shallowe that no ships may enter into it From this Iland with the same course two leagues forward you passe by the point called El Capo de Rescalco where wee cast out our lead and found that a man may passe close by the lande and there you shall finde great strong streames and halfe a league forward with the same course lyeth the towne of Mindoro which hath a good hauen for shippes of three hundred tunnes Three leagues Northward from the same hauen lyeth the Iland called Cafaa stretching East and West being hilly ground From the sayde towne of Myndoro wee hâlde our course Westnorthwest eight leagues till wee came to the poynt or hooke of the sandes called Tulen lying vpon the Iland of Luçon which sande or banke reacheth into the Sea halfe a league from the coast you must keepe about an hundred cubites from it where you finde eight faâhom water muddie and shellie ground you runne along by those sandes North and North and by West for the space of two leagues till you come to the riuer called Rio de Anasebo all the rest of the coast called De los Limbones to the mouth or entrie of the Bay called Manilla which are foure leagues is sayled with the same course The Limbones which are Ilands so called are high in forme like a paire of Organs with good hauens for small shippes running along by the Limbones and two leagues beyond them on the South side wee leaue the Ilands of Fortan and foure Ilands more but the three Ilands of Lubao which are very low lie vnder 13. degrees and 1 3. and the Limbones lie in the mouth or entrie of the Bay of Manilla vnder 14 degrees and 1 4. From thence we ranne Northwest for the space of sixe leagues to the hauen of Cabite keeping along by the land lying on the West side where it is shallowe and is called Los Baixos del Rio de Cannas The shallowes of the riuer of Reedes all along this Bay in the same course there is from ten to foure fathom deepe Being by the point or hooke of Cabite then wee kept but an hundred paces from itâ running Southwest southsouthwest and South vntill wee discouered the whole mouth or entrie of the Bay where wâ might anker at foure fathom about two hundred cubites from the lande and then the towne of Manilla was two leagues Northward from vs. Chap. 2. The course and voyage of the aforesayd Francisco Gualle out of the hauen or roade of Manilla to the hauen of Macao in China with all the courses and situations of the places SAyling out of the hauen of Cabite lying in the Bay of Manilla wee helde our course Westwarde for the space of eighteene leagues to the point called El Cabo de Sambaâles and when wee were eight leagues in our way wee left the two Ilands Maribillas on the South âide and sailed about a league from them the point of Samballes aforesayde lyeth vnder foureteene degrees and 2 3. being low land at the end of the same coast of Luçon on the West side From the hooke or point aforesayde wee ranne North and North and by West for the space of fiue and twentie leagues about a league from the coast of Luçon to the point called Cabo de Bullinao all this coast and Cape is high and hilly ground which Cape lyeth vnder sixteene degrees and 2 3. From this Cape de Bullinao we helde our course North and North and by East for 45. leagues to the point called El Cabo de Bojador which is the furthest lande Northwarde from the Iland Luçon lying vnder 19. degrees The Cape de Bullinao being past the lande maketh a great crecke or bough and from this creeke the coast runneth North to the point of Bojador being a land full of cliâfes and rockes that reach into the Sea and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground From the point of Bojador wee helde our course Westnorthwest an hundred and twentie leagues vnâill we came to the Iland called A Ilha Branca or the white Iland lying in the beginning of the coast and Bay of the riuer Canton vnder two and twentie degrees hauing foure and twentie fathom browne muddie ground From the Iland Ilha Branca wee helde the aforesayde course of Westnorthwest for the space of sixteene leagues to the Iland of Macao lying in the mouth of the riueâ of Canton and it maketh the riuer to haue two mouthes or entries and it is a small Iland about three leagues great Chap. 3. The Nauigation or course of the aforesayd Francisco Gualle out of the hauen of Macao to Newe Spaine with the situation and stretchings of the same with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voyage VVHen we had prepared our selues and had taken our leaues of our friends in Macao we set saile vpon the foure and twentieth of Iuly holding our course Southeast Southeast and by East being in the wane of the Moone for when the Moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betweene the Ilands because as then the water and streames run very strong to the Northwest wee trauailed through many narrowe chanels by night hauing the depth of eight or ten fathom with soft muddie ground vntill wee were about the Iland Ilha Branca yet we saw it not but by the height we knew that we were past it Being beyond it we ranne Eastsoutheast an hundred and fiftie leagues to get aboue the sands called Os
The ninth day wee departed from Pengwin Ilande and ranne South Southwest to King Philips citie which the Spaniards had built which Towne or citie had foure Fortes and euery Fort had in it one cast peeâe which pâââes were buryed in the ground the cariages were standing in their places vnburied wee digged for them and had thâm all They had contriâed their Citie veây well and seated it in the best place of the Stâeights for wood and water they hâd builded vp their Churches by themselues they had Lawes very seuere among themselues for they had ârecâed a Gibeâ whereon they had done execution vpon some of their company It seemed vnto vs that thâir whole liuing for a greaâ space was altogethâr vpon muskles and lympits for there was not any thing else to bee had except some Deere which came out of the mâuntaines downe to the fresh riuers to drinke These Spaniards which were there were only come to forââfie the Streights to the ende that no other nation should haue passage through into the Sâuâh sea sauing onely their owne but as it appeared it was not Gods will so to haue it For during the time that they were there which was two yeeres at the least they could neuer haue any thing to growe or in any wise prosper And on the other side the Indians oftentimes preyed vpon them vntill their victuals grewe so short their store being spent which they had brought with them out of Spaine and hauing no meanes to renew the same that they dyed like dogges in their houses and in their clothes wherein we found them still at our comming vntill that in the ende the towne being wonderfully taynted with the smell and the sauour of the dead people the rest which remayned aliue were driuen to burie such things as they had therein their towne either for prouision or for furniture and so to forsake the towne and to goe along the sea-side and seeke their victuals to preserue them from steruing taking nothing with them but euery man his harquebuze and his furniture that was able to cary it for some were not able to cary them for weakenesse and so liued for the space of a yeere and morâ with rootes leaues and sometimes a foule which they might kill with their peece To conclude they were determined to haue trauailed towards the riââr of Plate only bâing left aliue 23. persons wââreof two were wâmen which were the râmâinder of 4. hundred In this place we watered and woodded wâll and quietly Our Generall named this towne Port famine it standeth in 53. degrees by obseruation to the Southward The 14. day we departed from this place and ran South southwest and from thence southwest vnto cape Froward 5. leagues West Southwest which Cape is the Southermost part of all the streights and standeth in the latitude of 54. degrees Frâm which cape we ran Wâst and by north 5. leagues and put into a bay or Coue on the south side which we called Muskle-Coâe because there were great store of them we ridde therein 6. dayes the wind being still Westerly The 21. day of Ianuarie we departed from Muskle-âoue and went Northwest and by West 10. leagues to a very faire sandie Baye on the North side which our Generall called Elizabeth Baye and as wee ridde there that night one of our men dyed which went in the Hugh Gallant whose name was Grey a Carpenter by his occupation and was buryed there in that Baye The 22. wâe departed from Elizabeth Bay in the afternoone and went about 2. leagues from that place where there was a fresh water riuer where our Generall went vp with the ship-boate about three myles which riuer hath very good and pleasant ground about it and it is lowe and champion soyle and so we saw none other ground els in all the Streights but that was craggie rocks and monstrous high hilles and mountaines In this riuer are great store of Sauages which wee sawe and had conference with them They were men-âaterâ and fedde altogâther vpon rawe flesh and other filthie foode which people had preyed vpon some of the Spaniardes before spoken of For they had gotten kniues and peeces of Rapiers to make darces of They vsed all the meanes they could possibly to haue allured vs vp farther into the riuer of purpose to haue betrayed vs which being espyed by our Generall hee caused vs to shoote at them with our harquebuzes whereby we killed many of them So wee sayled from this riuer to the Chaneâl of Saint âerome which is 2. leagues off From the riuer of Saint Ierome about three or foure leagues wee ranne West vnto a Cape which is on the North side and from that Cape vnto the mouth of the Streights the course lyeth Northwest and by West and Northwest Betweene which place and the mouth of the Streights to the Southward we lay in Harborough vntill the three and twentieth of Februarie by reason of contrary windes and most vile and filthie fowle weather with such rayne and vehement stormie windes which came downe from the mountaines and high hilles that they hazarded the best cables and anchors that we had for to holde which if they had fayled wee had bene in great danger to haue bene cast away or at the least famished For during this tâme which was a full moneth we fedde almost altogether vpon muskles and limpits and birds or such as we could get on shore seeking euery day for them as the fowles of the ayre doe where they can finde foode in continuall raynie weather There is at euery myle or two myles ende an Harborough on both sides of the land And there we betweene the riuer of Saint Ierome and the mouth of the Streights going into the South sea about 34. leagues by estimation So that the length of thâ whole Sreights is about 90. leagues And the said mouâh of the Streights standeth in the same hââght that the entrance standeth in when we passe out of the North sea which is about 52. degrees and â
to the Southward of the line The 24. day of February wee entred into the South sea and on the South side of the going out of the Streights is a faire high Cape with a lowe poynt adioyning vnto it and on the North side are 4. or 5. Ilands which lye 6. leagues off the mayne and much broken and sunken ground about them by noone the same day wee had brought these Ilands East of vs 5. leagues off the winde being Southerly The first of March a storme tooke vs at North which night the ships lost the company of the Hugh Gallant beeing in 49. ½ and 45. leagues from the land This storme continued 3. or 4. dayes and for that time we in the Hugh Gallant being separated from the other 2. ships looked euery houre to sinke our barke was so leake and our selues so diluered and weakened with freeing it of water that
called the Alcatrarza and there he foure little ilands about it Also you may know it by the trending of the land vnto the Southwards Item If you will go in at the Northermost end of S. Sebastian you must take heed of a sand that lieth on the Northeast part of the iland but you may be bolde to borrow on the iland for thâ sand lieth off the maine side Also you mây anker on the Northermost part of the iland in tennâ fadoms and the maine is distant from you where you shall ride two leagues off Item If you will come in at the Southermost end of the iland of S. Sebastian your course from the Alcatrarza is Southwest Northeast and their distance is 6 leagues the one from the other Item Unto the Southwards of the riuer Plate being in the latitude of 45 degrees and 60 leagues off the maine you shall haue shoalding in 60 fadoms or 65 fadoms oazie sand and then halling in for the shore Westsouthwest â6 leagues you shall haue 50 fadoms oaze and you shall haue faire shoalding all along Item In the latitude of 47 â
you shall see about one mile in length not passing one league oâ the shore a ledge of broken ground but no danger Also you shall haue very faire shoalding all along the coast and the land lying South and North vntill you come vnto port Desire which standeth in 48 degrees Item If you will go into port Desire on the North side there lieth one ledge of rocks about league distant from the shore Also on the North side at the mouth of the harborow there lieâ couple of rocks which are at halfe flood vnder water but be bolde to borrow on the Southermost shore for there is no danger and you shall haue no lesse then 6 fadâms water at a low water the harborow lying East and West Also you may know the harborow by one litle iland that lieth Southeast off the mouth of the harborow and it is distant 4 leagues Furthârmore you may know the harborow by an high rocke that âtandeth on the South side and this rocke is very much like a watch tower Also if you be any thing in you may anker in 5 fadoms at a low water Item It floweth there South and North and higheth at spring âides 3 fadoms and an halfe water and in the offing the flood setteth to the Northward Item In the latitude of 48 degrees 50 minuts you shall haue 44 fadoms blacke sand about 5 leagues off and about 3 leagues off you shall haue 25 fadoms and great shingle stones Item in the latitude of 49 degrees ½ you shall haue sounding in 38 fadoms oazie sand Item In the latitude of 51 degrees 10 minuts you shall haue soundings 4 leagues from the shore in 44 fadoms small blacke stones Soundings within the entrance of the Streights ITem About 2 leagues from the Northermost shore you shall haue 38 fadoms blacke sand and all along you shall haue deepe watâr not lesse then 18 or 20 fadoms in the faire way Soundings on the coast of Chili in the South sea ITem In the latitude of 36 degrees you shall haue soundings in 12 fadoms 2 miles from the sand browne sand Item In the latitude of 35 degrees you shall haue soundings one league off from the land in 10 fadoms wâite sand Soundings on the coast of New Spaine in the South sea ITem In the latitude of 14 degrees to the North of the line you shall haue soundings 4 leagues from the land in 30 fadoms browne sand Item From the latitude of 14 degrees vnto the latitude of 15 degrees you shall haue faire shoalding 3 leagues from the land Soundings on the coast of Africa vnto the Eastward of the cape of Buena Esperança 40 leagues ITem To the Eastwards of the cape of Buena Esperança 40 leagues in the latitude of 34 degrees and 10 minuts 8 leagues from the land you shall haue 65 fadome and browne sand A note of the lying of the land vnto the Southward of Port Desire IN primis Seales bay standeth vnto the Southwards of Port Desire 12 leagues Southsouthwest Furthermore vnto the Southwards of Seales bay 3 leagues you shall haue very low land Also more vnto the Southwards of Seales bay 7 leagues in the heighth of 48 degrees 40 minuts you shall see a râcke 5 leagues off the shore the land lying Southwest and by South Item In the latitude of 49 degrees ½ you shall see a small flat Iland about a league and an halfe off the shore the land lying Sâutâwest and by South Furtheâmore from the latitude of 49 degrees vnto the lâtâtude of 50 degrees the land lieth Souâh and by West and is high land Item From the latâtude of 50 degrees vnto the latitude of 50 degrees 40 minuts the land lieth Southwest and by South Furthermore frâm the latitude of 50 dâgrees 40 minuts vnto the latitude of 52 degrees 17 minuts the land lieth South and by West North and by East Item In the sayd latitude of 52 degrees 17 minuts there goeth in an harborow which is to be knowen by a long beache that lieth on the South side of the harborow Moreouer the sayd harborow standeth 12 leagues vnto the Northwards of Cape Ioy. Furthermore from the latitude of 52 degrees 17 mânuts vnto the latitude of 52 dâgrees 40 minuts in which heigâh standeth Cape Ioy the land lieth Southsoutheast and Northnorthwest Item Comming from the Northwards yâu shall see before you come âo Cape Ioy a very long beach about the length of 8 leagues being 5 leagues short of the cape vnto the Northwards Also vnto the Southwards of the cape you shall see another beach about a league long adioyning hard vnder the cape about which beach is the entrance of the Streights of Magellan the which Straights me in breadth sixâ leagues ouer from the cape vnto the South shore lying South and by East Item From Cape Ioy being the entrance of the streight of Magellan vnto the first narrow passage of the sayd streight the course is West and by North and East and by South and are distant 18 leagues the land being in breadth from the one side to the other one league Item From the first narrow vnto the second narrow passage the course is West by Southâ and East and by North and the distance is 12 leagues and in breadth the one side is from the other about two leagues ouer Item From the second narrow vnto the islands that be called Elizabeth Bartholomew and Penguin ilands the distance is 5 leagues and the course is Southwest and Northeast the ilandâ being distant a league and an halfe the one from the other Item From the sayd ilands vnto Port Famine is 16 leagues the course is Southsouthwest and Northnortheast Moreouer from Port Famine vnto Cape Froward the course is South and by West and North and by East and they are distant 8 leagues asunder Item From Cape Froward
still along the shoare and as soone as we had opened the point of the land we raysed another head-land about a league off the point which had a rocke lying off it into the sea and that they thought to be the place which we sought When we came thwart the place they knew it and we put wares into our boate and the ship being within halfe a mile of the place ankered in fine fadonic water and faire ground We went on shoare with our boate and ankered about ten of the clocke in the forenoone we saw many boates lying vpon the shoare and diuers came by vs but none of them would come neere vs being as we iudged afraid of vs because that foure men were taken perforce the last yeere from this place so that no man came to vs whereupon we went aboord againe and thought here to haue made no sale yet towardes night a great sort came downe to the water side and waued vs on shoare with a white flagge and afterwarde their Captaine came downe and many men with him and sate him downe by the shore vnder a tree which when I perceiued I tooke things with me to giue him at last he sent a boat to call to vs which would not come neere vs but made vs signes to come againe the next day but in fine I got them to come aboord in offering them things to giue to their captaine which were two elles of cloth one latten bason one white bason a bottle a great piece of beefe and sixe bisket cakes which they receiued making vs signes to come againe the next day saying that their Captain was Grand Capitane as appeared by those that attended vpon him with their darts and targets and other weapons This towne is very great and stands vpon a hill among trees so that it cannot well be seene except a man be neere it to the Eastward of it vpon the hill hard by the towne stand 2. high trees which is a good marke to knowe the towne And vnder the towne lieth another hill lower then it whereupon the sea beates and that end next the sea is all great blacke rockes and beyonde the towne in a bay lieth another small towne The 13 day in the morning we tooke our boate and went to shoare and stayed till ten a clocke and no man came to vs we went about therefore to returne aboord and when the Negroes saw that they came running downe with a flagge to waue vs againe so we ankered againe and then one shewed vs that the Captaine would come downe by and by we saw a saile in the meane time passe by vs but it was small and we regarded it not Being on shore wee made a tilt with our dares and sayle and then there came a boate to vs with fiue men in her who brought vs againe our bottle and brought me a hen making signes by the sunne that within two houres the marchants of the countrey would come downe and buy all that we had so I gaue them sixe Manillios to carry to their Captaine and they made signes to haue a pledge of vs and they would leaue vs another man and we willing to doe so put one of our men in their boate but they would not giue vs one of theirs so we tooke our man againe and there tarried for the marchants and shortly after one came downe arrayed like their Captaine with a great traine after him who saluted vs friendly and one of the chiefest of them went and sate downe vnder a tree where the last yere the Captaine was wont to sit and at last we perceiued a great many of them to stand at the ende of a hollow way and behinde them the Portugales had planted a base who suddenly shotte at vs but ouershot vs and yet we were in a manner hard by them and they shot at vs againe before we could ship our oares to get away but did no hurt Then the Negroes came to the rocks hard by vs and discharged calieuers at vs and againe the Portugales shot off their base twise more and then our ship shot at them but the rockes and hilles defended them Then we went aboord to goe from this place seeing the Negroes bent against vs because that the last yeere M. Gainsh did take away the Captaines sonne and three others from this place with their golde and all that they had about them which was the cause that they became friends with the Portugales whom before they hated as did appeare the last yeere by the courteous intertainement which the Trinitie had there when the Captaine came aboord the shippe and brought them to his towne and offered them ground to build a Castle in and there they had good sales The 14 day we wayed and plyed backe againe to seeke the Hinde which in the morning we met and so we turned both backe to the Eastwardes to see what we could doe at that place where the Trinitie did sell her right frifes the last yeere The Hinde had taken eighteene ounces and a halfe more of golde of other Negroes the day after that we left them This day about one of the clocke we espied certaine boates vpon the sand and men by them and went to them with marchandizes and tooke three ounces of gold for 18 fuffs of cloth euery fuffe three yards and a halfe after one angell and 12 graines the fuffe and then they made me signes that the next day I should haue golde enough so the Master tooke the Hinde with Iohn Sauill and Iohn Makeworth and went to seeke the place aforesaid I with Richard Pakeman remained in this place to see what we could do the next day and when the Negroes perceiued our ship to go away they feared that the other would follow so sent forth 2 boats to vs with 4 men in them requiring vs to tary to giue them one man for a pledge and 2 of them should tary with vs for him so Edward M. Morleis seruant seeing these men so earnest therein offered himselfe to be pledge and we let him goe for two of them one whereof had his waights and scales and a chaine of golde about his necke and another about his arme They did eate of such things as we had and were well contented In the night the Negroes kept a light vpon the shoare thwart of vs and about one of the clocke we heard and saw the light of a base which shot off twise at the said light and by and by discharged two calieuers which in the end we perceiued to be the Portugals brigandine which followed vs from place to place to giue warning to the people of the countrey that they should not deale with vs. The 15 day in the morning the Captaine came downe with 100 men with him and brought his wife and many others brought their wiues also because their towne was 8 miles vp in the countrey and they determined to lie
done with them William Cretton and Edward Selman were of the opinion that it should be good either to carry them into Spaine and there to make sale of the goods or els into Ireland or to returne backe againe into England with them if the winde would permit it But I waying what charge we had of our Masters first by mouth and afterwards by writing that for no such matter we should in any case prolong the time for feare of losing the voyage and considering that the time of the yeere was very farre spent and the money that we should make of the wines not very much in respect of the commodity which we hoped for by the voyage perswaded them that to goe into Ireland the winde being Easterly as it was might be an occasion that we should be locked in there with that winde and so lose our voyage and to cary them into Spaine seeing they sailed so ill that hauing all their sailes abroad we kept them company onely with our foresailes and without any toppe sailes abroad so that in euery two dayes sailing they would haue hindered vs more then one and besides that the winde being Easterly we should not be able to seaze the coast with them besides all this the losse of time when we came thither was to be considered whereupon I thought it not good to carry them any further And as for carying them into England although the winde had bene good as it was not considering what charge we had of our Masters to shift vs out of the way for feare of a stay by reason of the warres I held it not in any wise conuenient But notwithstanding all this certeine of our company not being herewith satisfied went to our Master to know his opinion therein who made them a plaine answere that to cary them into any place it was not the best way nor the profit of their Masters And he tolde them further that if the time were prolonged one moneth longer before they passed the Cape but a few men would go the voyage All these things considered we all paused and determined at the last that euery man should take out of the hulks so much as he could well bestow for necessaries and the next morning to conclude what should be further done with them So we tooke out of them for vs foureteene tâânes and a halfe of wine and one tunne we put into the pinnesse More we tooke out one hogshead of Aquauitae Sixe takes of rozzen A small halser for ties and certeine chesnuts The Christopher tooke out Ten tunnes of wine and one hogshead A quantity of Aquauitae Shall-lines Chesnuts Sixe double bases with their chambers And their men broke vp the hulks chests and tooke out their compasses and running glasses the sounding leade and line and candles and cast some of their beefe ouer boord and spoiled them so much that of very pity we gaue them a compasse a running glasse a lead and a line certaine bread and candles and what apparell of theirs we could finde in their ship we gaue them againe and some money also of that which William Crompton tooke for the ransome of a poore Frenchman who being their Pilot downe the Riuer of Bordeux they were not able to set him a shore againe by reason of the foule weather The Tyger also tooke out of the smaller hulke sixe or seuen tunnes of wine one hogshead of Aquauitae and certeine rozzen and two bases he tooke out of the great hulke The first day of February in the morning we all came together againe sauing W. Crompton who sent vs word that he was contented to agree to that order which we should take Now Edward Selman was of this opinion that it was not best to let the ships depart but put men into them to cary them into England which thing neither we nor our Master would agree vnto because we thought it not good to vnman our ships going ouâward considering how dangerous the time was so that in fine we agreed to let them depart and giue them the rest of the wine which they had in their ships of the Frenchmens for the fraight of that which we had taken and for their ordinance rozzen aquauitae chesnuts and other things which the company had taken from them So we receiued a bill of their handes that they confessed how much Frenchmens goods they had and then we let them depart The 10 day we reckoned our selues to be 25 leagues from the Grand Canarie and this day about nine of the clocke our pinnesse brake her rudder so that we were forced to towe her at the sterne of the Minion which we were able to doe and yet kept company with the rest of our ships About eleuen of the clocke this day we had sight of the Grand Canarie The 11 day when we came to the Iland we perceiued that it was the I le of Tenerif then in deed wee had sight of the Grand Canarie which lieth 12 leagues to the Eastwards of Tenerif and because the road of Tenerif is foule ground and nothing was there to be gotten for the helping of our pinnesse hauing the winde large we agreed to go with the Grand Canarie The 12 day we came into the roade of the towne of Canarie which lieth one league from the same towne And after we had shot off diuers pieces of ordinance to saluâe the towne and the castle the gouernour and captaines of the Iland sent to vs which were the captaines of the ships requiring vs to come a shore And when we came to them they receiued vs very frendly offering vs their owne Iennets to ride to the towne and what other friendship they could shew vs and we went to the towne with two English Marchants which lay there and remained in their house that day The second day following we came aboord to deliuer our marchandise and to get our pinnesse mended The 14 day came into the road the Spanish fleet which was bound to the Emperours Indies which were in number nineteene saile whereof sixe were ships of foure hundred and fiue hândrâd a piece the rest were of two hundred an hundred and fifty and of an hundred When they were come to an ancre they saluted vs with ordinance and so we did them in like case And afterwards the Admirall who was a knight sent his pinnesse to desire me to come to him and when I came to him he receiued me friendly and was desirous to heare somewhat of the state of England and Flanders And after he had made me a banquet I departed and I being gone vnto the boat hee caused one of his gentlemen to desire Francisco the Portugall which was my interpreter to require me to furle my flagge declaring that hee was Generall of the Emperours fleet Which thing being come aboord Francisco shewed me and because I refused to furle it and kept it foorth still certaine of the souldiers in the ships shot diuers harquebush
and made in the yeere of our Lord 1576. THe 7. of Iune being Thursday the two Barks viz. the Gabriel and the Michael our Pinnesse set saile at Ratcliffe and bare down to Detford and there we ancred the cause was that our Pinnesse burst her boultspriâ and forâmâst aboard of a ship that rode at Detford else wee meant to haue past that day by the Court then at Grenewich The 8. day being Friday about 12 of the clocke we wayed at Detford and set saile all three of vs and bare downe by the Court where we shotte off our ordinance and made the best shew we could Her Maiestie beholding the same commended it and bade vs farewell with shaking her hand at vs out of the window Afterward shee sent a Gentleman aboord of vs who declared that her Maiestie had good liking of our doings and thanked vs for it and also willed our Captaine to come the next day to the Court to take his leaue of her The same day towards night M. Secretarie Woolly came aboorde of vs and declared to the company that her Maiestie had appointed him to giue them charge to be obedient and diligent to their Captaine and gouernours in all things and wished vs happie successe The 12. day being ouer against Grauesend by the castle or blockehouse we obserued the latitude which was 51. degrees 33. minâ And in that place the variation of the Compasse is 11. degrees and a halfe The 24. day at 2. of the clocke after noone I had sight oâ Faire yle being from vs 6. leagues North and by East and when I brought it Northwest and by North it did rise at the Southermost ende with a litle hommocke and swâmpe in the middes The 25. day from 4. to 8. a clocke in the forenoone the winde at Northwest and by North a fresh gale I cast about to the Westward the Southermost head of Shotland called Swinborne head Northnorthwest from me and the land of Faire yle West Southwest from me I sailed directly to the North head of that said land scunding as I ranne in hauing 60. 50. and 40. fathoms and gray redde shels and within halfe a mile of that Island there are 36. fathoms for I sailed to that Island to see whether there were any roadesteede for a Northwest winde and I found by my sounding hard rockes and foule ground and deepe water within two cables length of the shoare 28. fathome and so did not ancre but plied to and fro with my foresaile and mizen till it was a high water vnder the Island The tide setteth there Northwest and Southeast the flood setteth Southeast and the ebbe Northwest The 26. day hauing the winde at South a faire gale sayling from Faire yle to Swinborne head I did obserue the latitude the Island of Fowlay being West Northwest froÌ me 6. leagues and Swinborne head East southeast from me I found my eleuation to be 37. degr and my declination 22. degr 46. min. So that my latitude was 59. degr 46. min. At that present being neere to Swinborne head hauing a leake which did trouble vs as also to take in fresh water I plyed roome with a sound which is called S. Tronions and there did ancre in seuen fathoms water and faire sande You haue comming in the sounds mouth in the entring 17.15.12.10.9.8 and 7. fathoms and the sound lyeth in North northwest and there we roade to a West sunne stopped our leake and hauing refreshed our selues with water at a North northwest sunne I set saile from S. Tronions the winde at South Southest and turned out till wee were cleare of the sound and so sailed West to go cleare of the Island of Fowlay And running off toward Fowlay I sounded hauing fiftie fathome and streâmâe ground and also I sounded Fowlay being North from mee one league off that Islande hauing fiftie fathome at the South head and streamie ground like broken otmell and one shell being redde and white like mackerell The 27. day at a South sunne I did abserue the latitude the Island of Fowlay being from me two leagues East Northeast I found my selfe to be in latitude 59. degrees 59. min. truly obserued the winde at South Southwest I sailed West and by North. From 12. to foure a clocke afternoone the wind at South a faire gale the shippe sailed West and by North 6. leagues and at the ende of this watch I sounded hauing 60. fathome with little stones and shels the Island from vs 8. leagues East The first of Iuly from 4. to 8. a clocke wee sailed West 4. glasses 4. leagues and at that present we had so much winde that we spooned afore the sea Southwest 2. leagues The 3. day we found our Compasse to bee varied one point to the Westwards this day from 4. to 8. a clocke we sailed West and by North 6. leagues From 8. to 12. a clocke at noone West and by North 4. leagues At that present I found our Compasse to be varied 11. deg and one 4. part to the Westwards which is one point The 11 day at a Southeast sunne we had sight of the land of Friseland bearing from vs West northwest 16. leagues and rising like pinacles of steeples and all couered with snowe I found my selfe in 61. degr of latitude Wee sailed to the shoare and could finde no ground at 150â fathoms we hoised out our boate and the Captaine with 4. men rowed to the shoare to get on land but the land lying full of yce they could not get on land and so they came aboord againe We had much adoe to get cleare of the yce by reason of the fogge Yet from Thursday 8. a clocke in the morning to Friday at noone we sailed Southwest 20. leagues The 18. day at a Southeast sunne I found the sunne to be eleuated 33. deg And at a Southsoutheast sunne 40. deg So I obserued it till I found it at the highest and then it was eleuated 52. deg I iudged the variation of the Compasse to be 2. points and a halfe to the Westward The 21. day we had sight of a great drift of yce seeming a firme lande and we cast Westward to be cleare of it The 26. we had sight of a land of yce the latitude was 62. degrees and two minutes The 28. day in the morning was very foggie but at the clearing vp of the fogge wee had sight of lande which I supposed to be Labrador with great store of yce about the land I ranne in towards it and sownded but could get no ground at 100. Fathom and the yce being so thicke I could not get to the shoare and so lay off and came cleare of the yce Upon Munday we came within a mile of the shoare and sought a harborowe all the sownd was full of yce and our boate rowing a shoare could get no ground at a 100. fathom within a Cables length of
company of vs and shaped her course towards Orkney because that way was better knowne vnto them and arriued at Yermouth The 30 of August with the force of the wind and a surge of the sea the Master of the Gabriel and the Boatswain were striken both ouerboord hardly was the Boatswain recouered hauing hold on a roape hanging ouerboord in the sea and yet the Barke was laced fore and after with ropes a breast high within boorde This Master was called William Smith being but a yong man and a very sufficient mariner who being all the morning before exceeding pleasant told his Captaine he dreamed that he was cast ouerboord and that the Boatswain had him by the hand and could not saue him and so immediately vpon the end of his tale his dreame came right euilly to passe and indeed the Boatswain in like sort held him by one hand hauing hold on a rope with the other vntill his force fayled and the Master drowned The height being taken we found our selues to be in the latitude of degrees and a halfe and reckoned our selues from the Queenes Cape homeward about two hundreth leagues The last of August about midnight we had two or three great and sudden flawes or stormes The first of September the storme was growen very great and continued almost the whole day and night and lying a hull to tarrie for the Barkes our ship was much beaten with the seas euery sea almost ouertaking our poope so that we were constrained with a bunt of our saile to trie it out and ease the rolling of our ship And so the Gabriel not able to beare any sayle to keepe company with vs and our ship being higher in the poope and a tall ship whereon the winde had more force to driue went so fast away that we lost sight of them and left them to God and their good fortune of Sea The second day of September in the morning it pleased God of his goodnesse to send vs a calme whereby we perceiued the Rudder of our ship torne in twaine and almost ready to fall away Wherefore taking the benefite of the time we slung halfe a dozen couple of our best men ouer boord who taking great paines vnder water driuing plankes and binding with ropes did well strengthen and mend the matter who returned the most part more then halfe dead out of the water and as Gods pleasure was the sea was calme vntill the worke was finished The fift of September the height of the Sunne being taken we found our selues to be in the latitude of degrees and a halfe In this voyage commonly wee tooke the latitude of the place by the height of the sunne because the long day taketh away the light not onely of the Polar but also of all other fixed Starres And here the North Starre is so much eleuated aboue the Horizon that with the staffe it is hardly to bee well obserued and the degrees in the Astrolabe are too small to obserue minutes Therefore wee alwaies vsed the Staffe and the sunne as fittest instruments for this vse Hauing spent foure or fiue dayes in trauerse of the seas with contrary winde making our Souhter way good as neere as we could to raise our degrees to bring our selues with the latitude of Sylley wee tooke the height the tenth of September and found our selues in the latitude of degrees and ten minutes The eleuenth of September about sixe a clocke at night the winde came good Southwest we vered sheat and see our course Southeast And vpon Thursday the twelfth of September taking the height wee were in the latitude of and a halfe and reckoned our selues not past one hundred and fifty leagues short of Sylley the weather faire the winde large at Westsouthwest we kept our course Southeast The thirteenth day the height being taken wee found our selues to be in the latitude of degrees the wind Westsouthwest then being in the height of Sylley and we kept our course East to run in with the sleeue or chanel so called being our narrow seas and reckoned vs short of Sylley twelue leagues Sonday the 15 of September about foure of the clocke we began to sound with our lead and had ground at 61 fadome depth white small sandy ground and reckoned vs vpon the backe of Sylley and set our course East and by North Eastnortheast and Northeast among The sixteenth of September about eight of the clocke in the morning sounding we had 65. fadome osey sand and thought our selues thwart of S. Georges channell a little within the banks And bearing a small saile all night we made many soundings which were about fortie fadome and so shallow that we could not well tell where we were The seuenteenth of September we sounded and had âorty fadome and were not farre off the lands ând finding branded sand with small wormes and Cockle shelles and were shotte betwene Sylley and the lands ende and being within the bay we were not able to double the pointe with a South and by East way but were faine to make another boord the wind being at Southwest and by West and yet could not double the point to come cleere of the lands end to beare along the channel and the weather cleered vp when we were hard aboord the shore and we made the lands end perfit and so put vp along Saint Georges chanel And the weather being very foule at sea we couered some harborough because our steerage was broken and so came to ancor in Padstow road in Cornewall But riding there a very dangerous roade we were aduised by the countrey to put to Sea againe and of the two euils to choose the lesse for there was nothing but present perill where we toade whereupon we plyed along the channell to get to Londy from whence we were againe driuen being but an open roade where our Anker came home and with force of weather put to Seas againe and about the three and twentieth of September arriued at Milford Hauen in Wales which being a very good harborough made vs happy men that we had receiued such long desired safetie About one moneth after our arriuall here by order from the Lords of the Counsell the ship came up to Bristow where the Ore was committed to keeping in the Castel there Here we found the Gabriel one of the Barkes arriued in good safetie who hauing neuer a man within boord very sufficient to bring home the ship after the Master was lost by good fortune when she came vpon the coast met with a ship of Bristow at sea who conducted her in safety thither Here we heard good tidings also of the arriuall of the other Barke called the Michael in the North parts which was not a little ioyful vnto vs that it pleased God so to bring vs to a safe meeting againe and wee lost in all the voyage only one man besides one that dyed at sea which was sicke before he came
downe and rising vp suddenly againe hee cryed thrise with a loude voyce Chiogh Chiogh Chiogh Thereupon nine or tenne of his fellowes running right vp ouer the bushes with great agilite and swiftnesse came towardes vs with white staues in their handes like halfe pikes and their dogges of colour blacke not so bigge as a greyhounde followed them at the heeles but wee retired vnto our boate without any hurt at all receiued Howbeit one of them brake an hogshead which wee had filled with fresh water with a great branche of a treâ which lay on the ground Upon which occasion we bestowed halfe a dousââ muskets shotte vpon them which they auoyded by falling flatte to the earth and afterwarde retired themselues to the woodes One of the Sauages which seemed to bee their Captaine ware a long mantle of beastes skinnes hanging on one of his shoulders The rest were all naked except their priuities which were couered with a skinne tyed behinde After they had escaped our shotte they made a great fire on the shore belike to giue their fellowes warning of vs. The kindes of trees that wee noted to bee here were goodly Okes Firre trees of a great height a kinde of tree called of vs Quickbeame and Cherie trees and diuerse other kindes to vs vnknowne because wee stayed not long with diligence to obserue them and there is great shewe of rosen pitch and tarre Wee found in both the places where wee went on land abundance of Raâpeses Strawberies Hurtes and herbes of good smâll and diuers good for the skuruie and grasse very ranke and of great length Wee sawe fiue or sixe boates sayling to the Southwestwardes of Cape Briton which wee iudged to bee Christians which had some trade that way Wee sawe also while wee were on shore the manner of their hanging vp of their fish and flesh with withes to dry in the ayre they also lay them vpon raâtes and hurdles and make a smoake vnder them or a softe fire and so drie them as the Sauages vse to doe in Virginia While wee lay foure leagues South of Cape Briton wee sounded and had sixtie fathomes blacke ozie ground And sayling thence Westwarde nine or ten leagues off the short we had twenty foure fathomes redde sande and small whitish stones Wee continued our course so farre to the Southwest that wee brought ourselues into the latitude of fourtie foure degrees and an half hauing sayled fiftie or sixtie leagues to the Southwest of Cape Briton We found the current betwene this Cape Briton and Cape Rey to set out toward the Eastsoutheast In our course to the West of Cape Briton we saw excâeding great store of seales and abundance of Porposes whereof we killed eleuen We sawe Whales also of all âortes aswell small as great and here our men tooke many berded Coddes with one teate vnderneath which are like to the Northeast Cods and better then those of Newfoundland From our arriuall at the hauen of Saint Francis in Newfoundland which was as is aforesayde the eleuenth of Iuly we continued beating vp and downe on the coast of Arambeâ to the West and Southwest of Cape Briton vntill the twentie eight of September fully by the space of eleuen weekes and then by the perswasion of our Master and certaine others wee shaped our course homeward by the Isles of the Açores and came first to Coruo and Flores where beating vp and downe and missing of expected prayâ we sayled by Tercera and from thence to Saint Michael where we sought to boorde a Portugall shippe which we found too well appointed for vâ to bring along with vs and so being forced to leaue them behinde and hauing wasted all our victuals wee were constrained against our willes to hasten home vnto our narrowe Seas but it was the two and twentieth of December before wee could get into the Downes where for lacke of winde wee kept our Christmas with dry breade onely for dropping of our clothes One thing very strange hapened in this voyage to witte that a mightie great Whale followed our shippe by the space of many dayes as we passed by Cape Razo which by no meanes wee coulde chase from our ship vntill one of our men fell ouerboord and was drowned after which time shee immediatly forsooke vs and neuer afterward appeared vnto vs. A briefe note concerning the voyage of M. George Drake of Apsham to the Isle of Ramea in the aforesayd yere 1593. IN the beginning of the former relation written by Richard Fisher seruant to the worshipfull Master Hill of Redriffe is as you reade a briefe reporte of their loosing of their consort the shippe of Master George Drake of Apsham which though shee came directly to the Isle of Ramea yet because shee was not ready so soone by two moneths as she ought to haue bene she was not onely the hinderance of her consort the Marigolde lost the season of the yere for the making of her voyage of killing the Morses or Sea Oxen which are to be taken in Aprill May and Iune but also suffered the fit places and harboroughs in the Isle which are but two as farre as I can learne to be forestalled and taken vp by the Britons of Saint Malo and the Baskes of Saint Iohn de Luz by comming a day after the Fayre as wee say Which lingering improuidence of our men hath bene the ouerthrowe of many a worthy enterprize and of the vndertakers of the same The relation of this voyage at large I was promised by the Authour himselfe but the same not comming to my handes in tyme I am constrained to leaue it out The want whereof for the better vnderstanding of the state of the sayde Island the frequenting of that gainefull trade by the aforesayd nations of the of Britons and Baskes may in part be supplyed by the voyage of Master Charles Leigh to the sayde Island of Ramea which also comming much too late thither as Master George Drake had done was wholly preuented and shutte out to his and his friendes no small detriment and mischiefe and to the discouraging of others hereafter in the sayd gainefull and profitable trade Neuertherthelesse albeit hitherto the successe hath not answered our expectation through our âwne default as is abouesaidâ yet I was very willing to set downe in briefe and homely stile some mention of these three voyages of our owne men The first of M. George Drake the second of M. Siluester Wyet the third of M. Charles Leigh because they are the first for ought that hitherto is come to my knowledge of our owne Nation that haue conducted English ships so farre within this gulfe of S. Laurence and haue brought vs true relation of the manifold gaine which the French Britaynes Baskes and Biskaines do yerely returne from the sayd partes while wee this long time haue stood still and haue bene idle lookers on making courtisie who should giue the first aduenture or once being giuen who
Isle of Ascension toward the Southeast are East and West and there is 15. leagues distance betweene them The Bay of Molues or Gaspay is in 48. degrees and the coast lyeth North and South and taketh a quarter of the Northeast and Southwest vnto the Bay of Heate and there are 3. Isles one great one and two smal from the Bay of Heate vntill you passe the Monts nostre Dame al the land is high and good ground al couered with trees Ognedoc is a good Bay and lyeth Northnorthwest and Southsoutheast and it is a good Harbour and you must saile along the shore on the Northside by reason of the low point at the entrance therof and when you are passed the poynt bring your selfe to an ancre in 15. or 20. fathoms of water toward the South shore and here within this Hauen are two riuers one which goeth toward the Northwest and the other to the Southwest And on this coast there is great fishing for Coddes and other fish where there is more store then is in Newfoundland and better fish And here is great store of riuer foule as Malards wild Geese and others And here are all sorts of trees Rose trees Raspesses Filbird trees Apple trees Peare trees and it is hotter here in Sommer then in France The Isle of Ascension and the 7. Isles which lie on the North shore lie Southeast and Westnorthwest and are distant 24. leagues The Cape of Ognedoc and the 7. Isles are Northnorthwest and Southsoutheast are distant 35. leagues The Cape of Monts nostre Dame and the 7. Isles are North and South and the cut ouer from the one to the other is 25. leagues and this is the breadth of this Sea and from thence vpward it beginneth to waxe narrower and narrower The 7. Isles are in 50. degrees and ½ The 7. Isles and the poynt of Ongear lie Northeast and Southwest and the distance betweene them is 15. leagues and betweene them are certaine small Islands and the point of Ongear and the mountaines Nostre Dame which are on the South side of the entrance of the riuer are North and South and the cut ouer from the one to the other is ten leagues and this is here the abredth of the Sea The poynt of Ongear and the riuer of Caen lie East and West and they are distant 12. leagues And all the coast from the Isle of Ascension hither is very good ground wherein growe all sortes of trees that are in France and some fruits The poynt of Ongear is in 49. degrees and ¼ And the riuer of Caen and the Isle of Raquelle lye Northeast and Southwest and they are distant 12. leagues The Isle of Raquelle is in 48. degrees and â
In this riuer of Caen there is great sâore of fish And here the Sea is not past 8 leagues broad The Isle of Raquelle is a very low Isle which is neere vnto the South shore hard by a high Cape which is called the Cape of Marble There is no danger there at all And betweene Raquelle and the Cape of Marble ships may passe And there is not from the Isle to the South shore aboue one league and from the Isle vnto the North shore about foure leagues The Isle of Raquelle and the entrance of Saguenay are Northeast Westsouthwest and are distant 14. leagues and there are betweene them two small Islandes neere the North shore The entrance of Saguenay is in 48. degrees and â
and the entrance hath not past a quarter of a league in breadth and it is dangerous toward the Southwest and two or three leagues within the entrance it beginneth to waxe wider and wider and it seemeth to bee as it were an arme of the Sea And I thinke that the same runneth into the Sea of Cathay for it sendeth foorth there a great current and there doth runne in that place a terrible rase or tyde And here the riuer from the North shore to the South shore is not past foure leagues in breadth and it is a dangerous passage betweene both the lands because there lie bankes of rockes in the riuer The Isle of Raquelle and the Isle of Hares lye Northeast and Southwest and take ¼ of the East and the West and they are distant 18. leagues The entrance of Saguenay and the Isle of Liepueres or Hares lie Northnortheast Southsouthwest and are distant 5. leagues The entrance of Saguenay and the Isle of Raquelle are Northnorthwest and Southsouthwest and are distant three leagues The Isle of Hares is in 48 and 1 16 of a degree From the Mountaines of Nostre Dame vnto Canada and vnto Hochelaga all the land on the South coast is faire a lowe land and goodly champaigne all couered with trees vnto the brink of the riuer And the land on the North side is higher and in some places there are high mountaines And from the Isle of Hares vnto the Isle of Orleans the riuer is not past 4 or 5 leagues broad Betweene the Isle of Hares and the high land on the North side the sea is not past a league and an halfe broad and it is very deepe for it is aboue 100. fathoms deepe in the middest To the East of the Isle of Hares there are 2 or 3 small Isles and rockes And from hence to the Isle Des Coudres or of Filbeards all is nothing but Isles and rockes on the Southshore and towards the North the sea is fayre and deepe The Isle of Hares and the Isle of Filbeards lie northeast West and Southwest and they are distant 12 leagues And you must alwayes run along the high land on the north shore for on the other shore there is nothing but rocks And you must passe by the side of the Isle of Filbeards and the riuer there is not past a quarter of a league broad and you must sayle in the middest of the chanel and in the middest runneth the best passage either at an hie or a low water because the sea runneth there strongly and there are great dangers of rocks and you had neede of good ancre and table The isle of Filbeards is a small isle about one league long and halfe a league broad but they are all banks of sand The isle of Filberds stands in 47. deg and ¾ The isle of Filberds and the isle of Orleans lie northeast and southwest and they are distant 10 leagues and thou must passe by the high land on the northside about a quarter of a league because that in the midst of the riuer there is nothing but sholds and rocks And when thou shalt bee ouer against a round Cape thou must take ouer to the South shore southwest and a quarter toward the South and thou shalt sayle in 5.6 and 7 fathoms and there the riuer of Canada beginneth to bee fresh and the salt water endeth And when thou shalt be athwart the point of the isle of Orleans where
end and purpose but I would not grant vnto them that they should make warre vpon him yea rather contrariwise I endeuoured to make them friends wherein they condescended vnto me so farre foorth that they were content to allow of any thing that I would set downe whereupon the two Spanyards which of long time knew well the nature of the Indians warned me that in any case I should not trust vnto them because that when they shewed good countenance and the best cheere vnto men then was the time that they would surprise and betray them and that of their nature they were the greatest traitours and most deepe dissemblers of the world Besides I neuer trusted them but vpon good ground as one that had discouered a thousand of their crafts and subtilâies aswell by experience as by reading of the histories of laâe yeres Our two barks were not so soone finished but I sent Captaine Vasseur to discouer along the coast lying toward the North and commanded him to saile vnto a riuer the king whereof was called Audusta which was lord of that place where those of the yere 1562 inhabited I sent him two sutes of apparell with certaine hatchets kniues and other small trifles the better to insinuate my selfe into his friendship And the better to win him I sent in the barke with captaine Vasseur a souldier called Aimon which was one of them which returned home in the first voyage hoping that king Audusta might remember him But before they were imbarked I commanded them to make inquiry what was become of another called Rouffi which remained alone in those parts when Nicolas Masson and those of the first voyage imbarked themselues to returne into France They vnderstood at their arriuall there that a barke passing that way had caried away the same souldier and afterward I knew for a certainty that they were Spaniards which had caried him to Hauana The king Audusta sent me backe my barke full of mill with a certaine quantity of beanes two stags some skinnes painted after their maner and certaine pearles of small value because they were burnt and sent me word that if I would dwel in his quarters he would giue me a great countrey and that after he had gathered his mill he would spare me as much as I would haue In the meane while there came vnto our fort a flocke of stocke-doues in so great number and that for the space of seuen weeks together that euery day wee killed with harquebush shot two hundred in the woods about our fort After that Captaine Vasseur was returned I caused the two barks to be furnished againe with souldiers mariners and sent them to cary a present from me vnto the widow of king Hiocaia whose dwelling was distant from our fort about twelue legues Northward She courteously receiued our men sent me backe my barks full of mill and acornes with certaine baskets full of the leaues of Cassine wherwith they make their drinke And the place where this widow dwelleth is the most plentifull of mill that is in all the coast and the most pleasant It is thought that the queene is the most beautiful of all the Indians and of whom they make most account yea and her subiects honour her so much that almost continually they beare her on their shoulders and will not suffer her to go on foot Within a few dayes after the returne of my barks she sent to visit me by her Hiatiqui which is as much to say as her interpreter Now while I thought I was furnished with victuals vntill the time that our ships might come out of France for feare of keeping my people idle I sent my two barks to discouer along the riuer and vp toward the head thereof which went so far vp that they were thirty leagues good beyond a place named Mathiaqua and there they discouered the entrance of a lake vpon the one side whereof no land can be seene according to the report of the Indians which had oftentimes climed on the highest trees in the countrey to see land and notwithstanding could not discerne any which was the cause that my men went no further but returned backe and in comming home went to see the Island of Edelano situated in the midst of the riuer as faire a place as any that may be seene thorow the world for in the space of some three leagues that it may conteine in length and bredth a man may see an exceeding rich countrey and maruellously peopled At the comming out of the village of Edelano to go vnto the riuers side a man must passe thorow an alley about three hundred paces long and fifty paces broad on both sides wherof great tres are planted the boughes whereof are tied together like an arch and meet together so artificially that a man would thinke it were an arbour made of purpose as faire I say as any in all christendome although it be altogether natural Our men departing from this place rowed to Eneguape then to Chilily from thence to Patica lastly they came vnto Coya where leáuing their barks in a litle creeke of the riuer with men to guard them they went to visit Vtina which receiued them very courteously and when they departed from his house he intreated them so earnestly that sixe of my men remained with him of which number there was one gentleman named Groutald which after he had abode there about two moneths and taken great paines to discouer the countrey with another which I had left a great while there to that intent came vnto me to the fort and tolde me that he neuer saw a fairer countrey Among other things he reported vnto me that he had seene a place named Hostaqua and that the king thereof was so mighty that he was able to bring three or foure thousand Sauages to the field with whom if I would ioyne and enter into league we might be able to reduce all the rest of the inhabitants vnto our obedience besides that this king knew the passages vnto the mountaine of Apalatci which the French men desired so greatly to atteine vnto and where the enemy of Hostaqua made his abode which was easie to be subdued if so be wee would enter into league together This king sent me a plate of a minerall that came out of this mountaine out of the foot whereof there runneth a streame of golde or copper as the Sauages thinke out of which they dig vp the sand with an hollow and drie cane of reed vntill the cane be full afterward they shake it and finde that there are many small graines of copper and siluer among this sand which giueth them to vnderstand that some rich mine must needs be in the mountaine And because the mountaine was not past fiue or sixe dayes iourney from our fort lying toward the Northwest I determined as soone as our supply
like a towed gallie lying East and West and all the land is low and seemeth to be full of trees Hauing these sights then make account thou art against Cartagena and to goe in tbou hast nothing to be afraid of but keepe thy selfe hard aboord the poynt of Ycacos and then when thou commest to double the poynt del Iudeo giue a breadth off because there is a shoald I aduise thee that if thou be benighted when thou art at The poynt de la canoa and wouldest enter into Cartagena by night that thou take good heede of a shoald that lyeth halfe a league to the sea and so thou shalt goe in 8 fathoms and sandie ground And when thou findest thy selfe in deepe water as in 30 fathoms and more then the harbour will bee open before thee And if thou haue any fresh Northerne winds then loofe vp to the seaward and lye with thy stemme Eastsoutheast and so thou mayest goe in East through the middest of the chanell and though it bee by night yet thou mayest goe in safely because it is all cleere And if the night be cleere thou shalt haue sight of the Island called Cares and it is an high lane Comming from Cartagena to goe for Nombre de Dios in the time of the Northerne winds thou must bring thy selfe to the offward of Sal medina and thence stirre West till thou bring thy selfe North and South with Cabeça de Cariua and then goe Southwest and by West and thou shalt so fall with Rio de Francisco It hath for markes a certaine land not very high and within the land certaine high hils lying East and West And on the West of the riuer of Francisco thou shalt see certaine cliffes that bee sixe leagues from Nombre de Dios inclining toward the sea I aduise thee that going this course aboue written if thou see 3 or 4 Isles lying lowe with the sea and also lying East and West thou mayest make account that they be the Islands de Catiua and then runne West and so thou shalt go along the coast And if thou see by this way a poynt of low land make account it is Punta de Samblas and vpon it thou shalt seâ a row of hie râckie hils and they be the mountaines of Santa Cruz. If thou come from Cartagena to go to Nombre de Dios in the time of the sea winds when thou art out from Sal Medina thou shalt goe West and by North that thou mayest haue sea-roome and take the Brisas or Northerne winds when they come and goe till thou be North and South with the harbour of Nombre de Dios and from thence goe Southwest and if by this way thou see a row of high hils on a coast that lyeth Northeast and Southwest make account they are Sierras de las minas Viejas which minas Viejas lie North and South with the harbour of Velo alto Hauing kept this course abouesaid and hauing sight of the former marke thou mayest account that thou art on the West side of Nombre de Dios. Furthermore when thou hast sight of an high land and thou bee North and South with it and in the toppe thereof thou seest as it were a litle cable if it be highest toward the East then make account that thou arâ North and South with Nombre de Dios I say with the harbour of Nombre de Dios and this hill is called Sierra de Capira And if thou wilt goe into the harbour thou must keepe thy prow right against this hill and comming neerer to the shore thou shalt see a ledge of rockes and it is without and thou mayest goe in what depth thou thinkest good or at which place thou findest most water in And to the West of the harbor thou shalt see two or three Islands called Islas de los Bastimentos Take this for a warning if thou come out of Nombre de Dios in the time of the Brisas or Northerne winds and wouldest goe for Cartagena thou shalt come out in the morning and shalt go Northnorthwest vntill 3 of the clocke at afternoone and then cast about to the land vntill thou be hard aboord the shore and so thou must go turning vntill thou hast doubled Cabeça de Catiua and hauing doubled it then ply to windward all that thou mayest and if thou be Eastnortheast off it then thou shalt haue sight of the Islands of Baru which are 3 or 4 Islands lying low and are all full of trees and then presently thou shalt haue sight of the gallie that is ouer Cartagena and it is like a gallie towed I aduise thee that if thou come for Cartagena in the time aboue sayde and commest from Cabeça de Catiua if the wind will not suffer thee to lye but West then going thus if thou seest a great high Island full of mountaines and on the North side thereof thou see a ledge of rocks two leagues into the sea thou mayest be sure it is Isla fuerte but if thou see not the rocks giue them a good breadth and if thou wilt come to anker thou mayest âide well on the West side of them betwixt the maine and them in fifteene fathomes and the sounding is clay And if thou wilt go betweene this and the Islands of Saint Barnardo to goe into Cartagena thou mayest goe safely And if any man aske thee how thou knowest the Islands of Baru and San Barnardo thou mayest answere truely that the Isles of San Barnardo are full of high hilles and certaine sandie bayes to seaward and the sayd Isles haue a good depth two or three leagues to the sea and this depth is called The Bacilla And these are all the markes for the Islandes of San Barnardo And touching the Isles of Baru they bee 3 or 4 little Islands and very euen with the sea and full of trees and there is no good depth about them but hard aboord them A ruttier from Cartagena to Hauana in Cuba COmming from Cartagena to goe to Hauana thou must goe Northnorthwest vntill thou be in foureteene degrees and then forwardes thou shalt goe with great care to anker euery night and when it is day set sayle And this is to bee done in this place because of the shoalds of Serrana and so thou mayest proceâde with a cart to anker when thou commest about Serranilla or neere to it which is in fifteene degrees and a halfe And vpon it thou shalt see a lowe flatte land lying Northeast and Southwest and the sea beateth vpon it round about except that on the Southeast part it hath certaine shelues of sand and on the West side it hath a certain litle copple which from sea seemeth to bee a shippe vnder sayle and being Northeast and Southwest off it scant a league from the shoald commeth out on the West side a
returne or send some answere within ten dayes for that we told him we were Marchants and would traffique with them but we neuer receiued answere from him any more and seeing that he came not according to appoyntment our businesse being dispatched wee weyed anchor and set sayle from S. Sebastian on the 23. of Nouember The 16. day of December we fell with the coast of America in 47. degrees â
the land bearing West from vs about 6. leagues off from which place we ran along the shore vntill we came into 4â degrees It is a steepe beach all along The 17. day of December in the afternoone we entred into an harborough where our Admirall went in first wherefore our General named the said harborough Port Desiâe in which harborough is an Iland or two where there is wonderful great store of Seales and another Iland of birds which are grey guls These Seales are of a wonderful great bignesse huge and monstrous of shape and for the fore-part of their bodies cannot be compared to any thing better then to a lion their head and necke and fore-parts of their bodies are full of rough haire their feete are in maner of a finne and in forme like vnto a mans hand they breed and cast euery moneth giuing their yong milke yet continually get they their liuing in the sea and liue altogether vpon fish their yong are marueilous good meate and being boyled or rosted are hardly to be knowen from lambe or mutâon The olde ones be of such bignesse and force that it is as much as 4. men are able to doe to kill one of them with great âowle-sâaues and hee must be beaten downe with striking on the head of him for his body is of that bignesse that foure men could neuer kill him but only on the head For being shotte through the body with an Harquebuze or a Musket yet he will goe his way into the sea and neuer care for it at the present Also the fowles that were there were very good meate and great store of them they haue burrowes in the ground like conies for they cannot flie They haue nothing but downe vpon their pinions they also fish and feede in the sea for their liuing and breede on shore This harborough is a very good place to trimme ships in and to bring them on ground and graue them in for there ebbeth and floweth much water therefore wee graued and trimmed all our ships there The 24. of December being Christmas Euen a man and a boy of the Rere-admirall went some fortie score from our ships vnto a very faire greene valley at the foote of the mountaines where was a litle piââe or well which our men had digged and made some 2. or 3. dayes before to get fresh water for there was none in all the Harborough and this was but brackish therefore this man and boy came thither to wash their linnen and beeing in washing at the sayde Well there were great store of Indians which were come downe and found the sayd man and boy in washing These Indians being diuided on eche side of the rockes shotte at them with their arrowes and hurt them both but they fledde presently beeing about fiftie or threescore though our Generall followed them but with 16â or 20. men The mans name which was hurt was Iohn Garge the boyes name was Lutch the man was shot cleane through the knee the boy into the shoulder either of them hauing very sore wounds Their arrowes are made of litle canes and their heads are of a flint stone set into the caue very artificially they seldome or neuer see any Christians they are as wilde as euer was a bucke or any other wilde beast for wee followed them and they ranne from vs as it had bene the wildest thing in the worlde Wee tooke the measure of one of their feete and it was 18. inches long Their vse is when any of them dye to bring him or them to the cliffes by the sea-side and vpon the toppe of them they burie them and in their graues are buryed with them their bowes and arrowes and all their iewels which they haue in their life time which are sine shelles which they finde by the sea side which they cut and square after an artificiall maner and all is layd vnder their heads The graue is made all with great stones of great length and bignesse being set all along full of the dead mans dartes which he vsed when he was liuing And they colour both their darts and their graues with a red colour which they vse in colouring of themselues The 28. of December we departed out of the Port of Desire and went to an Iland which lieth 3. leagues to the Southward of it where we trimmed our saued pengwins with salt for victual all that and the next day and departed along the coast Southwest and by South The 30. day we fell with a rocke which lieth about 5. leagues from the land much like vnto Ediâstone which lieth off the âound of Plimouth and we sounded and had 8. fathoms rockie ground within a mile thereof the rocke bearing West Southwest Wee went coasting along South Southwest and sound great store of Seales all along the coast This rocke standeth in 48. degrees ½ to the Southward of the line The 2. day of Ianuarie wee fell with a very faire white Cape which standeth in 51. degrees and had 7. fathoms water a league off the land The third day of the foresayd moneth we fell with another great white cape which standeth in 52. degrees and 45. minutes from which Cape there runneth a lowe beach about a league to the Southward and this beach reacheth to the opening of the dangerous Streight of Magellan wâich is in diuers places 5. or 6. leagues wide and in two seuerall places more narrow Under this Cape wee anchored and lost an anchor for it was a great storme of foule weaâher and lastâd three daâes very dangerous The 6. day we put in for the Streights The 7. day betweene the mouth of the Streights and the narrowest place thereof wee tooke a Spaniard whose name was Heânando who was there with 23. Spaniards more which were all that remayned of foure hundred which werâ left there three yeeres before in these streights of Magellan all the rest being dead with famine And the same day we passed through the narrowâst of the Streights where the aforesayd Spanyard shewed vs the hull of a small Barke which we iudged to be a Barke called The Iohn Thomas It is from the mouth oâ the streights vnto the narrowest of the Streights 14. leagues and the course lieth West and by North. The mouth of the streights standeth in 52. degrees From the narrowest of the Streights vnto Pengwin Iland is 10. leagues and lyeth West Southwest somewhat to the Southward where wee anchored the 8. day and killed and salted great store of Pengwins for victuals
territories there was no man that knew any thing of him but onely a fewe Nestorians In his pastures or territories dwelleth Ken Can at whose Court Frier Andrew was And I my selfe passed by it at my returne This Iohn had a brother being a mightie man also and a shepheard like himselfe called Vut and he inhabited beyond the Alpes of Cara Catay being distant from his brother Iohn the space of three weekes iourney He was lord ouer a certain village called Cara Carum hauing people also for his subiects named Crit or Merkit who were Christians of the sect of Nestorius But their Lorde abandoning the worship of Christ followed after idoles reteining with him Priests of the saide idoles who all of them are worshippers of deuils and sorcerers Beyond his pastures some tenne or fifteene dayes iourney were the pastures of Moal who were a poore and beggerly nation without gouernour and without Lawe except their soothsayings and their diuinations vnto the which detestable studies all in those partes doe apply their mindes Neere vnto Moal were other poore people called Tartars The foresaid king Iohn died wihout issue male and thereupon his brother Vut was greatly inriched and caused himselfe to be named Can and his droues and flockes raunged euen vnto the borders of Moal About the same time there was one Cyngis a blacke smith among the people of Moal This Cyngis stole as many cattel from Vut Can as he could possibly get insomuch that the shepheards of Vut complained vnto their Lord. Then prouided he an armie and marched vp into the countrey of Moal to seeke for the saide Cyngis But Cyngis fledde among the Tartars and hidde himselfe amongest them And Vut hauing taken some spoiles both from Moal and also from the Tartars returned home Then spake Cyngis vnto the Tartars and vnto the people of Moal saying Sirs because we are destitute of a gouernour and Captaine you see howe our neighbours do oppresse vs. And the Tartars and Moals appointed him to be their Chieftaine Then hauing secretly gathered together an armie he brake in suddenly vpon Vut and ouercame him and Vut fledde into Catayaâ At the same time was the daughter of Vut taken which Cyngis married vnto one of his sonnes by whom she conceiued brought forth the great Can which now reigneth called Mangu-Can Then Cyngis sent y e Tartars before him in al places where he came and thereupon was their name published and spread abroade for in all places the people woulde crie out Loe the Tartars come the Tartars come Howbeit through continuall warres they are nowe all of them in a maner consumed and brought to nought Whereupon the Moals indeuour what they can to extinguish the name of the Tartars that they may exalt their owne name The countrey wherein they first inhabited and where the Court of Cyngis Can as yet remaineth is called Mancherule But because Tartaria is the region about which they haue obtained their conquests they esteeme that as their royall and chiefe citie and there for the most part doe they elect their great Can. Of the Russians Hungarians and Alanians and of the Caspian Sea Chap. 20. NOw as concerning Sartach whether he beleeues in Christ or no I knowe not This I am sure of that he will not be called a Christian. Yea rather he seemeth vnto mee to deride and skoffe at Christians He lieth in the way of the Christians as namely of the Russians the Valachians the Bulgarians of Bulgaria the lesser the Soldaianes the Kerkis and the Alanians who all of them passe by him as they are going to the Court of his father Baatu to carie giftes whereupon he is more in league with them Howbeit if the Saracens come and bring greater giftes then they they are dispatched sooner He hath about him certaine Nestorian Priestes who pray vpon their beades and sing their deuotions Also there is another vnder Baatu called Berta who feedeth his cattell toward Porta ferrea or Derbent where lieth the passage of all those Saracens which come out of Persia and out of Turkie to goe vnto Baatu and passing by they giue rewards vnto him And he professeth himselfe to be a Saracene and will not permit swines flesh to be eaten in his dominions Howbeit at the time of our returne Baatu commanded him to remoue himselfe from that place and to inhabite vpon the East side of Volga for hee was vnwilling that the Saracens messengers should passe by the saide Berta because he sawe it was not for his profite For the space of foure dayes while we remained in the court of Sartach we had not any victuals at all allowed vs but once onely a litle Cosmos And in our iourney betweene him and his father wee traueiled in great feare For certaine Russians Hungarians and Alanians being seruants vnto the Tartars of whom they haue great multitudes among them assemble themselues twentie or thirtie in a companie and so secretly in the night conueying themselues from home they take bowes and arrowes with them and whomesoeuer they finde in the night season they put him to death hiding themselues in the day time And hauing tired their horses they goe in the night vnto a company of other horses feeding in some pasture and change them for newe taking with them also one or two horses besides to eate them when they stand in neede Our guide therefore was sore afraide least we should haue met with such companions In this iourney wee had died for famine had we not caried some of our bisket with vs. At length we came vnto the mighty riuer of Etilia or Volga For it is foure times greater then the riuer of Sein and of a wonderfull depth and issuing forth of Bulgaria the greater it runneth into a certaine lake or sea which of late they cal the Hircan sea according to the name of a certain citie in Persia standing vpon the shore thereof Howbeit Isidore calleth it the Caspian sea For it hath the Caspian mountaines and the land of Persia situate on the South side thereof and the mountaines of Musihet that is to say of the people called Assassini towards the East which mountaines are conioyned vnto the Caspian mountaines but on the North side thereof lieth the same desert wherein the Tartars doe now inhabite Howbeit heretofore there dwelt certaine people called Changlae And on that side it receiueth the streams of Etilia which riuer increaseth in Sommer time like vnto the riuer Nilus in AEgypt Upon the West part thereof it hath the mountaines of Alani and Lesgi and Porta ferrea or Derbent and the mountaines of Georgia This Sea therefore is compassed in on three sides with the mountaines but on the North side with plaine grounde Frier Andrew in his iourney traueiled round about two sides therof namely the South and the East sides and I my selfe about other two that is to say the North side in
his men to fill our baricoes with water and to help our men to beare wood into their boat and then he put on his best silke coate and his coller of pearles and came aboord againe brought his present with him and thus hauing more respect vnto his present then to his person because I perceiued him to be vainglorious I bade him welcome and gaue him a dish of figs and then he declared vnto me that his father was a gentleman and that he was able to shew me pleasure and not Gabriel who was but a priests sonne After their departure from vs we weied and plyed all the ebbe to the windewards the winde being Northerly towards night it waxed very stormie so that of force we were constrained to go roome with Cape S. Iohn againe in which storme wee lost out skiffe at our sterne that wee bought at Wardhouse and there we rode vntil the fourth of Iuly The latitude of Cape S. Iohn is 66 degrees 50 minutes And it is to be noted that the land of Cape S. Iohn is of height from the full sea marke as I iudge 10 fadomes being cleane without any trees growing also without stones or rockes and consists onely of blacke earth which is so rotten that if any of it fall into the sea it will swimme as though it were a piece of wood In which place about three leagues from the shore you shall not haue aboue 9 fadom water and clay ground Iulie SAturday at a Northnorthwest sunne the wind came at Eastnortheast then we weied and plied to the Northwards and as we were two leagues shot past the Cape we saw a house standing in a valley which is dainty to be seene in those parts and by and by I saw three men on the top of the hil Then I iudged them as it afterwards proued that they were men which came from some other place to set traps to take vermin for their furres which trappes we did perceiue very thicke alongst the shore as we went Sunday at an East sunne we were thwart off the creeke where the Russes lay and there came to an anker and perceiuing the most part of the Lodias to be gone we thought it not good to tary any longer there but weyed and spent all the ebbe plying to the windewards Munday at a South sunne it was high water All alongst the coast it floweth little onely a South moone makes a full sea and as we were a weying we espied the Russe Lodias which we first lost They came out of a creeke amongst the sandy hilles which hilles beginne 15 leagues Northnortheast from Cape S. Iohn Plying this ebbe to an end we came to an anker 6 leagues Northnortheast froÌ the place where we saw the Russes come out and there the Russes harboured themselues within a soonke banke but there was not water enough for vs. At a North sunne we weyed and plied to the Northwards the land lying Northnortheast and Southsouthwest vntil a South sunne and then we werein the latitude of 68 degrees a halfe â and in this latitude ende those sandy hilles and the land beginneth to lie North and by West South and by East and Northnorthwest and to the Westwards and there the water beginneth to ware deepe At a Northwest sunne we came to an anker within halfe a league of the shore where wee had good plenty of fish both Haddocks and Cods riding in 10 fadom water Wednesday we weyed and plyed neerer the headland which is called Caninoz the wind being at East and by North. Thursday the wind being scant we turned to windwards the ebbe to get about Caninoz the latitude this day at noone was 68 degreee 40 minutes Friday we turned to the windward of the ebbe but to no purpose and as we rode at an anker we saw the similitude of a storme rising at Northnorthwest could not tell where to get rode nor succor for that winde and harborough we knew none that land which we rode vnder with that winde was a lee shorâ And as I was musing what was best to be done I saw a saile come out of a creeke vnder the foresayd Caninoz which was my friend Gabriel who forsooke his harborough and company and came as neere vs as he might and pointed vs to the Eastwards then we weyed and followed him and went East and by South the wind being at Westnorthwest and very mistie Saturday we went Eastsoutheast followed Gabriel and he brought vs into an harborough called Morgiouets which is 30 leagues from Caninoz we had vpon the barre going in two fadome and a fourth part and after we were past in ouer the barre it waxed deâper for we had 5 fadoms 4 and a half and 3 fadom c. Our barke being mored I sent some of our men to shoare to prouide wood where they had plenty of drift wood but none growing and in this place we found plenty of young foule as Gulles Seapies and others whereof the Russes would eate none whereof we were nothing sory for there came the more to our part Sunday our men cut wood on shoare and brought it aboord and wee balasted our shippe with stones This morning Gabriel saw a smoke on y e way who rowed vnto it with his skiffe which smoke was two leagues from the place where we road and at a Northwest sunne he came aboord again and brought with him a Samoed which was but a young man his apparell was then strange vnto vs and he presented me with three young wild geese and one young barnacle Munday I sent a man to the maine in Gabriels boat and he brought vs aboord 8 barricoes of fresh water the latitude of the said Morgiouets is sixtie eight degrres and a terce It floweth there at a Southsouthwest moone full sea and hyeth two fadome and a halfe water At a Westnorthwest sunne we departed from this place and went East 25 leagues and then saw an Island North and by West of vs eight leagues which Island is called Dolgoieue and from the Eastermost part of this Island there lyeth a sand East and by South 7 leagues long Wednesday at a North and by East sunne Swetinoz was South of vs 5 leagues This day at afternoone we went in ouer the dangerous barre of Pechora and had vpon the barre but one fadome water Thursday we road still Friday I went on shoare and obserued the variation of the Compasse which was three degrees and a halfe from the North to the West the latitude this day was sixtie nine degrees ten minutes From two or three leagues to the Eastward of Swetinoz vntill the entering of the riuer Pechora it is all sandy hilles and towards Pechora the sandie hilles are very low It higheth on the barre of Pechora foure foote water it floweth there at a Southwest moone a full sea Munday at a North by East sunne we weyed and came out
a castle made by the Crimmes but now it is ruined being the iust midway betweene the said Cazan and Astrachan which is 200. leagues or thereabout in the latitude of 51. degrees 47. minutes Upon all this shore groweth abundance of Licoris whose root runneth within the ground like a vine Thus going forward the sixt day of Iuly we came to a place called Perouolog so named because in times past the Tartars caried their boates from Volga vnto the riuer Tanais otherwise called Don by land when they would robbe such as passed downe the said Volga to Astracan and also such as passed downe by the riuer Tanais to Asou Caffa or any other towne situated vpon Mare Euxinum into which sea Tanais falleth who hath his springs in the countrey of Rezan out of a plaine ground It is at this streight of Perouolog from the one riuer to the other two leagues by land and is a dangerous place for theeues and robbers but now it is not so euill as it hath bene by reason of the Emperour of Russia his conquests Departing from Perouolog hauing the wildernesse on both sides wee sawe a great heard of Nagayans pasturing as is abouesaid by estimation aboue a thousand Camels drawing of cartes with houses vpon them like tents of a strange fashion seeming to bee a farre off a towne that Hord was belonging to a great Murse called Smille the greatâst prince in all Nagay who hath slaine and driuen away all the rest not sparing his owne brethren and children and hauing peace with this Emperour of Russia he hath what he needeth and ruleth alone so that now the Russes liue in peace with the Nagayans who were wont to haue mortall warres together The 14. day of Iuly passing by an old castle which was Old Astracan and leauing it vpon our right hand we arriued at New Astracan which this Emperour of Russia conquered sixe yeeres past in the yeere 1552. It is from the Mosco vnto Astracan sixe hundreth leagues or thereabout The towne of Astracan is situated in an Island vpon a hill side hauing a castle within the same walled about with earth and timber neither faire nor strong The towne is also walled about with earth the buildings and houses except it be the captaines lodging and certaine other gentlemens most base and simple The Island is most destitute and barren of wood and pasture and the ground will beare no corne the aire is there most infected by reason as I suppose of much fish and specially Sturgion by which onely the inhabitants liue hauing great scarsitie of flesh and bread They hang vp their fish in their streets and houses to dry for their prouision which causeth such abundance of flies to increase there as the like was neuer seene in any land to their great plague And at my being at the sayd Astracan there was a great famine and plague among the people and specially among the Tartars called Nagayans who the same time came thither in great numbers to render theÌselues to the Russes their enemies to seeke succour at their hands their countrey being destroyed as I said before but they were but ill entertained or relieued for there died a great number of them for hunger which lay all the Island through in heapes dead and like to beasts vnburied very pitifull to behold many of them were also sold by the Russes and the rest were banished from the Island At that time it had bene an easie thing to haue conuerted that wicked Nation to the Christian faith if the Russes themselues had bene good Christians but how should they shew compassion vnto other Nations when they are not mercifull vnto their owne At my being there I could haue bought many goodly Tartars children if I would haue had a thousand of their owne fathers and mothers to say a boy or a wench for a loafe of bread woorth sixe pence in England but we had more need of victuals at that time then of any such merchandise This Astracan is the furthest hold that this Emperour of Russia hath conquered of the Tartars towards the Caspian sea which he keepeth very strong sending thither euery yere prouision of men and victuals and timber to build the castle There is a certaine trade of merchandise there vsed but as yet so small and beggerly that it is not woorth the making mention and yet there come merchants thither from diuers places The chiefest commodities that the Russes bring thither are redde hides redde sheepes skinnes woodden vessels bridles and saddles kniues and other trifles with corne bacon and other victuals The Tartars bring thither diuers kindes of wares made of cotten wooll with diuers kindes of wrought silkes and they that come out of Persia namely from Shamacki doe bring sowing silke which is the coursest that they vse in Russeland Crasko diuers kinds of pide silkes for girdles shirts of male bowes swords and such like things and some yeeres corne and wallnuts but all such things in such small quantitie the merchants being so beggerly and poore that bring the fame that it is not worth the writing neither is there any hope of trade in all those parts woorth the folowing This foresaid Island of Astracan is in length twelue leagues and in bredth three lieth East and West in the latitude of fortie seuen degrees nine minutes we taried there vntil the sixt day of August and hauing bought and prouided a boate in company with certaine Tartars and Persians we laded our goods and imbarked our selues and the same day departed I with the said two Iohnsons hauing the whole charge of the Nauigation downe the sayd riuer Volga being very crooked and full of flats toward the mouth thereof We entred into the Caspian sea the tenth day of August at the Easterly side of the sayd riuer being twentie leagues from Astracan aforesayd in the latitude of fortie six degrees twentie seuen minutes Volga hath seuentie mouthes or fals into the sea and we hauing a large wind kept the Northeast shore and the eleuenth day we sailed seuen leagues Eastnortheast and came vnto an Island hauing an high hill therein called Accurgar a good marke in the sea From thence East tenne leagues we fell with another Island called Bawhiata much higher then the other Within these two Islands to the Northwards is a great Baie called the Blew sea Form thence wee sailed East and by North ten leagues and hauing a contrary wind we came to an anker in a fadome water and so rid vntill the fifteenth day hauing a great storme at Southeast being a most contrary wind which we rid out Then the wind came to the North and we weyed and set our course Southeast and that day sailed eight leagues Thus proceeding forwards the 17. day wee lost sight of land and the same day sailed thirtie leagues and the 18. day twentie leagues winding East and fell with a land called Baughleata being 74. leagues from the mouth
remaine with their merchandize The 11. day the said Nagayes and one more with them came againe to that house earely in the morning where they were taken by the Russes and brought to the captaine of the castle and being examined confessed that their comming was onely to seeke two of their bondmen that were runne from them whereupon their bondmen were deliuered to them which fauour the said captaine coÌmonly sheweth if they be not Russies and they were set at libertie The 13. day they brake vp their camps and marched to the Northwards into the countrey of Nagay The 17. of April the variation of the compasse obserued in Astracan was 13. deg 40. min. from North to West This spring there came newes to Astracan that the queene of Persia the king being blind had bene with a great army against the Turks that were left to possesse Media and had giuen them a great ouerthrow yet notwithstanding Derbent the greatest part of Media were still possessed and kept by the Turks The factors oâ the company consulting vpon their affayres determined to leaue at Astracan the one halfe of their goods with Arthur Edwards and with the other halfe the other three factors would proceed in the ship on their purposed voyage to the coast of Media to see what might be done there where if they could not find safe traffike they determined to proceed to the coast of Gilan which is a prouince nere the Caspian sea bordering vpon Persia and therupon appointed the said goods to be laden aboord the ship and tooke into her also some merchandize of Tisiks or Persian merchants The 29. of April Amos Riall and Anthony Marsh the companies seruants were sent from Astracan by the said factors vp the riuer Volga to Yeraslaue with letters of aduise to be sent for England and had order for staying the goods in Russia that should come that yeere out of England for mainteining the trade purposed for Persia vntill further triall were made what might be done in those parts The first day of May in the morning hauing the shippe in readinesse to depart the factors inuited the duke Pheodor Micalouich Proiocoorow and the principall secretary Vasili Pheodorouich Shelepiâ with other of the chiefest about the duke to a banket aboord the ship where they were interteined to their good liking and at their departure was shot off all the ordinance of the ship and about nine of the clocke at night the same day they weyed anker and departed with their ship from Astracan and being but litle winde towed her with the boat about three versts then ankered hauing with them a pauos or lighter to helpe them at the flats The second day at foure of the clocke in y e morning they weyed plyed downe the riuer Volga toward the Caspian sea The seuenth of May in the morning they passed by a tree that standeth on the left hand of the riuer as they went downe which is called Mahomet Agatch or Mahomets tree about three versts further that is to say to the Southwards of the said tree is a place called Vchoog that is to say the Russe weare but Ochoog is the name of a weare in the Tartar tongue where are certain cotages and the Emperour hath lying at that place certaine gunners to gard his fishermen that keepe the weare This Vchoog is counted from Astracan 60. versts they proceeded downe the said riuer without staying at the Vchoog The ninth and tenth dayes they met with shoald water and were forced to lighten their ship by the pauos the 11. day they sent backe to the Vchoog for an other pauos This day by mischance the shippe was bilged on the grapâell of the pauos whereby the company had sustained great losses if the chiefest part of their goods had not beene layde into the pauos for notwithstanding their pumping with 3. pumps heauing out water with buckets and all the best shifts they could make the shippe was halfe full of water ere the leake could be found and sâopt The 12. day the pauos came to them from the Vchoog whereby they lighted the shippe of all the goods The 13. day in the morning there came to them a small boat sent by the captaine of Astracan to learne whether the shippe were at sea cleere of the flats The 15. day by great industry and trauell they got their ship cleare off the shoales and flats wherewith they had beene troubled from the ninth day vntill then they were forced to passe their shippe in three foot water or lesse The 16. day they came to the Chetera Bougori or Island of Foure Hillocks which are counted forty versts from Vchoog and are the furthest land towards the sea The 17. day they bare off into the sea and being about twelue versts from the Foure hillocks riding in fiue foot and a halfe water about eleuen of the clocke in the forenoone they tooke their goods out of the pauoses into the shippe and filled their shippe with all things necessary The 18. day in the morning about seuen of the clock the pauoses being discharged departed away towards Astracan the winde then at Southeast they road still with the shippe and obseruing the eleuation of the pole at that place found it to be 45. degrees 20. minuts The 19. day the wind Southeast they road still The 20. day the winde at Northwest they set saile about one of the clocke in the morning stered thence South by West Southsouthwest about 3. leagues and then ankered in 6. foot and a halfe water about nine of y e clocke before noone at which time it fell calme the eleuation of the pole at that place 45. degrees 13. minutsâ The 21. hauing the winde at Northwest they set saile and stered thence South by West and South vntill eleuen of the clocke and had then nine foote water and at noone they obserued the latitude and found it to be 44. degrees 47. minuts then had they three fathoms and a halfe water being cleare of the flats It is counted from the Foure hillockes to the sea about fiftie versts From the said noonetide vntill foure of the clocke they sayled South by East fiue leagues and a halfe then had they fiue fathoms and a halfe and brackish water from that till twelue at night they sayled South by East halfe a league East tenne leagues then had they eleuen fathome and the water salter From that till the 22. day three of the clocke in the morning they sayled three fifty leagues then had they sixtene fathome water from thence they sayled vntil noone South and by West seuen leagues and a halfe the latitude then obserued 43. degrees 15. minuts the depth then eight and twentie fathoms and shallow ground from that vntill eight of the clocke at night they sayled South by East fiue leagues and a halfe then had they three and fortie fathoms shallow ground From
thence till the 23. foure a clocke in the morning they sailed Southsouthwest three leagues and a halfe then could they get no ground in two and fiftie fathoms deepe From thence vntill noone they sayled South nine leagues then the latitude obserued was 42. degrees 20. minuts From that till the 24. day at noone they sayled South by West seuenteene leagues and a halfe then the latitude obserued was 41. degrees 32. minuts From noone till seuen of the clocke at night they sailed Southsouthwest foure leagues then had they perfect sight of high land or hilles which were almost couered with snow and the mids of them were West from the ship being then about twelue leagues from the nearest land they sounded but could finde no ground in two hundred fathoms From thence they sailed Southwest vntil midnight about three leagues from thence till the 25. day foure of the clock in the morning they sayled West three leagues being then litle winde and neere the land they tooke in their sayles and lay hulling at noone the latitude obserued was 40. degrees 54. minuts they sounded but could get no ground in two hundred fathoms At four of the clocke in the afternoone the winde Northwest they set their sailes from thence till the 26. day at noone they sailed East southeast foure leagues From thence they sailed till eight of the clocke at night Southwest three leagues the winde then at North. From thence they sailed vntill the 27. day two of the clocke in the morning Westsouthwest eight leagues the winde blowing at North very much From the sayd two til foure of the clocke they sailed South by West one league then being day light they saw the land plaine which was not past three leagues from them being very high ragged land There were certaine rocks that lay farre off into the sea about fiue leagues from the same land which are called Barmake Tashâ they sayled betweene those rocks and the land and about fiue of the clocke they passed by the port Bilbill where they should haue put in but could not and bearing longst the shoare about two of the clocke afternoone they came to Bildih in the countrey of Media or Sheruan against which place they ankered in 9. foot water Presently after they were at anker there came aboord of them a boat wherein were seuen or eight persons two Turks the rest Persians the Turkes vassals which bade them welcome and seâmed to be glad of their arriuall who told the factors that the Turke had conquered all Media or the countrey Sheruan and how that the Turks Basha remained in Derbent with a garrison of Turkes and that Shamaky was wholly spoyled and had few or no inhabitants left in it The factours then being desirous to come to the speech of the Basha sent one of the Tisikes or merchants that went ouer with them from Astracan passingers and one of the companies seruants Robert Golding with those souldiours to the captaine of Bachu which place standeth hard by the sea to certifie him of their arriuall and what commodities they had brought and to desire friendshippe to haue quiet and safe traffike for the sâme Bachu is from Bildih the place where they road about a dayes iourney on foote easily to be trauelled which may be sixe leagues the next way ouer land it is a walled towne and strongly fortified When the sayd messenger came to the captaine of Bachu the said captaine gaue him very friendly intertainment and after he vnderstood what they were that were come in the shippe and what they had brought he seemed to reioyce much thereat who gaue the said Golding licence to depart backe the next day being the eight and twentieth day and promised that he would himselfe come to the shippe the neât day following with which answere the said Golding returned and came to the shippe the sayd eight and twentieth day about nine of the clocke at night The nine and twentieth day in the morning the factours caused a tent to be set vp at shoare neare the shippe against the comming of the sayd captaine who came thither about three of the clocke after noone and brought about thirtie souldiers that attended on him in shirts ââ male and some of them had gauntlets of siluer others of steele and very faire The factors met him at their tent and after very friendly salutations passed betweene them they gaue him for a present a garment of cloth of veluet and another of scarlet who accepted the same gratefully After they had talked together by their interpretors as well of the state of the voyage and cause of their comming thither as also learned of the sayde captaine the state of that countrey the factours made request vnto him that he would helpe them to the speech of the Basha who answered that their demand was reasonable and that he would willingly shew them therein what pleasure he could and sayd because the way to Derbent where the Basha remayned was dangerous he would send thither and certifie him of their arriuall and what commodities they had brought and such commodities as they would desire to exchange or barter the same for he would procure the said Basha to prouide for them and therefore willed the factors to consult together and certifie him what they most desired and what quantitie they would haue prouided so whilest the factors were consulting together thereupon the captaine talked with a Tisike merchant that came ouer in the ship with them from Astracan which Tisike among other matters in talke certified the captaine that the night before the factors their company were determined to haue returned backe againe to Astracan and that they were about to wey their ankers which in deed was true but the maister of the barke Thomas Hudson of Limehouse perswaded them that the wind was not good for them to depart c. When the factors came againe to talke with the captaine they desired to goe to the Basha and that he would safely conduct them thither he granted their requests willingly desiring them to goe with him to a village hard by and there to abide with him that night and the next day they should go to Bachu and from thence proceede on their iourney to Derbent They were vnwilling to go that night with him because their prouision for the way was not in readinesse but requested that they might stay til the morning Thereupon the captaine sayd it was reported vnto him that they ment the night before to haue gone away and if it should so happen he were in great danger of loosing his head for which cause he requested to haue some one for a pledge wherefore M. Garrard one of the factors offered himselfe to go who because he could not speake the Russe tongue tooke with him Christopher Burrough and a Russe interpretour that night they road from the seaside to a village about ten miles off where at supper time the
Ducks and Pidgeons and great Partridges Wood is the thing that most wanteth and because I haue particularly to intreat of the other sixe Ilands I leaue further inlarging of Canaria which standeth in 27 degrees distant from the Equator The I le of Tenerif THe Iland of Tenerif standeth in 27 degrees and a halfe from the equator and is distant from Canaria 12 leagues Northward This Iland containeth 17 leagues in length and the land lieth high in forme of a ridge of sowen land in some part of England and in the midst of the sayd place standeth a round hill called Pico Deteithe situated in this sort The top of this pike conteineth of heigth directly vpward 15 leagues more which is 45 English miles out of the which often times proceedeth fire and brimstone and it may be about halfe a mile in compasse the sayd top is in forme or likenesse of a caldron But within two miles of the top is nothing but ashes pumish stones yet beneath that two miles is the colde region couered all the yere with snow and somwhat lower are mighty huge trees growing called Vinatico which are exceeding heauy and will not rot in any water although they lie a thousand yeeres therein Also there is a wood called Barbusano of like vertue with many Sauine trees and Pine trees And beneath these sorts of trees are woods of Bay trees of 10 12 miles long which is a pleasant thing to trauell thorow among the which are great numbers of small birds which sing exceeding sweet but especially one sort that are very litle and of colour in all respects like a Swallow sauing that he hath a little blacke spot on his breast as broad as a peny He singeth more sweetly then all the rest but if he be taken and imprisoned in a cage he liueth but a small while This Iland bringeth foorth all sorts of fruits as Canaria doth and also all the other Ilands in generall bring foorth shrubs or bushes out of the which issueth a iuice as white as milke which after a while that it hath come out waxeth thicke and is exceeding good birdlime the bush is called Taybayba This Iland also bringeth foorth another tree called Drago which groweth on high among rocks and by incision at the foot of the tree issueth out a liquor like blood which is a commoÌ drug among Apothecaries Of the wood of this tree are made targets greatly esteemed because if any sword or dagger hit thereon they sticke so fast that it is hard plucking them out This is the most fruitfull Iland of all the rest for corne and in that respect is a mother or nurse to all the others in time of need There groweth also a certaine mosse vpon the high rocks called Orchel which is bought for Diars to die withall There are 12 sugar houses called Ingenios which make great quantity of sugar There is also one league of ground which standeth between two townes the one called Larotaua and the other Rialeio and it is thought that the like plot of ground is not in all the world The reason is that this one league of ground produceth sweet water out of the cliffes or rocky mountaines corne of all sortes fruites of all sortes and excellent good silke flaxe waxe and hony and very good wines in abundance with great store of sugar and fire-wood Out of this Iland is laden great quantity of wines for the West India and other countreys The best groweth on a hill side called the Ramble There is in that Iland a faire city standing three leagues from the sea nere vnto a lake called Laguna wherein are two faire parish churches there dwelleth the gouernour who ruleth all that Iland with iustice There are also aldermen for the publike weale who buy their offices of the king the most of the whole inhabitants of this city are gentlemen merchants and husband men There are other foure townes called Santa Cruz Larotaua Rialeio and Garachico In this Iland before the conquest dwelt seuen kings who with all their people dwelt in caues and were clothed in goat skinnes as the Canaria people were and vsed such like order of diet as they had Their order of buriall was that when any died he was carried naked to a great caue where he was propped vp against the wall standing on his feet But if he were of any authority among them then had he a staffe in his hand and a vessell of milke standing by him I haue seene caues of 300 of these corpses together the flesh being dried vp the body remained as light as parchment These people were called Guanches naturally they spake another language cleane contrary to the Canarians and so consequently euery Iland spake a seuerall language Note gentle reader that the Iland of Canaria the I le of Tenerif and the I le of Palma appertaine to the king of Spaine vnto whom they pay fifty thousand duckats yeerely for custome and other profits All these Ilands ioyntly are one bishopricke which pay to the bishop twelue thousand duckats yeerely And thus I conclude of the I le of Tenerif which standeth in 27 degrees and a halfe as I haue before declared Gomera THe Iland of Gomera standeth Westward from Tenerif in distance sixe leagues this is but a small Iland conteining eight leagues in length It is an Earledome the Lord thereof is called the earle of Gomera But in case of any controuersie the vassals may appeale to the kings superior Iudges which reside in Canaria This Iland hath one proper towne called Gomera which hath an excellent good port or harbour for ships where often times the Indian fleet take refreshing for their voyage There is also sufficient graine and fruit for the maintenance of themselues There is one Ingenio or Sugar-house with great plenty of wine and other sorts of fruits as Canaria and Tenerif hath This Iland yeeldeth no other commodity but onely orchell it standeth in 27 degrees distant from the Equator toward the pole Arcticke The I le of Palma THe I le of Palma standeth twelue leagues distant from the I le of Gomera Northwestward This Iland is fruitfull of wine and sugar it hath a proper city called the city of Palma where is great contraction for wines which are laden for the West India other places This city hath one faire church and a gouernour and aldermen to maintaine and execute iustice It hath also another prety towne called S. Andrewes It hath also foure Ingenios which make excellent sugar two of the which are called Zauzes and the other two Tassacort This Iland yeeldeth but little bread-corne but rather is thereof prouided from Tenerif and other places Their best wines grow in a soile called the Brenia where yerely is gathered twelue thousand buts of wine like vnto Malmsies This Iland standeth round and containeth in circuit neere fiue and twenty leagues It hath plenty of all sorts of fruits as Canaria and
well obserued by art and experience I haue thought good to set forth the same in such sort and phrase of speech as is commonly vsed among them and as I receiued it of the said Pilot as I haue said Take it therefore as followeth In the yeere of our Lord 1554 the eleuenth day of October we departed the riuer of Thames with three goodly ships the one called the Ermitie a ship of the burden of seuenscore tunne the other called the Bartholomew a ship of the burden of ninetie the third was the Iohn Euangelist a ship of seuen score tunne With the sayd ships and two pinnesses wherof the one was drowned on the coast of England we went forward on our voyage and stayed at Doâeâ fourteene dayes We staied also at Rie three or foure dayes Moreouer last of all we touched at Dartmouth The first day of Nouember at nine of the clocke at night departing from the coast of England we set off the Start bearing Southwest all that night in the sea and the next day all day and the next night after vntill the third day of the said moneth about noone making our way good did runne threescore leagues The 17 day in the morning we had sight of the I le of Madera which doth rise to him that commeth in the Northnortheast part vpright land in the west part of it and very high and to the Southsoutheast a low long land and a long point with a saddle thorow the middest of it standing in two and thirtie degrees and in the West part many springs of water running downe from the mountaine and many white fieldes like vnto corne fields some white houses to the Southeast part of it and the toppe of the mountaine sheweth very ragged if you may see it and in the Northeast part there is a bight or bay as though it were a harborow Also in the said part there is a rocke a little distance from the shoare and ouer the sayd bight you shall see a great gappe in the mountaine The 19 day at twelue of the clocke we had sight of the isle of Palmes and Teneriffa and the Canariesâ The Ile of Palme riseth round lieth Southeast and Northwest and the Northwest part is lowest In the South is a round hill ouer the head land and another round hill aboue that in the land There are betweene the Southeast part of the I le of Madera the Northwest part of the I le of Palme seuen and fifty leagues This Isle of Palme lieth in eight and twenty degrees And our course from Madera to the I le of Palme was South and South and by West so that we had sight of Teneriffa and of the Canaries The Southeast part of the I le of the Palme the Northnortheast of Teneriffa lie Southeast and Northwest and betweene them are 20 leagues Teneriffa and the great Canary called Gran Canaria and the West part of Forteuentura stande in seuen and twenty degrees and a halfe Gomera is a faire Island but very ragged lieth Westsouthwest off Teneriffa And whosoeuer wil come betweene them two Ilands must come South and by East and in the South part of Gomera is a towne and a good rode in the said part of the Iland and it standeth in seuen and twentie degrees and three terces Teneriffa is an high land with a great high pike like a sugar loafe and vpon the said pike is snow throughout all the whole yeere And by reason of that pike it may be knowen aboue all other Ilands and there we were becalmed the twentieth day of Nouember from sixe of the clocke in the morning vntill foure of the clocke at afternoone The two and twentieth day of Nouember vnder the Tropike of Cancer the Sunne goeth downe West and by South Upon the coast of Barbarie fiue and twentie leagues by North Cape blanke at three leagues off the maine there are fifteene fadomes and good shelly ground and sande among and no streames and two small Ilands standing in two and twentie degrees and a terce From Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is an hundred leagues and our course was South and by East The said Cape standeth in two and twentie and a halfe and all that coast is flatte sixteene or seuenteene fadome deepe Seuen or eight leagues off from the riuer del Oro to Cape de las Barbas there vse many Spaniardes and Portugals to trade for fishing during the moneth of Nouember and all that coast is very low lands Also we went from Cape de las Barbas Southsouthwest and Southwest and by South till we brought our selues in twentie degrees and a halfe reckoning our selues seuen leagues off and there were the least sholes of Cape Blanke Then we went South vntill we brought our selues in 13 degrees reckoning our selues fiue and twentie leagues off And in 15 degrees we did reare the Crossiers and we might haue reared them sooner if we had looked for them They are not right a crosse in the moneth of Nouember by reason that the nights are short there Neuerthelesse we had the sight of them the 29 day of the said moneth at night The first of December being in 13 degrees we set our course South and by East vntill the fourth day of December at 12 of the clocke the same day Then we were in nine degrees and a terce reckoning ourselues 30 leagues off the sholes of the riuer called Rio Grande being Westsouthwest off them the which sholes be 30 leagues long The fourth of December we beganne to set our course Southeast we being in sixe degrees and a halfe The ninth day of December we set our course Eastsoutheast the fourteenth day of the sayde moneth we set our course East we being in fiue degrees and a halfe reckoning our selues thirty and sixe leagues from the coast of Guinea The nineteenth of the said moneth we set our course East and by North reckoning our selues seuenteene leagues distant from Cape Mensurado the said Cape being Eastnortheast of vs and the riuer of Sesto being East The one and twentith day of the said moneth we fell with Cape Mensurado to the Southeast about two leagues off This Cape may be easily knowen by reason y t the rising of it is like a Porpose-head Also toward the Southeast there are three trees whereof the Eastermost tree is the highest and the middlemost is like a hie stacke the Southermost like vnto a gibet and vpon the maine are foure or fiue high hilles rising one after another like round hommocks or hillocks And the Southeast of the three trees brandiernwise and all the coast along is white sand The said Cape standeth within a litle in sixe degrees The two and twentieth of December we came to the riuer of Sesto remained there vntill the nine and twentieth day of the said moneth Here we thought it best to send before vs the
their Townes which were like to twentie small houels all couered ouer with great leaues and baggage and all the sides open and a scaffolde vnder the house about a yard high where they worke many pretie things of the barkes of trees and there they lye also In some of their houses they worke yron and make faire dartes and diuers other things to worke their boates and other things withall and the women worke as well as the men But when wee were there diuers of the women to shew vs pleasure danced and sung after their maner full ill to our eares Their song was thus Sakere sakere ho ho. Sakere sakere ho ho. And with these words they leape and dance and clap their hands Beastes we could see none that they had but two goates small dogges and small hennes other beastes we saw none After that we had well marked all things we departed and went aboord our ships which thing the Captaine of the other towne perceiuing sent two of his seruants in a boat with a basket of Graines and made vs signes that if when we had slept wee would come againe into their riuer wee should haue store of Graines and so shewed vs his Graines and departed The 17. day in the morning because we thought that the Negroes would haue done something because the Captaine sent for vs I required the Master to goe on shoare and sent the rest of our Marchants with him and caried aboord my selfe by reason that the last day he estemed our things so litle so when the Master and the rest came into the riuer the captaine with diuers others came to them and brought Graines with them after that he saw that I was not there he made signes to know where I was and they made signes to him againe that I was in the ships and then hee made signes to know who was Captaine by the name of Diago for so they call their Captaine they pointed to the master of the ship then he began to shew his Graines but he held them so vnreasonably that there was no profit to be made of them which things the Master perceiuing and seeing that they had no store of Graines came away and tooke not aboue 50. pound waight of Graines Then he went a shoare to the litle Towne where we were the day before one of them plucked a Gourd wherewith the Negroes were offended came many of them to our men with their darts and great targets and made signes to them to depart which our men did hauing but one bow and two or three swords and went aboord the boate and came away from them and assoone as they were come aboord we wayed and set saile but the winde was off the Sea so that we could not get ouâ cleare of certaine rocks and therefore we came to an ancre againe This riuer is called Riuer S. Vincent standing in 4. degrees and a halfe and it ebbeth and floweth there euery 12. houres but not much water when it ebbeth the most while wee were there it ebbed one fadome and a halfe water This countrey as farre as we could perceiue is altogether woody and as strange trees whereof wee knewe none and they were of many sorts with great leaues like great dockes which bee higher then any man is able to reach the top of them There are certaine peason by the Sea side which grow vpon great and very long stalkes one of the stalkes I measured and found it 27. paces long and they grow vpon the sand like to trees and that so neere the Sea that sometimes the Sea floweth into the woods as we might perceiue by the water markes The trees and all things in this place grow continually greene Diuers of the women haue such exceeding long breasts that some of them wil lay the same vpon the ground and lie downe by them but all the women haue not such breasts At this place all the day the winde bloweth off the Sea and all the night off the land but wee found it to differ sometimes which our Master marueâled at This night at 9. of the clocke the winde came vp at the East which ordinarily about that time was wont to come out of the North Northwest off the shoare yet we wayed and halled off South with that winde all night into the Sea but the next morning we halled in againe to the lande and tooke in 6. Tunnes of water for our ship and I thinke the Hinde tooke in as much I could not perceiue that here was any gold or any other good thing for the people be so wilde and idle that they giue themselues to seeke out nothing if they would take paines they might gather great store of graines but in this place I could not perceiue two Tunne There are many foules in the Countrey but the people wil not take the paines to take them I obserued some of their words of speach which I thought good here to set downe Bezow bezow Is their salutation Manegete afoye Graines ynough Crocow afoye Hennes ynough Zeramme afoye Haue you ynough Begge sacke Giue me a knife Begge come Giue me bread Borke Holde your peace Coutrecke Ye lye Veede Put foorth or emptieâ Brekeke Rowe Diago Their Captaine and some call him Dabo These and other wordes they speake very thicke and oftentimes recite one word three times together and at the last time longer then at the two first The 18. day towards night as we were sailing along the coast we met with certaine boats in thè seaâ the men shewed vs that there was a riuer thwart of vs where there were Graines to be sold but we thought it not good to cary there least the other ships should get before vs. This riuer hath lying before it three great rockes and 5. small rocks one great tree and a litle tree right by the riuer which in height exceeded all the rest we halled this night along the coast 10. leagues The 19. day as we coasted the shoare about twelue of the clocke there came out to vs 3. boates to tell vs that they had graines brought some with them for a shew but we could not tary there We proceeded along the coast ancred by the shore all the night and ran this day 10. leagues The 20. day the Hinde hauing ankered by vs amongst rockes and foule ground lost a small anker At noone as we passed along the coast there came forth a Negro to vs making signes that if we would goe a shoare wee should haue Graines and where wee ankered at night there came another to vs and brought Graines and shewed vs them and made signes that wee should tary and made a fire vpon the land in the night meaning thereby to tell vs where we should land and so they did in diuers other places vpon the coast where they saw vs to anker In al the places where we haue ancred since we came from our
a citie called Anagona The third day wee departed about the Westerne point of the Iland about 12 or 14 leagues from Santa Cruz into a Baie which is right agaynst the house of one Petro de Souses in which Baie we came to an anker the 5 day where we heard that our Admirall had bene there at an anker 7 dayes before vs and was gone thence to an Iland called Gomera whereupon wee set saile presently to seeke him The 6 day we came to an anker against the towne of Gomera where we found our Admirall which was very ioyfull of our comming and we also of his sight In the sayd road we found Edward Cooke in a tall ship and a shippe of the Coppersmiths of London which the Portugals had trecherously surprised in the Baie of Santa Cruz vpon the coast of Barbarie which ship we left there all spoiled Our General marchants bought in the said towne for our prouision 14 buts of wine which cost 15 duckats a but which were offred vs at Santa Cruz in Tenerif for 8,9 and 10 duckats The 9 day we departed from this road to another Baie about 3 leagues off and there tooke in fresh water so the 10 day we set saile towards Cape Blanke which is on the coast of Guinea The 12 day we fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape Pargos which is 35 leagues from Cape Blanke But hauing no knowledge of that coast we went with Cape Blanke and at the fall of the land we sounded and had 16 fadome water two leagues from the shore The land is very lowe and white sand Upon the fall of the sayd coast beware how you borow in 12 or 10 fadome for within 2 or 3 casts of the lead you may be on ground The 17 day we set saile from Cape Blanke directing our course South and by East South among and fo fell into a Baie to the Eastward of Cape Verde about 16 leagues and about sixe leagues from the shore The sayd land seemed vnto vs as if it had bene a great number of shippes vnder saile being in deed nothing els but the land which was full of Hammoks some high some lowe with high trees on them We bare with the said land till we were within 3 leagues of the shore and then we sounded and found 28 fadome water blacke vase This day we saw much fish in sundry sculs swimming with their noses with the brim of the water Passing along this coast we might see two small round hils seeming to vs about a league one from the other which is the Cape and betweene them are great store of trees and in all our dayes sailing we saw no land so high as the said two hils The 19 day we came to an anker at the Cape in a roade fast by the Westermost side of two hils in 10 fadome of water where you may ride in fiue or sixe fadome for the ground is faire and alwayes you shall haue the winde off the shore And as soone as we were all at an anker our Generall came aboord vs and with him the master of the Admirall whose name was William Bars and with them the captaine of the Uiceadmirall whose name was master Edward Fenner and Robert Curtise the master and dined aboord of vs being in the George wherein was Captaine Iohn Heiwood and Iohn Smith of Hampton master and there we concluded to goe aland which was halfe a mile from vs and by the counsell of William Bats both Captaine and marchants and diuers of the companie went without armour for he sayd that although the people were blacke and naked yet they were ciuill so that hee would needs giue the venter without the consent of the rest to go without weapon Thus they rowed to shore where we being in the shippe might see a great companie of Negros naked walking to and fro by the sea side where the landing place was waiting for the comming of our men who came too soone and landed to their losse as it fell out afterwards There went a shore the Admirals skiffe and the May Flowers boate and in them the number of 20 persons or thereabouts as M. George Fenner the Generall his brother M. Edward Fenner Thomas Valentine Iohn Worme and Francis Leigh marchants Iohn Haward William Bats Nicholas Day Iohn Tomson and others At their comming to the shore there were 100 Negros or vpward with their bowes and arrowes our Captaines and merchants talked with them according to the vse of the country the one demanded pledges of the other they were content to deliuer 3 of their Negros for 5 of our men Our 5 mens names were these Iohn Haward Wil. Bats Nich. Day Ioh. Tomson Iohn Curtise these were deliuered them and we receiued 3 Negros into our Admirals skiffe Our men being a shore among the Negros began to talke with them declaring what ware and marchandize we had as woollen cloth linnen cloth iron cheese other things The Negros answered againe they had ciuet muske gold and graines which pleased our captaines and marchants very well Then the Negros desired to haue a sight of some of our wares to the which our marchants were content and forthwith sent aboord one of the boats for part of their marchandise and in the meane time while the boate went to the ship our fiue men were walking on the shore with the Negros and our Generall and marchants staied in the other boat by the sea side hauing the 3 Negros with them Our boate then came againe and brought iron and other marchandize with bread wine and cheese which they gaue vnto them Then two of the Negros which were the pledges made themselues sicke desiring to goe a shore promising to send other two for them Captaine Haiward perceiuing that our men had let the Negros come a shore asked what they meant and doubting the worst began to drawe toward the boate and two or three of the Negros folowed him And when hee came to the boate they began to stay him and he made signes vnto them that hee would fetch them more drinke and bread notwithstanding when he was entering into the boate one of them caught him by the breeches and would haue staied him but hee sprang from him and leapt into the boate and as soone as hee was in one of the Negros a shore beganne to blow a pipe and presently the other Negro that was in our boate sitting on the boates side and master Wormes sword by him suddenly drew the sword out of the scabberd and cast himselfe into the Sea and swamme a shore and presently the Negros laied handes on our men that were on shore and tooke three of them with great violence and tore all their apparell from their backes and left them nothing to couer them and many of them shot so thicke at our men in our boates that they could scarse set hand to any Oare to rowe from the shore
yet by the helpe of God they got from them with their boates although many of them were hurt with their poysoned arrowes and the poison is vncurable if the arrow enter within the skin and drawe blood and except the poison bee presently suckt out or the place where any man is hurt bee foorthwith cut away hee dieth within foure dayes and within three houres after they bee hurt or pricked wheresoeuer it be although but at the litle toe yet it striketh vp to the heart and taketh away the stomacke and causeth the partie marueilously to vomite being able to brooke neither meat nor drinke The Negros hauing vsed our men with such cruelty whose names were Nicholas Day William Bats and Iohn Tomson led them away to a towne which was within a mile of the water side or thereabout The 20 day we sent to land a boate or skiffe wherein were eight persons and one of them was the foresayd Iohn Tomson and our interpreter which was a Frenchman for there was one of the Negros which spake good French and they caried with them two harquebusses two targets and a mantell The cause of sending them was to learne what ransome they demaunded for Bats and Day whom they detained And when they came to the shore and told tââ Negros what they desired they went and fetched them from among the trees and brought them loose among fortie or fiftie of them And being come within a stones cast of the sea side William Bats brake from them and ran as fast as he could into the sea towards the boat and he was not so soone in the water but hee fell downe either being out of breath or his foote failing him in the sand being soft so that the Negros came and fell on him and tooke him and haled him that we thought they had torne him in pieces for they tore againe all the apparell from his backe so that some of them caried our men againe to the towne and the rest shot at vs with their poisoned arrowes and hurt one of our men called Androwes in the smal of the leg who being come aboord for al that our Surgeons could do we thought he would haue died Our Generall notwithstanding all this villanie sent agayne to them and offered them any thing that they desired for the raunsome of our men buâ they would not deliuer them giuing vs this answere That there was in the foresayd roade three weekes before wee came an English shippe which had taken three of their people and vntiâl wee did bring or send them againe wee should not haue our men although wee would giue our three shippes with their furniture The 21 day a French shippe of the burden of 80 tunnes or thereabouts came to the place where we were being bound to traffique at the Cape we told them of the detaining of our two men by the Negros and seeing that these Frenchmen were very well welcome to the Negros we wished them to see whether they could procure them againe of the Negros and bring them along with them and our Generall promised the Frenchmen 100 li. to obtaine them So wee committed the matter to the Frenchmen and departed Of our men that were hurt by the Negros arrowes foure died and one to saue his life had his arme cut off Androwes that was last of all hurt lay lame not able to helpe himselfe onely two recouered of their hurts So we placed other men in the roomes of those that we lost and set saile The 26 day betweene Cape Verde and Bona vista we sawe many flying fishes of the bignesse of herrings whereof two flew into our boat which we towed at our sterne The 28 day we fell with an Iland called Bona vista which is from Cape Verde 86 leagues The Northside of the sayde Iland is full of white sandie hils and dales and somewhat high land The sayd day wee came to an anker within the Westermost point about a league within the point and found in our sounding faire sand in ten fadome water but you may goe neere till you be in fiue or six fadome for the ground is faire As soone as we were at an anker our Generall sent his pinnasse a land and found fiue or sixe small houses but the people were fled into the mountains and the next day he sent a shore againe and met with two Portugals who willingly went aboord with his men and at their comming he welcommed them although they were but poore simple and gaue each of them a paire of shoes and so set them a shore againe The 30 day we weighed sailed into a Bay within a smal Iland about a league from vs and tooke plentie of diuers sortes of fishe The foresayd Iland lieth in sixteene degrees And if you meane to anker in the said Bay you may borow in foure or fiue fadome of the Southermost point of the sayd Iland which you may see when you ride in the road But beware of the middle of the Baie for there lieth a ledge of rocks which at a lowe water breaketh yet there is three fadome water ouer them The last day of Ianuarie our Generall with certaine of his men went a shore in the Baie to the houses where he found 12 Portugals In all the Iland there were not aboue 30 persons which were banished men for a time some for more yeeres some for lesse and amongst them there was one simple man which was their captaine They liue vpon goats flesh cocks hennes and fresh water other victuals they haue none sauing fish which they esteeme not neither haue they any boats to take them They reported that this Iland was giuen by the king of Portugall to one of his gentlemen who hath let it foorth to rent for one hundreth duckats a yeere which rent is reared onely in goats skinnes For by their speaches there hath bene sent foorth of the sayd Iland into Portugall 40000 skins in one yeere We were to these men marueilously welcome and to their powers very wel entertained and they gaue vs the flesh of as many hee-goates as wee would haue and tooke much paines for vs in taking them and bringing them from the mountains vpon their asses They haue there great store of the oyle of Tortoises which Tortoise is a fish which swimmeth in the Sea with a shell on his backe as broad as a target It raineth not in this Iland but in three moneths of the yeere from the midst of Iuly to the midst of October and it is here alwayes very hote Kine haue bene brought hither but by reason of the heate and drought they haue died The 3 of February wee departed from this Iland and the same day fell with another Iland called the Iland of Maiyo which is 14 leagues from the other Iland there is in the midst of the way between these two Ilands a danger which is alwayes to be seene We ankred in the
Northwest side of the sayd I le in a faire Baie of eight fadomes water and faire sand but here we staied not but the fourth day weighed and sailed to another Iland called S. Iago which lieth off the said Iland of Maiyo East and by South and about fiue leagues one from the other Being come within the Westermost point we saw a faire road and a small towne by the water side and also a fort or platforme by it there we purposed to come to anker and our marchants to make some sale But before we came within their shot they let flie at vs two pieces whereupon we went roomer and sailed along the shore two or three leagues from the road where we found a small Baie and two or three small houses where we came to an anker in 14 fadome faire ground Within an houre after we had ankered we might see diuers horsemen and footmen on the land right against vs riding and running to and fro The next day being the fift of Februarie a great companie of their horsemen and footemen appeared on the shoare side vnto whom our Generall sent to vnderstande whether they would quietly trafike with them And they sent him worde againe desiring that they might speake with him promising that if he came to trafike as a marchant he should be welcome and also that he should haue any thing that he or the marchant would with reason demaund When this answere was brought vnto our Generall he was very glad thereof and the whole companie and presently with as much speede as he could he caused his boates to be made readie but doubting the villanie of the Portugales he armed his boates putting a double base in the head of his pinnesse and two single bases in the head of the Skiffe and so sent to the May-floure and the George and willed them in like sort to man their two boates These boates being thus manned and well appointed our Generall entered into his Skiffe and with the rest rowed to the shoare where were threescore horsemen or more and two hundreth footemen readie to receiue them Our Generall marueiled that they came in so great a number and all armed and therefore with a flagge of truce sent to them to knowe their pleasure and they answered him with many faire promises and othes that their pretence was all true and that they meant like Gentlemen and Marchantes to trafike with him declaring also that their Captaine was comming to speake with him and therefore desired our Generall to come and speake with him himselfe With this answere the boate returned and then our Generall caused his pinnesse to rowe to them and as he came neere the shoare they came in a great companie with much obeysance opening their hands and armes abroade bowing themselues with their bonnets off with as much humble salutations outwardly as they might earnestly desiring our Generall and Marchants to come on lande to them whereunto he would not agree without sufficient gages of Gentlemen and Marchants At length they promised to sende two gages to our Generals contentment promising fresh water victuall money or Negroes for ware if it were such as they liked and therefore desired our Generall and Marchants to sende them a shoare in writing the quantitie of their wares and the names of them all which our Generall departed to performe looking for their answere the morrowe following And being gone a litle from the shoare he caused his bases enrriers and harckebusses to be shot off and our ships in like case shot off fiue or sixe pieces of great ordinance and so came aboord to prepare the note The Portugales most of them departed sauing those that were left to watch and to receiue the note which about foure or fiue a clocke in the afternoone was sent and it was receiued But all the purposes of the Portugals were villainously to betray vs as shal appeare hereafter although we meant in truth and honestie friendly to trafike with them There was to the Westwards of vs and about two leagues from vs a towne behinde a point fast by the sea side where they had certaine Carauels or shippes and also two Brigandines whereof they with all the speede that they might made readie foure Carauels and both the brigandines which were like two Gallies and furnished them both with men and ordinance as much as they could carrie and as soone as it was night they came rowing and falling towardes vs so that the land being high and the weather somewhat cloudie or mystie and they comming all the way close vnder the shoare we could not see them till they were right against one of our ships called the May-floure By this time it was about one or two of the clocke in the morning and the May-floure roade neerer them then the other two by a base shotte so that they made a sure account either to haue taken her or burnt her In the meane time our men that had the watch litle thinking of such villanous treacheries after so many faire wordes were singing and playing one with the other and made such a noyse that being but a small gale of winde and riâââg neere the lande they might heare vs from the shoare so that we supposed that they made account that we had espyed them which indeede we had not neither had any one piece of ordinance primed or any other thing in a readinesse They came so neere vs that they were within gunshot of vs then one of our men chanced to see a light then looking out spied the 4 ships and suddenly cried out Gallies gallies at which cry we were all amazed and foorthwith they shot at vs all the great ordinance that they had and their harquebusses and curriers and so lighted certaine tronkes or pieces of wilde fire and all of them with one voice as well they on the shoare as they in the shippes gaue a great shoute and so continued hallowing with great noyses still approching neerer and neerer vnto the May-floure We with all the speede that we might made readie one piece of ordinance and shotte at them which caused them somewhat to stay so they charged their ordinance and shot at vs freshly againe and while they shotte this second time at vs we had made readie three pieces which we shot at them but they approched still so neere that at last we might haue shot a sheafe arrowe to them Whereupon we hauing a gale of winde off the shoare hoysed our foresayle and cut our cable at the hawse and went towarde our Admirall and they continued following and shooting at vs and sometime at our Admirall but our Admirall shotte one such piece at them that it made them to retire and at length to warpe away like traiterous villaines and although they thus suddenly shot all their shot at vs yet they hurt neither man nor boy of ours but what we did to them we know not But seeing the villanie of these men
should be done and that against another yeere it should be in better readines the reason why we found it so vnprepared was because in this kings time no Christians had euer resorted thither to lade pepper The next day there were sent vs 12 baskets and so a litle euery day vntill the 9 of March at which time we had made vpon 64 serons of pepper and 28 Elephants teeth In this time of our being at Benin our natures at this first time not so well acquainted with thââ climate we fell all of vs into the disease of the feuer whereupon the Captaine sent me downe with those goods which we alreadie had receiued to the rest of our men at Goto where being arriued I found all the men of our pinnesse sicke also and by reason of their weaknes not able to conuey the pinnesse and goods downe to the place where our ship road but by good hap within two houres after my comming to Goto the boate came vp from the ship to see how all things stood with vs so that I put the goods into the boat and went downe towards the ship but by that time I was come aboord many of our men died namely Master Benson the Cooper the Carpenter 3 or 4 more my selfe was also in such a weake state that I was not able to returne againe to Benin Whereupon I sent vp Samuel Dunne and the Chirurgian with him to our men that were about to let them blood if it were thought needfull who at their comming to Benin found the Captaine and your sonne William Bird dead and Thomas Hempsteede very weake who also died within two dayes after their comming thither This sorrowfull accident caused them with such pepper and teeth as they could then find speedily to returne to the ship as by the Cargason will appeare at their comming away the Veadore tolde them that if they could or would stay any longer time he would vse all possible expedition to bring in more commodities but the common sicknesse so increased and continued amongst vs all that by the time our men which remained were come aboord we had so many sicke and dead of our companie that we looked all for the same happe and so thought to loose both our ship life countrey and all Very hardly and with much adoe could we get vp our ankers but yet at the last by the mercie of God hauing gotten them vp but leauing our pinnesse behinde vs we got to sea and set saile which was vpon the 13 of Aprill After which by little and little our men beganne to gather vp their crums and to recouer some better strength and so sailing betwixt the Islands of Cape Verde and the maine we came to the Islands of the Azores vpon the 25 of Iuly where our men beganne a fresh to grow ill and diuers died among whom Samuel Dun was one and as many as remained liuing were in a hard case but in the midst of our distresse it fell so wel out by Gods good prouidence that we met with your ship the Barke Burre on this side the North cape which did not only keepe vs good coÌpanie but also sent vs sixe fresh men aboord without whose helpe we should surely haue tasted of many inconueniences But by this good meanes we are now at the last arriued in Plimouth this 9 day of September and for want of better health at this time I referre the further knowledge of more particularities till my comming to London Yours to commaund Anthony Ingram The second voyage to Benin set foorth by Master Iohn Newton and Master Iohn Bird Marchants of London in the yeere 1590 with a ship called the Richard of Arundell of the burthen of one hundreth tunnes and a small pinnesse in which voyage Master Iames Welsh was chiefe Maister THe third of September 1590 we set saile from Ratclife and the 18 of the said moneth we came into Plimouth sound and the two and twentieth we put to sea againe and at midnight we were off the Lisart and so passed on our voyage vntill the 14 of October on which day we had sight of âorteueâtura one of the Canarie Islands which appeared very ragged as we sailed by it The 16 of October in the latitude of 24 degrees and nine minutes we met with a great hollow sea the like whereof I neuer saw on this coast and this day there came to the ships side a monstrous great fish I thinke it was a Gobarto which put vp his head to the sleepe tubs where y e cooke was in shifting the victuals whoÌ I thought the fish would haue caried away The 21 in this latitude of 18 degrees we met with a countersea out of the North boord and the last voyage in this very place we had the countersea out of the South being very calme weather as now it is also The 24 we had sight of Cauo Verde and the 25 we met with a great hollow sea out of the North which is a common signe that the winde will be Northerly and so it prooued The 15 of Nouember we met with three currants out of the West and Northwest one after another with an houres time betweene each currant This was in the latitude of 6 degrees and 42 minutes The 18 day we met with two other great currants out of the Southwest and the 20 we said another current out of the Northeast and the 24 we had a great current out of the Southsouthwest and at 6 of the clocke towards night we had 3 currents more The 27 we thought that we had gone at the least 2 leagues and a halfe euery watch and it fell out that we sailed but one league euery watch for the space of 24 hours by meanes of a great billow and current that came still out of the South The 5 of December in setting the watch we cast about and lay East Nârtheast and Northeast and here in 5 degrees and a halfe our pinnesse lost vs wilfully The 7 at the going downe of the Sunne we saw a great blacke spot in the Sunne and the 8. day both at rising and setting we saw the like which spot to our seeming was about the bignesse of a shilling being in 5 degrees of latitude and still there came a great billow out of the southerboord The 14 we sounded and had 15 fadom water and grosse red sand and 2 leagues from the shore the currant set Southeast along the shore with a billow still out of the southerboord The 15 we were thwart a rocke somewhat like the Newstone in England it was 2 leagues from vs here we sounded and had 27 fadom but the rocke is not aboue a mile from the shore and a mile farther we saw another rocke and betweene them both broken ground here we sounded and had but 20 fadome and blacke sand and we might see plaine that the rockes went not along the shore but from the land to the seaward and
Moneth we ranne along Island and had the South part of it at eight of the clocke East from vs ten leagues The seuenth day of this moneth we had a very terrible storme by force whereof one of our men was blowen into the sea out of our waste but he caught hold of the foresaile sheate and there held till the Captaine pluckt him againe into the ship The 25. day of this moneth we had sight of the Island of Orkney which was then East from vs. The first day of October we had sight of the Sheld and so sailed about the coast and ankered at Yarmouth and the next day we came into Harwich The language of the people of Meta incognita Argoteyt a hand Cangnawe a nose Arered an eye Keiotot a tooth Mutchatet the head Chewat an eare Comagaye a legge Atoniagay a foote Callagay a paire of breeches Attegay a coate Polleueragay a knife Accaskay a shippe Coblone a thumbe Teckkeâe the foremost finger Ketteckle the middle finger Mekellacane the fourth finger Yacketrone the litle finger The second voyage of Master Martin Frobisher made to the West and Northwest Regions in the yeere 1577. with a description of the Countrey and people Written by Master Dionise Settle ON Whitsunday being the sixe and twentieth of May in the yeere of our Lord God 1577. Captaine Frobisher departed from Blacke Wall with one of the Queenes Maiesties ships called The Aide of nine score tunnes or therabouts and two other little Borkes likewise the one called The Gabriel whereof Master Fenton a Gentleman of my Lord of Warwikes was Captaine and the other The Michael whereof Master Yorke a Gentleman of my Lord Admirals was Captaine accompanied with seuen score Gentlemen souldiers and sailers well furnished with victuals and other prouision necessarie for one halfe yeere on this his second voyage for the further discouering of the passage to Cathay and other Countreys thereunto adiacent by West and Northwest nauigations which passage or way is supposed to bee on the North and Northwest pars of America and the said America to be an Island inuironed with the sea where through our Merchants may haue course and recourse with their merchandize from these our Northernmost parts of Europe to those Orientall coasts of Asia in much shorter time and with greater benefite then any others to their no little commoditie and profite that do or shall frequent the same Our said Captaine and General of this present voyage and company hauing the yeere before with two little pinnesses to his great danger and no small commendations giuen a worthy attempt towards the performance thereof is also prest when occasion shall be ministred to the benefite of his Prince and natiue Countrey to aduenture himselfe further therein As for this second voyage it seemeth sufficient that he hath better explored and searched the commodities of those people and Countreys which in his first voyage the yeere before he had found out Upon which considerations the day and yeere before expressed we departed from Blacke Wall to Harwich where making an accomplishment of things necessary the last of May we hoised vp sailes and with a merrie wind the 7. of Iune we arriued at the Islands called Orcades or vulgarly Orkney being in number 30. subiect and adiacent to Scotland where we made prouision of fresh water in the doing whereof our Generall licensed the Gentlemen and souldiers for their recreation to goe on shore At our landing the people fled from their poore cottages with shrikes and alarms to warne their neighbours of enemies but by gentle perswasions we reclamed them to their houses It seemeth they are often frighted with Pirats or some other enemies that mooue them to such sudden feare Their houses are very simply builded with Pibble stone without any chimneis the fire being made in the middest thereof The good man wife children and other of their family eate and sleepe on the one side of the house and the cattell on the other very beastly and rudely in respect of civilitie They are destitute of wood their fire is âurffes and Cowshards They haue corne bigge and oates with which they pay their Kings rent to the maintenance of his house They take great quantitie of fish which they dry in the wind and Sunne They dresse their meat very filthily and eate it without salt Their apparell is after the rudest sort of Scotland Their money is all base Their Church and religion is reformed according to the Scots The fisher men of England can better declare the dispositions of those people then I wherefore I remit other their vsages to their râports as yeârely repaiâers thither in their course to and from Island for fish We departed herehence the 8. of Iune and followed our course betweene West and Northwest vntill the 4. of Iuly all which time we had no night but that easily and without any impediment we had when we were so disposed the fruition of our bookes and other pleasures to passe away the time a thing of no small moment to such as wander in vnknowen seas and long nauigations especially when both the winds and raging surges do passe their common and wonted course This benefite endureth in those parts not 6. weekes while the sunne is neere the Tropike of Cancer but where the pole is raised to 70. or 80. degrees it continueth much longer All along these seas after we were sixe dayes sailing from Orkney we met floting in the sea great Firre trees which as we iudged were with the furie of great floods rooted vp and so driuen into the sea Island hath almost no other wood nor fuell but such as they take vp vpon their coastes It seemeth that these trees are driuen from some part of the New found land with the current that setteth from the West to the East The 4. of Iuly we came within the making of Frisland From this shoare 10â or 12. leagues we met great Islands of yce of halfe a mile some more some lesse in compasse shewing aboue the sea 30. or 40. fathoms and as we supposed fast on ground where with our lead we could scarse sound the bottome for depth Here in place of odoriferous and fragrant sinels of sweete gums pleasant notes of musicall birdes which other Countreys in more temperate Zones do yeeld wee tasted the most boisterous Boreal blasts mixt with snow and haile in the moneths of Iune and Iuly nothing inferior to our vntemperate winter a sudden alteration and especially in a place or Parallele where the Pole is not eleuate aboue 61. degrees at which height other Countreys more to the North yea vnto 70. degrees shew themselues more temperate then this doth All along this coast yce lieth as a continuall bulwarke so defendeth the Countrey that those that would land there incur great danger Our Generall 3. dayes together attempted with the ship boate to haue gone on shoare which for that without great
regions habitable I shal be very short because the same reasons serue for this purpose which were alleged before in the prouing the middle zone to be temperate especially seeing all heat and colde proceed from the Sunne by the meanes either of the Angle which his beames do make with the Horizon or els by the long or short continuance of the Suns presence aboue ground so that if the Sunnes beames do beat perpendicularly at right Angles then there is one cause of heat and if the Sunne do also long continue aboue the Horizon then the heat thereby is much increased by accesse of this other cause so groweth to a kinde of extremity And these two causes as I sayd before do most concurre vnder the two Tropicks and therefore there is the greatest heat of the world And likewise where both these causes are most absent there is greatest want of heat and increase of colde seeing that colde is nothing but the priuation and absence of heat and if one cause be wanting and the other present the effect will grow indifferent Therefore this is to be vnderstood that the neerer any region is to the Equinoctiall the higher the Sunne doth rise ouer their heads at noone and so maketh either right or neere right Angles but the Sunne carieth with them so much the shorter time and causeth shorter dayes with longer and colder nights to restore the domage of the day past by reason of the moisture conâumed by vapour But in such regions ouer the which the Sunne riseâh lower as in regions extended towards either pole it maketh there vnequall Angles but the Sunne continueth longer and maketh longer dayes and causeth so much shorter and warmer nights as retaining warme vapours of the day past For there are found by experience Summer nights in Scotland and Gothland very hot when vnder thâ Equinoctiall they are found very cold This benefit of the Sunnes long continuance increase of the day doth augment so much the more in colde regions as they are nerer the poles and ceaseth not increasing vntill it come directly vnder the point of the pole Arcticke where the Sunne continueth aboue ground the space of sixe moneths or halfe a yere together and so the day is halfe a yere long that is the time of the Sunnes being in the North signes from the first degree of Aries vntill the last of Virgo that is aâl the time from our 10 day of March vntill the 14 of September The Sunne therfore during the timâ of these sixe moneths without any offence or hindrance of the night giueth his influence vpon those lands with heat that neuer ceaseth during that time which maketh to the great increase of Summer by reason of the Sunnes continuance Therefore it followeth that though the Sunne be not there very high ouer their heads to cause right angle beames and to giue great heat yet the Sun being there sometime almost 24 degrees high doth cast a conuenient and meane heat which there continueth without hindrance of the night the space of sixe moneths as is before sayd during which time there followeth to be a conuenient moderate and temperate heat or els rather it is to be suspected the heat there to be very great both for continuance and also Quia virtus vnita crescit the vertue and strength of heat vnited in one increaseth If then there be such a moderate heat vnder the poles and the same to continue so long time what should moone the olde writers to say there cannot be place for habitation And that the certainty of this temperate heat vnder both the poles might more manifestly appeare let vs consider the position quality of the sphere the length of the day and so gather the height of the Sunne at all times and by consequent the quantity of his angle and so lastly the strength of his heat Those lands and regions lying vnder the pole and hauing the pole for their zenith must needs haue the Equinoctial circle for their Horizon therefore the Sun entring into the North signes and describing euery 24 houres a parallel to the Equinoctiall by the diurnall motion of Primum mobile the same parallels must needs be wholly aboue the Horizon and so looke how many degrees there are from the first of Aries to the last of Virgo so many whole reuolutions there are aboue their Horizon that dwell vnder the pole which amount to 182 and so many of our dayes the Sunne continueth with them During which time they haue there continuall day and light without any hindrance of moist nights Yet it is to be noted that the Sunne being in the first degree of Aries and last degree of Virgo maketh his reuolution in the very horizon so that in these 24 houres halfe the body of the Sunne is aboue the horizon and the other halfe is vnder his only center describing both the horizon and the equinoctiall circle And therefore seeing the greatest declination of the Sunne is almost 24 degrees it followeth his greatest height in those countreys to be almost 24 degrees And so high is the Sun at noone to vs in London about the 29 of October being in the 15 degree of Scorpio and likewise the 21 of Ianuary being in the 15 of Aquarius Therefore looke what force the Sun at noone hath in London the 29 of October the same force of heat it hath to them that dwell vnder the pole the space almost of two moneths during the time of the Summer solstitium and that without intermingling of any colde night so that if the heat of the Sunne at noone could be well measured in London which is very hard to do because of the long nights which ingender great moisture and cold then would manifestly appeare by expresse numbers the maner of the heat vnder the poles which certainly must needs be to the inhabitants very commodious and profitable if it incline not to ouermuch heat and if moisture do not want For as in October in England we finde temperate aire and haue in our gardens hearbs and floures notwithstanding our cold nights how much more should they haue the same good aire being continuall without night This heat of ours continueth but one houre while the Sun is in that meridian but theirs continueth a long time in one height This our heat is weake and by the coolenesse of the night vanisheth that heat is strong and by continuall accesse is still increased and strengthened And thus by a similitude of the equall height of the Sun in both places appeareth the commodious and moderate heat of the regions vnder the poles And surely I cannot thinke that the diuine prouidence hath made any thing vncommunicable but to haue giuen such order to all things that one way or other the same should be imployed and that euery thing and place should be tollerable to the next but especially all things in this lower world be giuen to man
stone in token of Christian possession In this place there is plentie of blacke Ore and diuers pretie stones The seuenteenth of August the Captaines with their companies chaced and killed a great white Beare which aduentured and gaue a fierce assault vpon twentie men being weâponâd And he serued them for good meate many dayes The eighteenth of Augâst the Pinnesse with much adoe being set together the sayde Captaine Best determined to depart vp the streights to prooue and make tryall as before was pretended some of his company greatly persuading him to the contrary and specially the Carpenter that set the same together who sayde that hee would not aduenture himselfe therein for fiue hundreth pounds for that the boate hung together but onely by the strength of the nayles and lacked some of her principall knees and tymbers These wordes somewhat discouraged some of the company which should haue gone thereinâ Whereupon the Captaine as one not altogether addicted to his owne selfe-will but somewhat foreseeing how it might be afterwards spoken if contrary fortune should happen him Lo hâ hath followed his owne opinion and desperate resolutions and so thereafter it is befallen him calling the Master and Mariners of bâst iudgement together declare vnto them how much the cause imported him in his credite to seeke out the Generall as well to confârre with him of some causes of weight as otherwise to make due examinatiân and tryall of the goodnesse of the Ore whereof they had no assurance but by gesse of the eye and it was well like the other which so to cary home not knowing the goodnesse thereof might be as much as if they should bring so many stones And therefore hee desired them to deliuer their plaine and honest opinion whether the Pinnesse were sufficient for him so to aduenture in or no. It was answered that by carefull heede taking thereunto amongst the yce and the foule weather the Pinnesse might suffice And hereupon the Masters mate of the Anne Francis called Iohn Gray mansully and honestly offering himselfe vnto his Captaine in this aduenture and seruice gaue cause to others of his Mariners to follow the attempt And vpon the nineteenth of August the sayd Captaine being accompanied with Captaine Vpcote of the Moone and eighteene persons in the small Pinnesse hauing conuenient portion of victuals and things necessary departed vpon the sayd pretended Uoyage leauing their shâppe at anchor in a good readinesse for the taking in of their fraight And hauing little winde to sayle withall they plyed alongst the Souther shore and passed aboue 30. leagues hauing the onely helpe of mans labour with Dares and so intending to keepe that shore aboord vntil they were got vp to the farthest and narrowest of the streights minded there to crosse ouer and to search likewise alongst the Northerland vnto the Countesses sound and from thence to passe all that coast along whereby if any of the Fleete had bene distressed by wrecke of rocke or yce by that meanes they might be perceiued of them and so they thereby to giue them such helpe and reliefe as they could They did greatly feare and euer suspect that some of the Fleete were surely cast away and driuen to seeke sowre ââllets amongst the colde cliffes And being shotte vp about fortie leagues within the Streights they put ouer towardes the Norther shore which was not a little dangerous for their small boates And by meanes of a sudden flawe were dryuen and faine to seeke harborough in the night amongst all the rockes and broken ground of Gabriels Ilands a place so named within the streights aboue the Countesse of Warwicks sound And by the way where they landed they did finde certaine great stones set vp by the Countrey people as it seemed for markes where they also made many Câosses of stone in token that Christians had bene thâre The 22. of August they had sight of the Countesses sound and made the placeperfect from the toppe of a hill and keeping along the Norther shore perceiued the smoke of a fire vnder a hils side whereof they diuersly deemed When they came neerer the place they perceiued people which wafted vnto them as it seemed with a flagge or ensigne And because the Country people had vsed to doe the like when they perceiued any of our boats to passe by they suspected them to be the same And comming somewhat neerer they might perceiue certaine tents and discerne this ensigne to be of mingled colours blacke and white after the English fashion But because they could see no Shippe nor likelihood of harborough within fiue or sixe leagues about and knewe that none of our men were woont to frequent those partes they could not tell what to iudge thereof but imagined that some of the ships being carried so high with the storme and mistes had made shipwracke amongst the yce or the broken Islande there and were spoyled by the countrey people who might vse the sundry coloured flagge for a policie to bring them likewise within their danger Whereupon the sayd Captaine with his companies resolued to recouer the same ensigne if it were so from those base people or els to lose their liues and all together In the ende they discerned them to be their countreymen and then they deâmed them to haue lost their Ships and so to be gathered together for their better strength On the other side the company ashoare feared that the Captaine hauing lost his Shippe came to seeke forth the Fleete for his reliefe in his poore Pinnisse so that their extremities caused eche part to suspect the worst The Captaine now with his Pinnisse being come neere the shoare commanded his Boate carefully to be kept aflote lest in their necessitie they might winne the same from him and seeke first to saue themselues for euery man in that case is next himselfe They haled one another according to the manner of the Sea and demaunded what cheere and either partie answered the other that all was well whereupon there was a sudden and ioyfull outshoote with great flinging vp of caps and a braue voly of shotte to welcome one another And truely it was a most strange case to see how ioyfull and gladde euery partie was to see themselues meete in safetie againe after so strange and incredible dangers Yet to be short as their dangers were great so their God was greater And here the company were working vpon new Mines which Captaine Yorke being here arriued not long before had found out in this place and it is named the Countesse of Sussex Mine After some conference with our friends here the Captaine of the Anne Francis departed towards the Countesse of Warwicks sound to speake with the Generall and to haue tryall made of such mettall as he had brought thither by the Goldfiners And so he determined to dispatch againe towards his ship And hauing spoken with the General he receiued order for all causes and direction as
for our discouery The sixt of August we discouered land in 66 degrees 40 minuts of latitude altogether void from the pester of ice we ankered in a very faire rode vnder a braue mount the cliffes whereof were as orient as golde This mount was named Mount Raleigh The rode where our ships lay at anker was called Toânes rode The sound which did compasse the mount was named Exeter sound The foreland towards the North was called Dierscape The foreland towards the South was named Cape Walsingham So soone as we were come to an anker in Totnes rode vnder Mount Raleigh we espied foure white beares at the foot of the mount we supposing them to be goats or wolues manned our boats aud went towards them but when we came neere the shore we found them to be white beares of a monstrous bignesse we being desirous of fresh victuall and the sport began to assault them and I being on land one of them came downe the hill right against me my piece was charged with hailshot a bullet I discharged my piece and shot him in the necke he roared a litle and tooke the water straight making small account of his hurtâ Then we followed him with our boat and killed him with boare-speares two more that night We found nothing in their mawes but we iudged by their dung that they fed vpon grasse because it appeared in all respects like the dung of an horse wherein we might very plainly see the very strawes The 7 we went on shore to another beare which lay all night vpon the top of an Island vnder Mount Raleigh and when we came vp to him he lay fast asleep I leuelled at his head and the stone of my piece gaue no fire with that he looked vp and layed downe his head againe then I shot being charged with two bullets and strooke him in the head he being but amazed fell backwards whereupon we ran all vpon him with boare-speares and thrust him in the body yet for all that he gript away our boare-speares and wenâ towards the water and as he was going downe he came backe againe Then our Master shot his boare-speare and strooke him in the head and made him to take the water and swimme into a coue fast by where we killed him and brought him aboord The breadth of his forefoot from one side to the other was foureteene inches ouer They were very fat so as we were constrained to cast the fat away We saw a rauen vpon Mount Raleigh We found withies also growing like low shrubs flowers like Primroses in the sayd place The coast is very mountainous altogether without wood grasse or earth and is onely huge mountaines of stone but the brauest stone that euer we saw The aire was very moderate in this countrey The 8 we departed from Mount Raleigh coasting along the shoare which lieth Southsouthwest and Eastnortheast The 9 our men fell in dislike of their allowance because it was too small as they thought wherupon we made a new proportion euery messe being fiue to a messe should haue foure pound of bread a day twelue wine quarts of beere six Newland fishes and the flesh dayes a gill of pease more so we restrained them from their butter and cheese The 11 we came to the most Southerly cape of this land which we named The Cape of Gods mercy as being the place of our first entrance for the discouery The weather being very foggy we coasted this North land at length when it brake vp we perceiued that we were shot into a very faire entrance or passage being in some places twenty leagues broad and in sâme thirty altogether void of any pester of ice the weather very tolerable and the water of the very colour nature and quality of the maine ocean which gaue vs the greater hope of our passage Hauing sailed Northwest sixty leagues in this entrance we discouered certaine Islands standing in the midst thereof hauing open passage on both sides Wherupon our ships diuided themselues the one sailing on the North side the other on the South side of the sayd Isles where we stayed fiue dayes hauing the winde at Southeast very foggy and foule weather The 14 we went on shoare and found signes of people for we found stones layed vp together like a wall and saw the skull of a man or a woman The 15 we heard dogs houle on the shoare which we thought had bene wolues and therefore we went on shoare to kill them When we came on land the dogges came presently to our boat very gently yet we thought they came to pray vpon vs and therefore we shot at them and killed two and about the necke of one of them we found a leatherne coller wherupon we thought them to be tame dogs There were twenty dogs like mastiâes with prickt eares and long bush tailes we found a bone in the pizels of their dogs Then we went farther and found two sleads made like ours in England the one was made of firre spruse and oken boords sawen like inch boords the other was made all of whale bone there hung on the tops of the steads three heads of beasts which they had killed We saw here larks rauens and partridges The 17 we went on shoare and in a little thing made like an ouen with stones I found many small trifles as a small canoa made of wood a piece of wood made like an image a bird made of bone beads hauing small holes in one end of them to hang about their necks other small things The coast was very barren without wood or grasse the rocks were very faire like marble full of vaines of diuers colours We found a seale which was killed not long before being fleane and hid vnder stones Our Captaine and Master searched still for probabilities of the passage and first found that this place was all Islands with great sounds passing betweene them Secondly the water remained of one colour with the maine ocean without altering Thirdly we saw to the West of those Isles three or foure whales in askull which they iudged to come from a Westerly sea because to the Eastward we saw not any whale Also as we were rowing into a very great sound lying Southwest froÌ whence these whales came vpon the sudden there came a violent counter-checke of a tide from the Southwest against the flood which we came with not knowing from whence it was mainteined Fiftly in sailing twenty leagues within the mouth of this entrance we had sounding in 90 fadoms faire gray osâe sand and the further we ran into the Westwards the deeper was the water so that hard aboord the shoare among these Isles we could not haue ground in 330 fadoms Lastly it did ebbe and flow sixe or seuen fadome vp and downe the flood comming from diuers parts so as we could not perceiue the chiefe maintenance thereof The 18 and 19 our Captaine and Master
latitude not a little grieued with the losse of the most puissant ship in our fleete after whose departure the Golden Hind succeeded in the place of Uizadmirall and remooued her flagge from the mizon vnto the foretop From Saturday the 15 of Iune vntill the 28 which was vpon a Friday we neuer had faire day without fogge or raine and windes bad much to the West northwest whereby we were driuen Southward vnto 41 degrees scarse About this time of the yere the winds are commonly West towards the Newfound land keeping ordinarily within two points of West to the South or to the North whereby the course thither falleth out to be long and tedious after Iune which in March Apriell May hath bene performed out of England in 22 dayes and lesse We had winde alwayes so scant from West northwest and from West southwest againe that our trauerse was great running South vnto 41 degrees almost and afterward North into 51 degrees Also we were incombred with much fogge and mists in maner palpable in which we could not keepe so well together but were disseuered losing the companie of the Swallow and the Squirrill vpon the 20 day of Iuly whom we met againe at seuerall places vpon the Newfound land coast the third of August as shal be declared in place conuenient Saturday the 27 of Iuly we might descry not farre from vs as it were mountaines of yce driuen vpon the sea being then in 50 degrees which were caried Southward to the weather of vs whereby may be coniectured that some current doth set that way from the North. Before we come to Newfound land about 50 leagues on this side we passe the banke which are high grounds rising within the sea and vnder water yet deepe enough and without danger being commonly not lesse then 25 and 30 fadome water vpon them the same as it were some vaine of mountaines within the sea doe runne along and from the Newfound land beginning Northward about 52 or 53 degrees of latitude do extend into the South infinitly The bredth of this banke is somewhere more and somewhere lesse but we found the same about 10 leagues ouer hauing sounded both on this side thereof and the other toward Newfound land but found no ground with almost 200 fadome of line both before after we had passed the banke The Portugals and French chiefly haue a notable trade of fishing vpon this banke where are sometimes an hundred or more sailes of ships who commonly beginne the fishing in Apriell and haue ended by Iuly That fish is large alwayes wet hauing no land neere to drie and is called Corte fish During the time of fishing a man shall know without sounding when he is vpon the banke by the incredible multitude of sea foule houering ouer the same to pray vpon the offalles garbish of fish throwen out by fishermen and floting vpon the sea Upon Tuesday the 11 of Iune we forsooke the coast of England So againe Tuesday the 30 of Iuly seuen weekes after we got sight of land being immediatly embayed in the Grand bay or some other great bay the certainty whereof we could not iudge so great hase and fogge did hang vpon the coast as neither we might discerne the land well nor take the sunnes height But by our best computation we were then in the 51 degrees of latitude Forsaking this bay and vncomfortable coast nothing appearng vnto vs but hideous rockes and mountaines bare of trees and voide of any greene herbe we followed the coast to the South with weather faire and cleare We had sight of an Iland named Penguin of a foule there breeding in abundance almost incredible which cannot flie their wings not able to carry their body being very large not much lesse then a goose and exceeding fat which the French men vse to take without difficulty vpon that Iland and to barrell them vp with salt But for lingering of time we had made vs there the like prouision Trending this coast we came to the Iland called Baccalaos being not past two leagues from the maine to the South therof lieth Cape S. Francis 5. leagues distant from Baccalaos between which goeth in a great bay by the vulgar sort called the bay of Conception Here we met with the Swallow againe whom we had lost in the fogge and all her men altered into other apparell wherof it seemed their store was so amended that for ioy and congratulation of our meeting they spared not to cast vp into the aire and ouerboord their caps hats in good plenty The Captaine albeit himselfe was very honest and religious yet was he not appointed of men to his humor and desert who for the most part were such as had bene by vs surprised vpon the narrow seas of England being pirats and had taken at that instant certaine Frenchmen laden one barke with wines and another with salt Both which we rescued tooke the man of warre with all her men which was the same ship now called the Swallow following still thâir kind so oft as being separated from the Generall they found opportunitie to robbe and spoile And because Gods iustice did follow the same company euen to destruction and to the ouerthrow also of the Captaine though not consenting to their misdemeanor I will not conceale any thing that maketh to the manifestation and approbation of his iudgements for examples of others perswaded that God more sharpely tooke reuenge vpon them and hath tolerated longer as great outrage in others by how much these went vnder protection of his cause and religion which was then pretended Therefore vpon further enquiry it was knowen how this coÌpany met with a barke returning home after the fishing with his fraight and because the men in the Swallow were very neere scanted of victuall and chiefly of apparell doubtful withall where or when to find and meete with their Admiral they besought the captaine they might go aboord this Newlander only to borrow what might be spared the rather because the same was bound homeward Leaue giuen not without charge to deale fauorably they came aboord the fisherman whoÌ they rifled of tackle sailes cables victuals the men of their apparell not sparing by torture winding cords about their heads to draw out else what they thought good This done with expedition like men skilfull in such mischiefe as they tooke their rocke boat to go aboord their own ship it was ouerwhelmed in the sea and certaine of these men there drowned the rest were preserued euen by those silly soules whom they had before spoyled who saued and deliuered them aboord the Swallow What became afterward of the poore Newlander perhaps destitute of sayles and furniture sufficient to carry them home whither they had not lesse to runne then 700 leagues God alone knoweth who tooke vengeance not long after of the rest that escaped at this instant to reueale the fact and iustifie
but in very deede they are all firme land and if you come on the South and Southwest side you shall see a hill diuided into 2. parts which I called The three hillockes which is right within the hauen And for another better marke of the sayd harbour you shall see an Isle like vnto a Floure de lice distant from the sayd hauen 6. leagues at the least and this Isle and the sayd hauen lie Northeast and Southwest a quarter to the North and South And on the sayd Isle there is good pebble stone to drie fish vpon But to the West thereof there is a very faire countrey and there is a banke of sand which runneth the length of a cable hauing not past one fathom water vpon it From the sayde Isle along the firme land the coast lyeth East and West and you shall see as it were a great forrest running Eastwaâd and the Easterne Cape is called Cape du Chapt and is great and red toward the Sea And betweene the sayd lands you shall see as it were a small Island but it ioyneth to the firme land on the Southwest part and there is good shingle to drie fish on And you must coast the shore with boates and not with ships by reason of the shallowes of the sayd coast For I haue seene without Cape du Chapt in faire weather the ground in two fathoms water neere a league and an halfe from shore and I iudged by reason of the highnesse of the land that there had bene aboue thirtie fathoms water which was nothing so and I haue sounded comming neere the shore in more or lesse depth The coast stretcheth three leagues to the West from Lisle Blanch or the white Isle vnto the entrance of a riuer where we slewe and killed to the number of fifteene hundred Morses or Sea oxen accounting small and great where at full sea you may come on shoare with boates and within are two or three fathoms water From thence the coast trendeth foure leagues to the West ¼ to the Northwest vnto the Isle Hupp which is twentie leagues in circuit and is like the edge of a knife vpon it there is neither wood nor grasse there are Morses vpon it but they bee hard to be taken From thence the coast trendeth to the Northwest and Northnorthwest which is all that I haue seene to wit the two sides and one ende of the Isle And if I had had as good lucke as my Masters when I was on the Northwest side with my shippe I would haue aduenturâd to haue sayled South-southeast to haue discouered the Easterne shoare of the sayd Isle In your returne to the East as you come from the hauen of Cape du Chapt vnto the sayde hauen are sandes and sholds And three good leagues from Cape du Chapt there is a small Island conteining about a league of ground where there is an hauen toward the Southeast and as you enter into the sayd hauen on the starreboord side a dented Cape all of redde land And you cannot enter into the said hauen but with the flood because of a barre which lieth halfe a league without the poynts of the sayd hauen The tydes are there at Southeast and Northwest but when the wind is very great it bloweth much into the hauen at halfe flood But ordinarily it sloweth fiue foote and an halfe The markes to enter into the sayd hauen are to leaue the Isle Blanche or White Island at your comming in on the starreboord and the poynt of âhe hauen towarde the West hath a thick Island which you shall see on the other side and it hath a little round Buttresse which lyeth on the East side of the Island There are also two other buttresses more easie to bee seene then hidden these are not to the East but to the West and they haue markes on âhem Here you shall not haue aboue two fathom and an halfe at a full sea vpon this barre And the sounding is stone and rough ground At your entring in when you shall finde white sand which lyeth next the Southeast of the Cape then you are vpon the barre and bee not afrayd to passe vp the chanell And for markes towarde the West athwart the barre when you haue brought an Island euen which lyeth to the westward without with the thicke part of the high land which lyeth most to the West you shall bee past the barre and the chanell runneth due North. And for your anchoring in the sayd hauen see that you carefully seeke the middest of the sayd Thicke landâ which lyeth in the bottome of the sayd hauen for you must anchor betweene two bankes of sand where the passage is but narrow And you must anker surely for there goeth a great tyde for the Sea runneth there as swiftly and more then in There is good ground and ankorage here and you shall ride in three fathom water And within the sayde hauen there is nothing to hurt you for you are free from all winds And if by chance you should be driuen Westward of the sayd hauen you may seeke an entrance which is right ouer against the small Island named before which is called The Isle of Cormorants and you may enter in theâe as at the other hauen at a full sea And you must passe vp on the West side and you shall finde on the Barre at a full sea foureteene foote water and great depth when you are entred in for the Sea runneth very swiftly in that place and the entrie theâeof lyeth Southeast and Northwest Right ouer against you on the other side you may passe with boates at a full sea And all these entrances make all but one hauen which is good within I sayâ his because I haue passed into the maine Sea by the one and the other passage And the said Isle is not past two leagues ouer in the middest It is but two bankes of sande whereof one is like to that of S. Malo which let the Sea from passing through the middest of all the Isle But the two endes are high mountaines with Islands altogether cut and separated with streames and riuers To anker in the sayd harbour you must not ride farthâr then fiue or sixe cables length from the sayd hauen A letter sent to the right Honorable Sir VVilliam Cecill Lord Burghley Lord high Treasurer of England c. From M. Thomas Iames of Bristoll concerning the discouerie of the Isle of Ramea dated the 14 of September 1591. RIght Honourable my humble duetie to your good Lordship done I thought good humbly to aduertise your honour of the discouery of an Island made by two smal shippes of Saint Malo the one 8 daies past being prised neare Silley by a ship of which I am part owner called the Pleasure sent by this citie to my Lord Thomas Howard for her Maiesties seruice Which prise is sent backe to this Port by those of the sayd
and the Chancewel of London of the burthen of 70 tunnes wherof was M. Steuen Benner bound vnto the riuer of Canada set to sea at the sole and proper charge of Charles Leigh and Abraham Van Herwick of London merchants the saide Charles Leigh himselfe and Steuen Van Herwick brother to the sayd Abraham going themselues in the said ships as chiefe commanders of the voyage departed from Graues-end on Fryday morning the 8 of April 1597. And after some hindrances arriuing at Falmoâth in Cornewal the 28 of the said moneth put to sea againe And with prosperous windes the 18 of May we were vpon the banke of Newfoundland The 19 we lost the Chancewel The 20 we had sight of land and entred within the bay of Assumption where our men contrary to my knowledge fought with a French ship and afterward in the same bay wee met with our conâort Whereupon we presently put to sea againe and the next day we arriued at Caplen bay where we remained by extremitie of foule weather and to mend a pinnes of 7 or 8 tunnes which was giuen vs at Farrillon by M. Wil. Sayer of Dartmouth the Admiral of that place vntill the last of May. On which day departing from thence in the afternoone we put in to Rogneuse to seeke Shallops but could find none The first of Iune we set saile from Rogneuse and the second we put roome to a bay vnder the Northside of Cape Raz being inforced in by an extreme storme The 4 we set saile and this day we saw a great Island of yce The 5 at night we lost the Chancewell in a fog at the mouâh of the bay of Placentia The 11 at Sunne setting we had sight of Cape Briton And the 12 by reason of contrary windes we cast anker vnder the Northeast ende of the Isle of Menego to the North of Cape Briton in 16 fathome reasonable ground In that place we caught great store of Cods which were larger and better fish then any in Newfoundland The 13 wee weyed anker againe and being becalmed about a league from the shore we fell to fishing where the Cods did bite at least 20 fathomes aboue ground and almost as fast as we could hale them into the ship The 14 we came to the 2 Islands of Birds some 23 leagues froÌ Menego where there were such abundance of Birds as is almost incredible to report And vpon the lesse of these Islands of Birds we saw great store of Morsses or sea Oxen which were a sleepe vpon the rockes but when we approched nere vnto them with our boate they cast themselues into the sea and pursued vs with such furie as that we were glad to flee from them The 16 we arriued at Brians Island which lyeth 5 leagues West from the Island of Birds About this Island ther is as great aboundance of cods as in any place can be found In litle more then an houre we caught with 4 hookes 250 of them Here we caught also a great Tuâbut which was an elâe long and a yard broad which was so great that the hooke could not hold her into the ship but when she was aboue water she bent the hooke escaped In this Island we found exceeding good ground both for corne and meadow great store of wood but of smal groweth Springes of fresh water we found none in all the Island but some standing pooles of raine water The same day at night we weyed anker againe The 17 we had stormy weather The 18 we came to the Isle of Ramea where we appointed to meet with our consort And approching neere vnto the harborough of Halabolina we cast anker in 3 fadomes water and sent our great boate into the harborough with the masters mate and some dozen more of the company who when they came in found 4 ships Namely 2 of Saint Malo in Britaigne and two of Sâbâburo adioyning to Saint Iohn de luz being the French Kings subiâcts whom they supposed to haue bene of Spaine and so affirmed vnto vs. Whereupon wee went presently into haâborough âinding but eleuen foote and an halfe of water vpon the barre and a mightie great cuârent in when wee had cast anker we sent presently to speake with the masters of all thâ ships but those onely of Saint Malo came aboord whom wee entertained very friendly and demaunded of whence the other two shippes were They sayde as they thought of Saint Iohn de Luz or Sibiburo Then we presently sent our boate for the Masters of both the sayd shippes to request them to come aboord and to bring with them their Charters parties and other euidences to the ende we might knowe of whence they were At which message one of the sayde Masteâs came aboord with the Pilote and Masters mate of the other shippe whom when we had examined they sayd that they were of Sibiburo and the French Kings subiectes We requested them for our better securitie in the harborough peaceably to deliuer vp their powder and munition promising them that if we found them to be the French Kings subiectes it shoulde be kept in safetie for them without diminishing But they woulde not consent thereunto whereunto we replyed that vnlesse they would consent thereunto we would hold them to be our enemies They not consenting we sent the boate well manned to fetch thâir powder and munition from aboorde their ship but straightly commanded our men not to touch any thing else in the ship vpon their further perill which they promised to performe When they came aboorde the saide ships which were mored together they were resisted by force of armes but quickly they got the victorie which done they fell presently to pillaging of the Baskes contrary to their promise whereupon we sent another to forbidde them but when he came to them none was more ready of pillage then he Whereupon I went my selfe and tooke away from our men whatsoeuer they had pillaged and gaue it againe to the owners onely I sent aboord our owne ship their powder and munition to be kept in safetie vntil we knew farther what they were When I had done I gaue the Baskes possâssion of their shippe againe and tolde them they should not loose the valewe of one peny if they were the French Kings of subiects Then I caryed away all our men and also tooke with me two or three of the chiefest of them and when I came aboord went to examining of them and by circumstances found one of the ships to belong to France whereupon I tolde the master of the âaid ship that I was throughly satisfied that he was of France and so diâmissed him in peace Of the other ship we had great presumption that she was of Spaine but had nâ certaine proofe thereof wherefore wee dismissed them likewise in peace After I had thus dismissed them our ships company fell into a mutiny and more then half of them resolued to cary one of those ships away But they weâe
order to our chyrurgion to dresse the wounded men one of which was wounded vnto death That done we had then time to view our prize which we found of great defence and a notable strong ship almost two hundred tun in burden very well appointed and in all things fitted for a man of warre They had also foureteene or fifteene men more which were then absent from the ship otherwise we should haue had the hoter fight The same day we got our sailes to the yard and our top masts on end and rigged the shippe what we could The 26 day we got some oile aboord and there we taried vntill the second of August fitting our selues for the sea and getting fish aboord as weather serued vs. During our ââode there we diuided our men and appointed to ech ship their company my selfe and my friends being resolued to take our passage in the prize wherein when we were shipped and the company there arose great enmity against vs by the other shippe which afterward was quieted The second day of August hauing taken in water and wood we put to sea from that harborow in company of the Hopewell with puâpose to go directly to Parlican which is an harborow in the North part of Newfoundland where we eâpected another prize But when we came to sea we found our sailes so olâe our ropes so rotten and our prouision of bread and drinke so short as that we were constrained to make our resolution directly for England whereupon we drew out our reasons the fourth day of August and sent them aboord the Hopewell to certifie them the cause of our resolution for England wherat they were generally offended thinking and saying that we in the prize went about to cousin and deceiue them To conclude they sent vs word that they would keepe vs company for England But I had giuen William Crafton commission before to go for the Islands of the Açores and there to spend his victuals for a man of warre The next day being the fift of August hauing a faire winde we put off from the coast of Newfoundland and kept our course directly for England the Hopewell keeping vs company vntill midâay whenas hauâng lost vs in a fogge she shot off two pieces of ordinance and we answered her with three afterwarde wâ spake not with her supposing that she went for the Islands The 27 of August drawing neere the coast of England we sounded and found ground at seuenty fadoms Some of the mariners thinking we were in Bristow channell and other in Silly channell so that through variety of iudgements ând euill marinership we were fame to dance the hay foure dayes together sometimes running to the Northeast sometimes to the Southeast then againe to the East and Eastnortheast Thus did we spend faire winds and lose our time vntill the last of August And then it pleased God that we fell with the Island of Lundy within the channell of Bristoll from whence we sâayed our course and aftâr diuers dangers the third of September we mât with the Tramontane of the Queene off of Dartmouth to the captaine whereof we gaue certaine things that he had need of The fift of Septeââer I landed on the outside of the Isle of Wight and within few dayes after it pleased God to bring the ship in safety to London where she was made prize as beloâging to the enemies of this land Certaine obseruations touching the countreys and places where we trauelled THe Newfoundland we found very subiect to fogs and mists The ground of it is very rocky and vpon it there is great store of firce trees and in some places red and abouâ the shore it hath great abundance of cod-fish We were on land in it in foure seuerall places 1 At Caplin bay and Farrillon 2 At Cape Rase 3 At the harborow of Lano which lieth foure leagues to the West beyond Cape Laurence 4 At S. Marie port The Island of Menego for the soile is much like Newfoundland but the fish about it as also thorowout the Grande Bay within Cape Briton is much larger and better then that of the Newfoundland This Island is scant two leagues long and very narrow In the midst of it a great way within the wood is a great poole Here we were thrise on shore once at the East side and twise at the West The three Islands of birds are sandy red but with the multitude of birds vpon them they looke white The birds sit there as thicke as stones lie in a paued street The greatest âf the Islands is about a mile in compasse The second is little lesse The third is a very little one like a small rocke At the second of these three lay on the shore in the Sunshine about thirty or forty sea-oxen or morses which when our boat came nere them presently made into the sea and swam after the boat Brions Island wee found to be very good and sandy ground It hath in it store of firre trees It is somewhat more then a league long and about three leagues in compasse Here we were on land once and went from the one side of it to the other The Island of Ramea we tooke to be like ground as Brions Island hauing also abundance of firre trees It seemeth to be in length about twelue or thirteene leagues at least We were there in harborow but not on shore which we much desired and hoped to haue bene but the conflict which we had there with the Basks and Britons mentioned before preuented vs. The Isle Blanche likewise seemeth in quality of the ground and bignesse of it to be much like Brions Island aforesayd but somewhat lesse We were not on shore vpon it but rode before it at anker The land of Cape Briton we found to be somewhat like the Newfoundland but rather better Here toward the West end of it we saw the clouds lie lower then the hils as we did also at Cape Laurence in Newfoundland The Easterly end of the land of Cape Briton is nothing so high land as the West We went on shore vpon it in fiue places 1 At the bay where the Chancewell was cast away 2 At Cibo 3 At a little Island betweene Cibo and the New port 4 At the New port And 5 at Port Ingles or the English port Concerning the nature and fruitfulnesse of Brions Island Isle Blanche and of Ramea they do by nature yeeld exceeding plenty of wood great store of wild corne like barley sârawberries gooseberries mulberies white roses and store of wilde peason Also about the sayd Islands the sea yeeldeth great abundance of fish of diuers sorts And the sayd Islands also seeme to proffer through the labour of man plenty of all kinde of our graine of roots of hempe and other necessary commodities Charles Leigh CERTAINE VOYAGES CONTAINING THE Discouerie of the Gulfe of Sainct Laurence to the West of Newfoundland and from thence vp the riuer of Canada to Hochelaga Saguenay and other places with a
description of the temperature of the climate the disposition of the people the nature commodities and riches of the soile and other matters of speciall moment The first relation of Iaques Carthier of S. Malo of the new land called New France newly discouered in the yere of our Lord 1534. How M. Iaques Carthier departed from the Port of S. Malo with two ships and came to Newfoundland and how he entred into the Poât of Buona Vista AFter that Sir Charles of Mouy knight lord of Meylleraye Uiceadmirall of France had caused the Captaines Masters and Mariners of the shippes to be sworne to behaue themselues truely and faithfully in the seruice of the most Christian King of France vnder the charge of the sayd Carthier vpon the twentieth day of April 1534 we dearted from the Port of S. Malo with two ships of threescore tun apiece burden and 61 well appointed men in ech one and with such prosperous weather we sailed onwards that vpon the tenth day of May we came to Newfoundland where we entred into the Cape of Buona Vista which is in latitude 48 degrees and a halfe and in longitude * But because of the great store of the ice that was alongst the sayd land we were constrained to enter into an hauen called S. Katherins hauen distant from the other Port about fiue leagues toward Southsoutheast there did we stay tenne dayes looking for faire weather and in the meane while we mended and dressed our boats How we âame to the Island of Birds and of the greaâ quantity of biâds that there be VPon the 2â of May the winde being in the West we hoised saiâe and sailed toward North and by East from the cape of Buona Vista vntil we came to the Iââand of Birds which was enuironed about with a banke of ice but broken and cracke notwithstanding the sayd banke our two boats went thither to take in some birdsâ whereof there is such plenty that vnlesse a man did see them he would tâinke it an incredible thing for albeit the Island which containeth about a âeague in circuit be so full of them that they seeme to hauâ bene brought thither ând sewed for the nonâe yet are there an hundred folde as many houering âbout it as within some of the which are as big as âayes blacke and white with beaks like vnto crowes they lie alwayes vpon the sea they cannot flie very high because their wings are so little and no bigger then halfe ones hand yet do they âlie as swifâly as any birds of the aire leuell to the water they are also exceeding fat we named them Aporathâ In lesse then halfe an houre we filled two boats full of them as if they had bene with stones so that besides them which we did eat fresh âuery ship did powder and salt fiue or siâe barrels full of them Of two soâts of birds the one called Godeââ the oâher Margaââx and how we came to Carpânt BEsides these there is another kinde of birds which hoâââ in the aire and ouer the sea lesser then the others and these doe all gather themselues together in the Island and put themselues vnder the wings of other birds that are greater these we named Godetz There are also of another sort but bigger and whitâ which bite euen as dogs those we named Margaulx And albeit the sayd Islaâd be 14 leagues from the maine land notwithstandingâ eares come swimming thither to eat of the sayd birdsâ and our men found one there as great as any cow and as white as any swan who nâtheir presence leaââ into the sea and vpon Whitsuââ unday following our voyage toward the land we met her by the way swimming toward land as swifâly as we could saile So soone as we saw her we pursued her withouâ boats and by maine strength tooke her wâose flesh was as good to be eaten as the flesh of a calfe of tâo yeres olde The Wednesday following being the 27 of the moneth we came âo the entrance of the bay of thâ Castle but because the weather was ill and the great store of ice we found we were constrained to enter into an harborow about the sayd entrance called Carpunt where because we could not come out of it we stayed til the ninth of Iune what time we departed hoping with the helpe of God to saile further then the sayd Carpunt which is in latitude 51 degrees The description of Newfoundland from Cape Razo to Cape Degrad THe land from Cape Razo to Cape Degrad which is the point of the entrance of the bay that trendeth from head to head toward Northnortheast and Southsouthwest All this part of land is parted into Islands one so nere the other that there are but small riuers betweene them thorow the which you may passe with little boats and therefore there are certaine good harborows among which are those of Carpunt and Degrad In one of these Islands that is the highest of them all being the top of it you may plainly see the âwo low Islands that are nere to Cape Razo from whence to the port of Carpunt they count it fiue and twenty leagues and there are two entrances theâ eat one on the East the other on the South side of the Island But you must take heed of the side â point of the East because that euery where there is nothing els but shelues and âhe water is very shallow you must go about the Island toward the West the length of halfe a cable or thereabout and then âo goe toward the South to the sayd Carpunt Also you are âo take heed of ââree shelues that are in the chanell vnder the water and toward the Island on the East side in the chanell the water is of three or foure fadome deepe and cleere ground The other trendeth toward Eastnortheast and on the West you may go on shore Of the Island which âow is called S. Katherins island GOing from the point Degradâ and entring into the sayd bay toward the West by North there is some doubt of two Islands that are on the right side one of the which is distant from the sayd point three leagues and the other seuen either more or lesse then the first being a low and plaine land and it seemeth to be part of the maine land I named it Saint Katherines Island in which toward the Northeast there is very dry soile but aâout a quarter of a lââgue from it very ill ground so that you must go a little about The sayd â stand the Port of Casââes trend toward North northeast and South southwest and they are about 25. ãâã asunder From the said port of Castles to the port of Gutte which is in the northerne part of the said Bay that trendeth toward East northeast and West southwest there are 12. leagues and an halfe and about two leagues from the port of âalances that is to say the third paât athware the saide Bay
Hilles of Granges and a Cape lying toward the Southwest about 3 leagues from from vs. The said Cape is on the top of it blunt-pointed and also toward the Sea it endeth in a point wherefore wee named it The pointed Cape on the North side of which there is a plaine Iland And because we would haue notice of the said entrance to see if there were any good hauens we strooke saile for that night The next day being the 17 of the moneth we had stormie weather from Northeast wherefore we tooke our way toward the Southwest vntill thursday morning and we went about 37 leagues till wee came athwart a Bay full of round Ilands like doue houses and therefore wee named them The doue houses And from the Bay of S. Iulian from the which to a Cape that lieth South and by West which wee called Cape Roial there are 7. leagues and toward the West southwest side of the saide Cape there is another that beneath is all craggie and aboue round On the North side of which about halfe a league there lieth a low Iland that Cape we named The Cape of milke Betweene these two Capes there are certaine low Ilands aboue which there are also certaine others that shew that there be some riuers About two leagues from Cape royall wee sounded and found 20 fadome water and there is the greatest fishing of Cods that possible may be for staying for our company in lesse then an houre we tooke aboue an hundred of them Of certaine Ilands that lie betweene Cape Royal and The Cape of milke THe next day being the 18 of the moneth the winde with such rage turned against vs that wâ were constrained to go backe toward Cape Royal thinking there to finde some harborough and with our boates went to discouer betweene the Cape Royal and the Cape of Milke and found that aboue the low Ilands there is a great and very deepe gulfe within which are certaine Ilands The said gulfe on the Southside is shut vp The foresaid low grounds are on one of the sides of the entrance and Cape Royal is on the other The saide low grounds doe stretch themselues more then halfe a league within the Sea It is a plaine countrey but an ill soile and in the middest of the entrance thereof there is an Iland The saide gulfe in latitude is fourtie eight degrees and an halfe and in longitude * That night we found no harborough and therefore wee lanched out into the Sea leauing the Cape toward the West Of the Iland called S. Iohn FRom the said day vntill the 24 of the moneth being S. Iohns day we had both stormie weather and winde against vs with such darkenesse and mistes that vntill S. Iohns day we could haue no sight of any land and then had we sight of a Cape of land that from Cape Royal lieth Southwest about 35 leagues but that day was so foggie and mistie that we could not come neere land and because it was S. Iohns day we named it Cape S. Iohn Of certaine Ilands called the Ilands of Margaulx and of the kinds of beasts and birds that there are found Of the Iland of Brion and Cape Dolphin THe next day being the 25. of the moneth the weather was also stormie darke and windy but yet we sailed a part of the day toward West North west and in the euening wee put our selues athwart vntill the second quarter when as we departed then did we by our compasse know that we were Northwest by West about seuen leagues and an halfe from the Cape of S. Iohn and as wee were about to hoise saile the winde turned into the Northwest wherefore wee went Southeast about 15. leagues and came to three Ilands two of which are as steepe and vpright as any wall so that it was not possible to climbe them and betweene them there is a little rocke These Ilands were as full of birds as any field or medoââ is of grasse which there do make their nestes and in the greatest of them there was a great and infinite number of those that wee call Margaulx that are white and bigger then any geese which were seuered in one part In the other were onely Godetz but towarâ the shoare there were of those Godeâz and great Apponatz like to those of that Iland that we aboue haue mentioned we went downe to the lowest part of the least Iland where we killed aboue a thousand of those Godetz and Apponatz We put into our boates so many of them as we pleased for in lesse then one houre we might hauâ filled thirtie such boats of them we named them The Ilands of Margaulx About fiue leaguâs froÌ the said Ilands on the West there is another Iland that is about two leagues in length and so much in breadâh there did we stay all night to take in water and wood That Iland is enuirâned round about with sand and hath a very good road about it three or foure fadome deepe Those Ilands haue the best soile that euer we saw for that one of their fields is more worth thân all the New land We found it all full of goodly trees medowesâ fields full of wild corne and peason bloomed as thick as ranke and as faire as any can be seene in Britaine so that they seemed to haue bene plowed and sowed There was also great store of gooseberies strawberies damaske roses parselây with other very sweete and pleasant hearbes About the said Iland are very great beastes as great âs oxen which haue two great teeth in their mouths like vnto Elephants teeth liue also in the Sea We saw one of them sleeping vpon the banke of the water wee thinking to take it went to it with our boates but so soone as he heard vs he cast himselfe into the Sea We also saw beares âolues we named it Brions Iland About it toward Southeast and Northwest there are great lakes As farre as I could gather and comprehend I thinke that there be some passage betweene New found land and Brions land If so it were it would be a great shortâing aswel of the time as of the way if any perfecâion could be found in it About foure leagues from that Iland toward WestSouthwest is the firme land which seemeth to be as an Iland compassed about with litle Ilands of sands There is a goodly Cape which we named Cape Dolphin for there is the beginning of good grounds On the 27. of Iune we compassed the said lands about that lie West Southwest and a farre off thây seeme to be little hillâs of sand for they are but low landes wee could neither goe to them nor land on them because the winde was against vs. That day we went 15. leagues Of the Iland called Alexai and of the cape of S. Peter THe next day we went along the said land about 10. leagues till we came to a Cape of redde land that is all craggie within the which
gotten and that stormes and tempests began to reigne in New-found land and that we were so farre from home not knowing the perils and dangers that were behind for either we must agree to returne home againe or els to stay there all the yeere Moreouer we did consider that if the Northerne winds did take vs it were not possible for vs to depart thence All which opinions being heard and considered we altogether determined to addresse our seluâs homeward Nowe because vpon Saint Peters day wee entred into the sayd Streite wee named it Saint Peters Streite Wee sounded it in many places in some wee found 150 fadome water in some 100 and neere the shoare sirtie and cleere ground From that day till Wednesday following we had a good and prosperous gale of winde so that we trended the said North shore East Southeast West Northwest for such is the situation of it except one Cape of low lands that bendeth more toward the Southeast about twenty fiue leagues from the Streight In this place we saw certaine smokes that the people of the countrey made vpon the sayd cape but because the wind blewe vs toward the coast we went not to them which when they saw they came with two boates and twelue men vnto vs and as freely came vnto our ships as if they had bene French men and gaue vs to vnderstand that they came from the great gulfe and that Tiennot was their Captaine who then was vpon that Cape making signes vnto vs that they were going home to their Countreys whence we were come with our ships and that they were laden with Fish We named the sayd Cape Cape Tiennot From the said Cape all the land trendeth Eastsoutheast and Westnorthwest All these lands lie low very pleasant enuironed with sand where the sea is entermingled with marishes and shallowes the space of twentie leagues then doth the land begin to trend from West to Eastnortheast altogether enuironed with Islands two or three leagues from land in which as farre as we could see are many dangerous shelues more then foure or fiue leagues from land How that vpon the ninth of August wee entred within White Sands and vpon the fift of September we came to the port of S. Malo FRom the sayd Wednesday vntill Saturday following we had a great wind from the Southwest which caused vs to run Eastnortheast on which day we came to the Easterly partes of Newfouâdland between the Granges and the Double Cape There began great stormie winds comming froÌ the East with great rage wherfore we coasted the Cape Northnorthwest to search the Northerne part which is as we haue sayd all enuironed with Islands and being neere the said Islands and land the wind âurned into the South which brought vs within the sayd gulfe so that the next day being the 9 of August we by the grace of God entred within the White Sands And this is so much as we haue discouered After that vpon the 15 of August being the feast of the Assumption of our Lady after that we had heard seruice we altogether departed from the porte of White Sands and with a happy and prosperous weather we came into the middle of the sea that is between Newfound land and Britanie in which place we were tost and âurmoyled three dayes long with great stormes and windy tempests comming from the East which with the ayde and assistance of God we suffred then had we faire weather and vpon the fift of September in the sayd yere we came to the port of S. Malo whence we departed The language that is spoken in the Land newly discouered called New France God the Sunne Isnez the Heauen camet the Day the Night aiagla Water amâ Sand estogaz a Saylâ aganie the Heaâ agonaze the Throate conguedo the Nose hehonguesto the Teeth hesangue the Nayles agetascu the Feete ochedasco the Legs anondasco a dead man amocdaza a Skinne aionasca that Man yca a Harchet asogne a Cod fish gadagoursere good to be eateâ guesande Flesh Almonds anougaza Figâ asconda Gold benyosco the priuie members assegnega an Arrow cacta a greene Tree haueda an earthen dish vndaâo a Bow Brasse aignetaze the Brow ansce a Feather yco the Moone casmogan the Earth conda the Wind canut the Raine onnoscon Bread cacacomy the Sea amet a Ship casaomy a Man vndo the Haires hoc hosco the Eyes âgata the Mouth hechâ the Eares hontasco the Armes ageseu a Woman enraseseo a sicke Man alonedeche Shooes atta a skinne to couer a mans priuy meÌbers ouscozon vondico red cloth cahoneta a Knife agoheda a Mackrell agedoneta Nuttes caheya Apples honesta Beanes sahe a Sword achesco A shorte and briefe narration of the Nauigation made by the commandement of the King of France to the Islands of Canada Hochelaga Saguenay and diuers others which now are called New France with the particular customes and maners of the inhabitants therein Chap. 1. IN the yeere of our Lord 1535 vpon Whitsunday being the 16 of May by the commandement of our Captaine Iames Cartier and with a common accord in the Cathedrall Church of S. Malo we deuoutly each one confessed our selues and receiued the Sacrament and all entring into the Quier of the sayd Church wee presented our selues before the Reuerend Father in Christ the Lord Bishop of S. Malo who blessed vs all being in his Bishops roabes The Wednesday following being the 19 of May there arose a good gale of wind and therefore we hoysed sayle with three ships that is to say tâe great Hermina being in burden about a hundreth or a hundreth and twânty tunne wherin the foresaid Captaine Iames Cartier was Generall and master Thomas Frosmont chiefe Master accompanied with master Claudius de Pont Briand sonne to the Lorde of Montâeuell and Cup-bearer to the Dolphin of France Charles of Pomeraies Iohn Powler and other Gentlemen In the second ship called the little Hermina being of three score tunne burden were Captaines vnder the sayd Cartier Mace Salobert and master William Marie In the third ship called the Hermerillon being of forty tunne iu burden were Captains M. William Britton anâ M. Iames Maingare So we sayled with a good and prosperous wind vntill the 20 of the said moneth at which time the weather turned into stormes and tempests the which with contrary winds and darkenesse endured so long that our ships being without any rest suffered as much as any ships that euer went on seas so that the 25 of Iune by reason of that foule and foggie weather all our ships lost sight one of another againe till wee came to Newfound land where we had appointed to meete After we had lost one another wee in the Generals ship were with contrary windes tost to and fro on the sea vntill the seuenth of Iuly vpon which day we arriued in Newefound land and came to the Island called The Island of Birds which lyeth from the maine land 14 leagues
This Island is so full of birds that all our ships might easily haue bene fraighted with them yet for the great number that there is it would not seeme that any were taken away We to victuall our selues filled two boats of them This Island hath the Pole eleuated 49 degrees and 40 minutes Upon the eight of the sayd moneth we sailed further with a prosperous weather came to the Port called The Port of white sands that is in the Bay called The Bay of Castelâ where we had purposed to meete stay together the 15 of the said moneth In this place theâefore we looked for our fellowes that is to say the other two ships till the 26 of the moneth on which day both came together So soone as our fellowes were come we set our ships in a readines taking in both water wood other necessaries And then on the 29 of the sayd moneth early in the morning we hoised saile to passe on further sayling along the Northerne coast that runneth Northeast and Southwest til two houres after Sun-set or thereabouts then we crossed along two Islands which doe stretch further foorth then the others which we called S. Williams Islands being distant about 20 leagues or more from the Port of Brest All the coast from the Castels to that place lieth East West Northeast Southwest hauing betweene it sundry little Islands altogether barren and full of stones without either earth or trees except certain valleyâ only The next day being the 30 of Iuly we sailed on Westward to find out other Islands which as yet we had not found 12 leagues and a halfe among which there is a great Bay toward the North all full of Islands and great creekes where many good harboroughs seeme to be them we named S. Marthas Islands from which about a league and a halfe further into the sea there is a dangerous shallow wherein are fiue rockes which lie from Saint Marthas Islands about seuen leagues as you passe into the sayd Islands on the East on the West side to which we came the sayd day an houre after noone from that houre vntill midnight we sailed about fifteene leagues âthwart a cape of the lower Islands which we named S. Germans Islands Southeastward from which place about three leagues there is a very dangerous shallow Likewise betweene S. Germans cape and Saint Marthas about two leagues from the sayd Islands there lyeth a banke of sand vpon which banke the water is but foure fadome deepe and therefore seeing the danger of the coast we strucke saile and went no further that night The next day being the last of Iuly we went all along the coast that runneth East and West and somewhat Southeasterly which is all enuironed about with Islands and drie sands and in trueth is very dangerous The length from S. Germans Cape to the said Islands is about 17 leagues and a halfe at the end of which there is a goodly plot of ground full of huge and high trees albeit the rest of the coast be compassed about with sands without any signe or shew of harboroughs till we came to Cape Thiennot which treÌdeth Northwest about seuen leagues from the foresaid Islands which Cape Thiennot we noted in our former voyage and therefore we sailed on all that night West and Westnorthwest till it was day and then the wind turned against vs wherefore we went to seeke a hauen wherein we might harbour our ships and by good hap found one fit for our purpose about seuen leagues and a halfe beyond Cape Thiennot that we named S. Nicholas Hauen it lieth amidst 4 Islands that stretch into the sea Upon the neerest wee for a token set vp a woodden crosse But note by the way that this crosse must be brought Northeast then bending toward it leaue it on the left hand and you shall find sixe fadome water and within the hauen foure Also you are to take heede of two shelues that leane outward halfe a league All this coast is full of shoulds and very dangerous albeât in sight many good hauens seeme to be there yet is there nought else but shelues and sands We staied and rested our selues in the sayd hauen vntill the seuenth of August being Sonday on which day we hoysed sayle and came toward land on the South side toward Cape Rabast distaât from the sayd hauen about twentie leagues Northnortheast and Southsouthwest but the next day there rose a stormie and a contrary winde and because we could find no hauen there toward the South thence we went coasting along toward the North beyond the aboue sayd hauen about ten leagues where we found a goodly great gulfe full of Islands passages and entrances toward what wind so euer you please to bend for the knowledge of this gulfe there is a great Island that is like to a Cape of lande stretching somewhat further foorth than the others and about two leagues within the land there is an hill fashioned as it were an heape of corne We named the sayd gulfe Saint Laurence his bay The twelfth of the sayd moneth wee went from the sayd Saint Laurence his Bay or gulfe sayling Westward and discouered a Cape of land toward the South that runneth West and by South distant from the sayd Saint Laurence his Bay about fiue and twenty leagues And of the two wilde men which wee tooke in our former voyage it was tolde vs that this was part of the Southerne coaste that there was an Island on the Southerly parte of which is the way to goe from Honguedo where the yeere before we had taken them to Canada and that two dayes iourney from the sayd Cape and Island began the Kingdome of Saguenay on the North shore extending toward Canada and about three leagues athwart the sayd Cape there is aboue a hundreth fadome water Moreouer I beleeue that there were neuer so many Whâles seen as wee saw that day about the sayd Cape The next day after being our Ladie day of August the fifteenth of the moneth hauing passed the Straight we had notice of certaine lands that wee left toward the South which landes are full very great and high hilles and this Cape wee named The Island of the Assumption and one Cape of the said high countreys lyeth Eastnortheast and Westsouthwest the distance betweene which is about fiue and twenty leagues The Countreys lying North may plainely be perceiued to be higher then the Southerly more then thirty leagues in length We trended the sayd landes about toward the South from the sayd day vntill Tewesday noone following the winde came West and therefore wee bended toward the North purposing to goe and see the land that we before had spâed Being arriued there we found the sayd landes as it were ioyned together and low toward the Sea And the Northerly mountaines that are vpon the sayd low lands stretch East and West and
a quarter of the South Our wild men told vs that there was the beginning of Saguenay and that it was land inhabited and that thence commeth the red Copper of them named Caignetdaze There is betweene the Southerly lands and the Northerly about thirtie leagues distance and more then two âundreth fadome depth The sayd men did moreouer certifie vnto vs that there was the way and beginning of the great riuer of Hochelaga and ready way to Canada which riuer the further it went the narrower it came euen vnto Canada and that then there was fresh water which went so farre vpwards that they had neuer heard of any man who had gone to the head of it and that there is no other passage but with small boates Our Captaine hearing their talke and how they did affââme no other passage to be there would not at that time proceede any further till he had seâne and noted the other lands coast toward the North which he had omitted to see from S. Laurence his gulfe because he would know if between the lands toward the North any passage might be discouered How our Captaine caused the ships to returne backe againe only to know if in Saint Laurence gulfe there were any passage toward the North. Chap. 2. VPon the 18 of August being Wednesday our Captaine caused his shippes âo wind backe and bend toward the other shore so that we trended the said Northerly cost which runneth Northeast and Southwest being fashioned like vnto halfe a bowe and is a very highland but yet not so high as that on the South parts The Thursday following we came to seuen very high Islands which we named The round Islânds These Islands are distant from the South shore about 40 leagues and stretch out into the sea about 3 or 4 leagues Against these there are goodly low grounds to be seene full of goodly trees which we the Friday following wââh our boats coÌpassed about Ouerth wart these lands there are diuers sandy shelues more then two leagues into the sea very dangerous which at a low water remaine almost dry At tâe fuââhest bounds of these lowe lands that containe about ten leagues there is a riuer of freââ water that with such swiftnesse runneth into the sea that for the space of one lââgue witâin it tâe water is as fresh as any fountaine water We with our boates entred into the sayd riuer at the entrance of which we âound about one fadome a halfe of water There are in this riuer many fishes shaped like horses which as our wild men told vs alâ the day long lie in the water and the night on land of which we saw therin a great number The next day being the 21 of the moneth by breake of day we hoysed saile and sailed so long along the said coast that we had sight of the rest of the sayd Northârne coast which as yet we had not seâne and of the Island of the Assumption which wee went to disâouer departing from the sayd land which thing so soone as we had done that we were certified no other passage to be there we came to our ships againe which we had left at the said Islands where is a good harborough the water being about nine or ten fadome In the same place by occasion of contrary winds foggie mists we were constrained to stay not being either able to come out of it or hoise saile till the 24 of the moneth On which day we departed came to a hâuen on the Southerly coast about 80 leagues from the said Islands This hauen is ouâr against three flat Islands that lie amidst the râuer because on the midway betweene those Islands the sayd hauen toward the North there is a very great riuer that runneth betweene the high and low landes and more then three leagues into the sea it hath many shelues there is not altogether two fadome water so that the place is very dangerous and neere vnto the said shelues there is either sixteene or 20 fadomes from shore to shore All the Northerly coaste runneth Northeast and by North and Southwest by South The said hauen wherin we stayed on the South side is as it were but a sâuce of the waters that rise by the flood but of smal accompt we named them S. Iohns Islets because we found them entred into them the day of the beheading of that Saint And before you come to the said hauen there is an Island lying Eastward about 5 leagues distant from the same betweânâ which and the land there is no passage sauing only for smal boats The haueâ of S. Iohns Islets dryâth vp all the waters that rise by flowing although they flow two fadome at the least The best place to harborough ships therein is on the South part of a liâtle Island that is ouer against the said hauen whereby the bancke or shore of the Island riseth Upon the sirst of September we departed out of the said hauen purposing to go toward Canada about 15 leagues from it toward the West Westsouthwest amidst the riuer there are three Islands ouer against the which there is a riuer which runneth swift and is of a great depth it is that which leadeth and runneth into the countrey and kingdome of Saguenay as by the two wild men of Canada it was told vs. This riuer passeth and runneth along very high and steepe hils of bare stone where very little earth is notwithstanding there is great quantity of âundry sorts of trees that grow in the said bare stones euen as vpon good fertile ground in such sort that we haue seene some so great as wel would suffise to make a mast for a ship of 30 âunne burden and as greene as possibly can be growing in a stony rocke without any earth at all At the entrance of the sayd riuer we met with 4 boats ful of wild meâ which as far as we could perceiue very fearfully came toward vs so that some of them went backe againe the other came as neere vs as easily they might he are vnderstand one of our wild men who told them his name and then tooke acquaintance of them vpon whose word they came to vs. The next day being the 2 of September we came out of the sayd riuer to go to Canada and by reason of the seas flowing the tide was very swift and dangerâus for that on the South part of it there lie two Islands about which more then three leagues comâasse lie many rocks and great stones but two fadome water and the flowing amidst those Islands is very vnconstant and doubtful so that if it had not bene for our boats we had been in great danger to lose our Pinnesse coasting along the said drie sands there is more then 30 sadom waâer About fiue leagues beyond the riuer of Saguenay Southwest there is another Iland on
the Northside wherein are certaine high lands and thereabouts we thought to haue cast anker on purpose to stay the next tide but we could sound no ground in a 120 fadome within a flight shoââ from shore so that we were constrained to winde backe to the said Iland where wee sounded againe and found 35 fadome The next morning we hoysed saile and went thence sayling further on where we had notice of a certaine kind of fish neuer before of any man seene or knowen They are about the bignesse of a Porpose yet nothing like them of body very well proportioned headed like Grayhounds altogither as white as snow without any spot within which riuer there is great quantitie of them they doe liue altogither betweene the Sea and the fresh water These people of the Countrey call them Adhothuys they tolde vs that they be very sauory and good to be eaten Moreouer they affirme noâe to be found elsewhere but in the mouth of that riuer The sixth of the month the weather being calme and faire we went about 15 leaguâs more vpward into the riuer and there lighted on an Iland that looketh Northward and it maketh a little haueâ or creeke wherein are many and innumerable great Tortoyzes continually lying about that Iland There are likewise great quantitie of the said Adhothuys taken by the inhabitours of the countrey and there is as great a current in that place as is at Bordeux in France at euery tide This Iland is in length about three leagues and in bredth two and is a goodly and fertile plot of ground replenished with many goodly and great trees of many sorts Among the rest therâ are many Filberd-trees which we found hanging full of thâm somewhat bigger and better in sauour then ours but somewhat harder and therefore we called it The Iland of Filberds The seuenth of the moneth being our Ladies euen after seruice we went from that Iland to goe vp higher into the riuer and came to 14 Ilands seuen or eight leagues from the Iland of Filberds where the countrey of Canada beginnethâ one of which Ilands is ten leagues in length and fiue in bredth greatly inhabited of such men as onely liue by fishing of such sorts oâ fishes as the riuer affordeth according to the season of them After we had cast anker betwene the said great Iland the Northerly coast we went on land and tooke our two wild men with vs meeting with many of those countrey people who would not at all approch vnto vs but rather fled from vs vntill our two men began to speake vnto them telling them that they were Taignoagny and Domagaia who so soone as they had taken acquaintance of them beganne greatly to reioyce dancing and shewing many sorts of ceremonies and many of the chiefest of them came to our boats broughâ many Eeles and other sorts of fishes with two or three burdens of great Millet where with they make their bread and many great muske millious The same day came also many other boâtes sull of those countreymen and weomen to see and take acquaintance of our two men all which âere as courteously receiued and friendly entertained of our Captaine as possibly could be And to haue them the better acquainted with him and make them his friends hee gaue them many small gifts but of small value neuerthelesse they were greatly contented with them The nexâ day following the Lord of Canada whose proper name was Donnacona but by the name of Lord they call him Agouhanna with âwelue boats came to our ships accompanied with many people who causing ten of his boates to goe backe with the other two approched vnto vs âiâh sixteene men Then beganne the said Agouhanna ouer against the smallest of our ships according to their maner and fashion to frame a long Oration moouing all his bodie and members after a strange fashion which thing is a ceremonie and signe of gladnesse and securitie among them and then comming to the Generals ship where Taignoagny and Domagaia were he spake with them they with him where they began to tell and shew vnto him what they had seene in Franceâ and what good entertainement they had had hearing which things the said Lord seemed to be very glad thereof and prayed our Captaine to reach him his arme that he might kisse it which thing he did their Lord taking it laid it about his necke for so they vse to doe when they wilâ make much of one Then our Captaine entred into Agouhannas boat causing bread and wâne to be brought to make the said Lord and his companie to eate and drinke which thing they did and were greatly thereby contented and satisfied Our Captaine for that time gaue them nothingâ because he looked for a fitter opportunity These things being done ech one tooke leaue of othârs and the said Lord went with his boats againe to his place of adobe Our Captaine then causââ our boates to be set in order that with the next tide he might goe vp higher into the riuer to find some safe harborough for our ships and we passed vp the riuer against the streame about tenne leagues coasting the said Iland at the end whereof we found a goodly and pleasant sound where is a little riuer and hauen where by reason of the flood there is about three fadome waâer Tâis place seemed to vs very fit and commodious to harbour our ships therein and so we did verâ safâly we named it the holy Crosse for on that day we came thither Neere vnto it there is a village whereof Donnacona is Lord and there he keepeth his abode it is called Stadacona as goodly a plot of ground as possibly may be seene and there withall very fruitfull full of goodly trees euen as in France as Okes Elmes Ashes Walnut trees Maple tres Cydrons Uines and white Thornes that bring foorth fruit as bigge as any damsons and many other sortes of trees vnder which groweth as faire tall hempe as any in France without any seede or any mans worke or labour at all Hauing considered the place and finding it fit for our purpose our Captaine withdrew himselfe on purpose to returne to our ships but behold as we were comming out of the riuer we met comming against vs one of the Lords of the said village of Stadacona accompanied with many others as men weamen and children who after the fashion of their countrey in signe of mirth and ioy began to make a long Oration the women still singing and dancing vp to the knees in water Our Captaine knowing their good will and kindnesse toward vs caused the boat wherein they were to come vnto him and gaue them certaine trifles as kniues and beades of glasse whereat they were maruellous glad for being gone about three leagues from them for the pleasure they conceiued of our comming we might heare them sing and see them dance for all they were so farre How our Captaine
arrowes into their bowes and to come downe toward vs verie resolutely to assalt vs and with great out-cries they beganne to fling stones and to shoot their arrowes Then Francis Preciado turned him to the Captaine and said Sir these Indians know or thinke that we he affeard of them in trueth it is a great falt to giue them this incouragement it were better for vs resolutely to set vpon them with these dâgs to assalt them on this hill that they may know vs to be no dastards for they be but Indians and dare not stande vs and if we can get their Fort vpon the hill God will giue vs victory in all the rest The Captaine answered that he liked well of the motion and that it was best so to doe although for any further pursuit vp the hill he thought we were to take another course By and by Francis Preciado getâing his target on his arme and his sword in his hand ranne vnto the other side of the valley which on that part was not very steepe crying S. Iago vpon them my masters and after him leapt Haro Tereca Spinosa and a Crossebow-man called Montanno and after them followed the Captaine though very laâe with a Negro and a souldier which accompanied him incouraging and comforting them willing them not to feare Thus we braue them to the place where they had fortified themselues and from whence they descended and we tooke another hill ouer against them within a darts cast of them And hauing breathed ourselues a little the Captaine came vnto vs and said Go too my maisters vpon them before they strengthen themselues on this hill for now we see plainely that they be affeard of vs seeing we chase the continually from their Forts suddenly 3 or 4 of vs went toward them well couered with targets vnto the foot âf their Fort where they were assembled and the rest of our company followed vs the Indians beganne to make head against vs and to fling many stones vpon vs and shoot many arrowes and we with our swords in our hands rushed vpon them in such sort that they seeing how furiously we set vpon them abandoned the fort and ranne downe the hill as swift as Deere and fled vnto another hill ouer against vs where the other squadron of the Indians stood of whom they were rescued and they began to talke among themselues but in a low voyce and ioyned together 6 and 6 and 8 8 in a company and made a fire and warmed themselues and we stood quietly beholding what they did Chap. 9. After the skirmish the Captaine being wounded and the rest of the souldiers seeing the Indians depart returned vnto their ships The next day taking in fresh water at the saide place he sent mariners to sound the mouth of the lake Departing thence they came to the port called Baya de Sant Abad and indured a dangerous storme at sea And afterward comming neere the shore to take fresh water in the said hauen they see certaine peaceable Indians BY this time it was late and the night approched and the Indians seeing this within a short while after determined to get them packing and ech of them or the greatest part tooke firebrandes in their hands got them away into craggy places When the Captaine saw this he coÌmanded vs to returne aboord our boats it being now darke night thanking vs all for the good seruice we had done him And being not ablâ to stand vpon his legge he leaned with his arme vpon Francis Pâââiado and thus we returned to our boats where with much adoe we got aboord by reason of the great tide and roughnesse of the sea so that our boats were filled with euery waue Thus very weary wet some wounded as is aforesaid each man returned vnto his ship where our beds which we found and our refreshing the cheere we had at supper did not greatly comfort vs in regard of our former trauels We passed that night in this sort and the nexâ day being Tuesday the Captaine found himselfe greatly payned with his wounds chiefly with that on his leg because it was greatly swolne with his going vpon it We lacked 12 buts to fill wiâh water and the barrels in both the ships and the Captaine would haue gone out to cause them to be filled but we would not suffer him and therefore we left off the businesse for that day But he appointed that the crosse bowes should be made readie and two speciall good harquebuzes the next day being Wednesday very early he commanded Iuan Castilio chiefe Pilot to goe out with both the botes and with all the souldiers and mariners that he could make hauing the day before commanded the Trinitie to go as neere the shore as she might to make ready some of her ordinance that if the Indians should shew themselues they might affright them doe them as much hurt as they could Wherfore on the Wednesday al we that wâre souldiers sauing the wounded persons went on shore with certaine mariners in the best order that we could and tooke the first hill where we had fortified our selues standing all vpon our guard vntill the water was filled and vntill we were called during which time not one Indian shewed himselfe Thus we went aboord when we thought good our selues at least without any suspition of the Indians although the tide of the Sea went so high y t it put vs to great trouble for oftentimes with great waues it beat into our boats This was on the Wednesday the 3 of December And to auoide losse of time the Captaine commanded Iuan Castilio the chiefe Pilot to take a boat and certaine mariners as he should thinke good and to view the mouth of the lake to see whether the entrance were deepe enough for to harbour the ships He taking the boat of the Admirall with 8 mariners and ours of the Trinity went and sounded the mouth on the shallowest place of the harre without they found 3 fadome depth and farther in 4 vp higher 5. alwayes increasing vnto 10 or 12 fadomes when they were come into the two points of the said lake which was a league brâad from one point to the other and all their sounding was exceeding good ground Then they went ouer to the southeast point there they saw a great boat or rafâ which they indeuoured to take to carrie vnto their ships In y e meane while they espied certaine cottages which the Pilot determined to goe and see and being come nâârâther saw 3 other raftes with 3 Indians on them distant from the cottages one or two cross-bowes shot and he leapt on land with 4 or 5â mariners in his companieâ and while they behelde those cottages they saw many Indians descending downe a small hill in warlike manner with their bowes and arrowes whereupon they determined to retire to their boats and to returne to their ships and they were not gone from the sea-shore
and dishonest actions and among the rest they set before him an Indian of grâat stature dyed wholly with black with certaine shels of the mother of pearle at his necke and on his head and speaking by signes to Francis Preciado touching the foresaid act of fornication thrusting their finger through a hole they said vnto him that if hee would haue a woman they would bring him one and he answered that he liked well of it and that therfore they should bring him one In the meane space on the other side where the Generall stood with his company another squadron of Indians shâwâd themselues whereupon the Generall and his company made a stirre and put themsâlues in battell array whereupon Francis Preciado was inforced to come downe from them to ioyne with the Generall his company and here the Indians which came last began to make signes that we should lay downe someâhing to truck and that they would giue vs some of their shels of mother of pearle which they brought vpon certaine small stickes and herewithall they came very neere vnto vs wherewith we wâre not well content And Francis Preciado said vnto the Captaine that if it pleased him heâ would cause all the Indians to come together and to sâay vpon that high hill and he answered that it was best to draw them all together for by this time our men had taken in all their water and stayed for the boat whereupon Francis taking a crowne of beades went toward the valley through which the water ran toward the Indians and made signes vnto them to call the rest and to come all together because hee would goe to the olde place to lay things on the ground for exchange as at the first and they answered that he should doe so and that they had called the others and that they would doe as he would haue them and so they did for they caused them to come vnto them which they did and Francis likewise went alone towards them in which meane space the Generall commanded his people to get into the boat Francis comming vnto the place bâganne âo lay downe his marchandise of traffique and afterwards made signes vnto them to stay there because hee would goe to the ships to bring them other things and so he returned to the place where the Captaine was and found them all got into the boates sauing the Generall and three or foure others and the Generall made as though he had giuen other trifles to Preciado to carry vnto the Indians and when he was gone a little from him he called him backe againe and all this while the Indians stood still and being come vnto him wee went faire and softly to our boates and got into them at our ease without any chronging and thence we came aboord our ship The Indians seing vs thus gone aboord came downe to the strand where the brooke of water was and called vnto vs to come foorth with our boates and to come on shore and to bring our beades and that they would giue vs of their mother of pearles but we being now set at dinner made no account of them whereupon they beganne to shoot arrowes at the ship and although they fell neere vs yet they did not reach vs. In the meane season certaine mariners went out in the boat to wey the anker whereupon the Indians seeing them comming towards them bringing them nothing they beganne in scorne to shew them their buttockes making signes that they should kisse their bums and these seemed to be those that came last The Generall seeing this commanded a musket to be once or twise shot off and that they should take their iust ayme They seeing these shot to be made readie some of them rose and went to shoot their arrowes at our mariners which were gone to weigh the ankers then the Generall commanded the great ordinanâe speedily to be shot off whereupon three or foure bullets were discharged and we perceiued that we had slaine one of them for we assuredly saw him lye dead vpon the shore and I thinke some of the rest were wounded They hearing this noyse and seeing him dead ranne away as fast as euer they could some along the shore and some through the vallies dragging the dead Indian with them after which time none of them appeared saue ten or twelue which peeped vp with their heads among those rocks whereupon another piece of ordinance was discharged aloft against the place where they were after which time we neuer saw any more of them Chap. 11. At the point of the Trinitie they spend three dayes in fishing and in other pastime after which setting sayle they discouer pleasant countries and mountaines voide of grasse and an Iland afterward called Isla de los Cedros or the I le of Cedars neere which they suffer sharpe colde and raine and to saue themselues they returne thither IMmediatly we set saile to ioyne with the ship Santa Agueda which was aboue halfe a league in the high sea from vs and this was on the Wednesday the seuenteenth of December Being come together because the windes were contrary we drew neere to a headland which wee called Punta de la Trinidad and here wee stayed fishing and solacing our sâluâs two or three dayes although we had alwayes great store of raine Afterward we beganne to sayle very slowly and at night we rode ouer against those mountaines where we had left our ankers and vpon knowledge of the place we receiued great contentment seeing we had sailed some fiue and thirtie leagues from the place where we had taken in water neither was it any maruell that wee so reioyced because that the feare which we had of contrary windes caused vs to be so well appayd of the way which we had made The day of the holy Natiuitie of our Lord which was on the Thursday the fiue and twentieth of the said moneth God of his mercy beganne to shewe vs fauour in giuing vs a fresh winde almost in the poope which carried vs beyond those mountaines for the space of tenne or twelue leagues finding the coast alwayes plaine and two leagues within the land which we coasted along and betweene these mountaines there was a great space of plaine ground which we might easily discerne with our eyes although others were of another opinion We beganne from Christmas day to saile slowly with certaine small land-windes and sayled from morning to night about sâuen or eight leagues which wâe esteemed no small matter alwayes praying to God to continue this his fauour toward vs and thanking him for his holy Natiuitie and all the dayes of this feast the Frier sayd masse in the Admirall and the father Frier Raimund preached vnto vs which gaue vs no small comfort by incouraging vs in the seruice of God On Saturday at night being the 27 of the said moneth we ankored neere vnto a point which seemed to be plaine land all along the shore and within the countrey were
denomination I was apprehended for the same words here rehearsed and none other thing and thereupon was vsed as before is written Now to speake somewhat of the description of the countrey you shall vnderstand that the port of S. Iohn de Vllua is a very little Island low by the waterside the broadest or longest part thereof not aboue a bowshoote ouer and standeth within two âurlongs of the firme land In my time there was but one house and a little Chappel to say Masse in in all the Island the side to the land wards is made by mans handes with free-stone and grauel and is 4. fadome deepe downe right wherfore the great ships that come in there do ride so neere the shoare of the Island that you may come and goe aland vpon their beake noses They vse to put great chaines of yron in at their halsers and an ancker to the landward and all little ynough to more well their shippes for feare of the Northerly winds which come off the coast of Florida that sometimes haue caried ships houses and all away to the shoare The king was wont to haue 20. great mightie Negroes who did serue for nothing else but onely to repaire the said Island where the foule weather doeth hurt it The Countrey all thereabout is very plaine ground a mile from the sea side a great wildernes with great quantitie of red Deere in the same so that when the mariners of the ships are disposed they go vp into the wildernes and do kil of the same and bring them aboord to eate for their recreation From this port to the next towne which is called Vera Cruz are 5. leagues almost by the Sea side till you come within one league of the place and then you turne vp towards the land into a wood till you come to a litle riuer hard by the said townes side which sometimes of the yere is dry without water The towne of Vera Cruz in my time had not past 300. housholds and serued but for the folke of the ships to buy and bring their goods aland and deliuer it to their ownersâ as also the owners and their factors to receiue their goods of the Masters of the ships This towne standeth also in a very plaine on the one side the riuer and the other side is enuironed with much sande blowân from the sea side with the tempest of weather many times comming vpon that coast This towne also is subiect to great sicknes and in my time many of the Mariners officers of the ships did die with those diseases there accustomed especially those that were not vsed to the countrey nor knew the danger therof but would commonly go in the Sunne in the heat of the day did eat fruit âf the countrey with much disorder and especially gaue themsâlues to womens company aâ their first comming whereupon they were caât into a burning ague of the which few escaped Halfe a dayes iourney from Vera Cruz towards Mexico is a lodging of fiue or sixe houses called the Rinconado which is a place where is a great pinacle made of lime and stone fast by a riuer side where the Indians were wont to doe their sacrifices vnto their gods and it is plaine and low ground betwixt that and Vera Cruz and also subiect to sicknes but afterward halfe a dayes iourney that you do begin to enter into the high land you shall find as faire good and sweet countrey as any in the world and the farther you go the goodlier and sweeter the countrey is till you come to Pueblo dâ los Angeles which may be some 43 leagues from Vera Cruz which was in my time a towne of 600. housholds or thereabout standing in a goodly soile Betweene Vera Cruz and that you shall come through many townes of the Indians and villages and many goodly fieldes of medow grounds Râuers of fresh waters forrests and great woods very pleasant to behold From Pueblo de los ângeles to Mexico is 20. leagues of very faire way and countrey as before is declared Mexico was a Citie in my time of not aboue 1500. housholds of Spaniards inhabiting there but of Indian people in the suburbs of the said city dwelt aboue 300000. as it was thought and many more This City of Mexico is 65. leagues from the North sea and 75. leagues from the South sea so that it standeth in the midst of the maine land betwixt the one sea and the other It is situated in the middest of a lake of standing water and enuironed round about with the same sauing in many places going out of the Citie are many broad wayes through the said lâke or water This lake and Citie is enuironed also with great mountaines round about which are in compasse aboue thirtie leagues and the saide Citie and lake of standing water doeth stand in a great plaine in the middest of it This lake of standing water doeth proceed from the shedding of the raine that falleth vpon the saide mountaines and so gather themselues together in this place All the whole proportion of this Citie doeth stand in a very plaine ground aud in the middest of the said Citie is a square place of a good bow shoote ouer from side to side and in the middest of the said place is the high Church very faire and well builded all through at that time not halfe finished and round about the said place are many faire houses built on the one side are the houses where Mutezuma the great king of Mexico that was dwelt and now there lye alwayes the viceroyes that the King of Spaine sendeth thither euery three yeeres And in my time there was for viceroy a gentleman of Castil called Don Luis de Velasco And on the other side of the saide place ouer against the same is the Bishops house very faire built and many other houses of goodly building And hard by the same are also other very faire houses built by the Marques de Valle otherwise called Hernando Cortes who was hee that first conquered the saide Citie and Countrey who after the said conquest which hee made with great labour and trauaile of his person and danger of his life and being growen great in the Countrey the King of Spaine sent for him saying that he had some particular matters to impart vnto him And when he came home he could not bee suffered to returâe backe againe as the King before had promised him With the which for sorrow that he tooke he died and this he had for the reward of his good seruice The said Citie of Mexico hath the streetes made very broad and right that a man being in the high place at the one ende of the street may see at the least a good mile forward and in all the one part of the streets of the North part of their Citie there runneth a pretie lake of very cleare water that euery man may put into his
these townes doe the Indians of Niciecan principally trade And in the towne of Ihualapa the chiefe Alguazil of the prouince is resident for the most part of the yeere More lowe beneath the riuer of âlacolula about a league or a league and ân halfe from the towne of Ometepec is the towne called Pio which was wont to be a towne of Tlacolula and was a frontier towne against the Mexicans There be in it about 50. Indians of the ancient inhabitants one Grauiel de Chiauez a citizen of Mexico hath the gouernement thereof it is 4. leagues from Ihualapa and 6. from the sea A little below this is the towne of Huehuatlan in the selfe same gouernement standing one league from the riuer on certaine high hils it hath 10. Indians and is from the sea 5. leagues And one league from this towne stands the towne of Cuahucapotla a mansion of Antla or Intla it hath to the number of 15. Indians it standeth one league and a halfe from the riuer and 4. leagues from the mouth thereof At the fountaines or heads of the rest of the brooks is the towne of Cacatepec being in the gouernment of Raphael de Tâeyo he and his tenants haue vnder them some 700. Indians of Niciecan it is from the sea some 22. leagues The riuer which is called Tlacamama commeth from the mountains of Atoyaque and Amusgos which are some 17. leagues from the sea There it maketh a formed riuer so big that it is nauigable to the sea with canoas and lighters I say from a litle below Tolistlahuaca a mansion of Xicaian It is nauigable 8. moneths in the yeere and the other 4. not because that the sands of the plaines do soke and drink vp the water in such wise that there remaineth so little that there is no passage howbeit in small lighters timber may bee brought downe this riuer one league from the place where it is cut vnto the place that I haue spoken of whereas bigger vessels may bee made for nigh vnto that place other brooks and running waters doe ioyne and meet which make it a maine riuer It hath nigh vnto it in the mountaines of Atoyaque Cacatepec and Amusgos many woods of pine-trees cork-trees and okes of great bignesse and beneath those mountaines in the warme countrey neere vnto the riuers there is much timber of those sorts which I mentioned before to be about the riuer of Ometepec which may easily be cut and carried downe vnto Tecuanapa in the time before specified This riuer hath likewise townes adioyning to it the first at the foote of the mountaines is the âown of Atoiaque belonging to the kingâ to the heires of Pronetto their language is Niciecan the countrey hot the people politique it is from the sea 15. leagues It hath about 200. Indians One league from this towne and 14. from the sea is the towne of Xicaian belonging likewise to the king and to the heires of Pronetto They are Niciecan people and very comely and in a hot countrey It hath by account 300. Indians There are resident in it the Uicar and Iustice it is from the riuer a league and a halfe A league from this towne and 14. from the sea is situate the mansion of Pinotespan subiect to Tutotepec which hath with the manors subiect vnto it 500. Indians Two leagues from the towne and one from Xicayan and 13. from Tecuanapa and 3. from the riuer is the towne of ââacamama the people are very comely and politique It containeth some 100. Indians and belongeth to the king More toward the South 5. leagues from the riuer and two from this towne and 14. from the sea is the towne called Pinotespan del Rey. They are handsome people but of slow speach this towne conteineth about 100. Indians like vnto the former They be wealthie because they make great quantitie of salte for they haue a lake in which salte groweth vnder the water a thing repugnant to nature that two contraries doe grow and are conserued together whereout they take it in breaking it with stones vpon the ground vnder the water It hath also the towne of Amusgos which is in the gouernment of Fernando de Auila which may be from Tecuanapa 18. leagues They speake the Amusgan tongue The countrey is hotteâ it standeth on the high way from Nicieca it hath 400. Indians few more or lesse These are all the townes of account situate neere this riuer Neere vpon this riuer are two farmes the one belonging to Pedro Brauo and the other to him that maketh this relation vnto your Excellencie which may be from the sea some 8. or 9. leagues all plaine ground And in this territorie there is but one towne called Quesala situate vpon the riuer and 6. leagues from the sea which in times past hath beene a great towne and nowe hath but thrée Indians onely and it is from the farmes 3. leagues The mansion house of Don Mattheo is more toward the South standing in a large mountainous and waste countrey which aboundeth with cattell being 3. leagues from the riuer and as farre from Tecuanapa as from the place where all the cattell is and the sea that way is from iâ but one league A little below this mansion about 4. leagues and 7. leagues from the sea is a garden of Alonso Pedraza which beareth Cacao And 2. leagues from this garden and 6. leagues from the sea standeth the towne of Cuahintlan belonging to the king a towne of 19. housholds but very rich for they gather much Cacao aâd the best in that countrey They speake the Tlapanecan tongue This towne hath the sea that way within halfe a league And this coast from Cuahintlan to Tecuanapa and the coast which runneth to Huatulco is a coast of much pearle for in olde time the Indians gathered much pearle there And 2. leagues from Cuahintlan and 4. from Tecuanapa is the garden of Cacao in the landes of Francisco Maldonado which is called Cacahu-Atoyaque These are the things worthy of relation from the head-springs of this riuer of Tlacamama vnto the sea and this foresaid riuer entreth into the riuer of Ometepec 5. leagues from Tecuanapa The riuer of Tlacolula springeth within the boundes of Chilsiztlahuaca subiect to Comastlahuaca a towne of Suchistlahuaca neere which are many mountaines This riuer is nauigable little more then 2. leagues before it entreth into the riuer of Ometepec where it is 5. leagues from the sea Hard by it is the towne of Tlacolula abouenamed and 3. leagues from it is the towne of Azoyoque an olde manour of Tlapa The towne of Chilsiztlahuaca hath but 3. Indians and the towne of Azoyoque hath more then 300. Indians But because in this hauen must bee the building of ships the prouinces of Tlapa and Tututepec may stand them in great stead the prouince of Tututepec being neighbour to the riuer of Tlacamama and the
that which hee made Iamaica seemed to be but a piece of the land and thereby tooke it rather to be Hispaniola by the lying of the coast and also for that being ignorant of the force of the current he could not beleeue he was so farre driuen to leeward and therfore sâtting his course to Iamaica and after certaine dayes not finding the same perceiued then certainly that the yland which he was at before was Iamaica and that the cloudes did deceiue him whereof he maruelled not a little and this mistaking of the place came to as ill a passe as the ouershooââng of Iamaica for by this did he also ouerpasse a place in Cuba called Santa Cruz where as he was informed was great store of hides to be had thus being disappointed of two of his portes where he thought to haue raised great profite by his trafique and also to haue found great refreshing of victuals and watâr for his men hee was now disappointed greatly and such want he had of fresh water that he was forced to seeke the shore to obteine the same which he had sight of after certaine dayes ouerpassed with stormes and contrary windes but yet not of the maine of Cuba but of certaine ylands in number two hundred whereof the most part were desolate of inhabitânts by the which ylands the Captaine passing in his pinnesse could finde no fresh water vntill hee came to an yland bigger then all the rest called the yle of Pinas where wee anckered without ships the 16. of Iune and found water which although it were neither so toothsome as running water by the meanes it is standing and but the water of raine and also being neere the Sea was brackish yet did wee not refuse it but were more glad thereof as the time then required then wee should haue bene another time with fine Conduit water Thus being reasonably watâred we were desiroâs to depart because the place was not very coÌuenient for such ships of charge as they were because there were many shoales to leeward which also lay open to the sea for any wind that should blow and therfore the captaine made the more haste away which was not vnneedfull for little sooner were their anckers weyed and foresaile set but there arose such a storme that they had not much to spare for doubling out of the shoales for one of the barks not being fully ready as the rest was faine for haste to cut the cable in the hawse and loose both ancker and cable to saue her selfe Thus the 17. of Iun ewe departed and on the 30. wee felâ with the West end of Cuba called Cape S. Antony where for the space of three dayes wee doubled along till wee came beyond the shoales which are 20. leagues beyond S. Anthony And the ordinary Brise taking vs which is the Northeast winde put vs the 24. from the shoare and therefore we went to the Northwest to fetch wind and also to the coast of Florida to haue the helpe of the current which was iudged to haue set to the Eastward so the 29. wee found our selues in 27. degrees and in the soundings of Florida where we kept our selues the space of foure dayes sailing along the coast as neere as we could in tenne or twelue fadome water hauing all the while no sight of land The fift of Iuly we had sight of certaine Islands of sand called the Tortugas which is lowe land where the captaine went in with his pinnesse and found such a number of birds that in halfe an houre he laded her with them and if they had beene ten boats more they might haue done the like These Islands beare the name of Tortoises because of the number of them which there do breed whose nature is to liue both in the water and vpon land also but breed onely vpon the shore in making a great pit wherein they lay egges to the number of three or foure hundred and couering them with sand they are hatched by the heat of the Sunne and by this meanes commeth the great increase Of these we tooke very great ones which haue both backe and belly all of bone of the thicknes of an inch the fish whereof we proued eating much like veale and finding a number of egges in them tasted also of them but they did eat very sweetly Heere wee ankered sixe houres and then a faire gale of winde springing we weyed anker and made saile toward Cuba whither we came the sixt day and weathered as farre as the Table being a hill so called because of the forme thereof here we lay off and on all night to keepe that we had gotten to wind-ward intending to haue watered in the morning if we could haue done it or els if the winde had come larger to haue plied to wind-ward to Hauana which is an harborow whereunto all the fleet of the Spanyards come and doe there tary to haue one the company of another This hill we thinking to haue beene the Table made account as it was indeed that Hauana was but eight leagues to wind-ward but by the perswasion of a Frenchman who made the captaine beleeue he knew the Table very well and had beene at Hauana sayd that it was not the Table and that the Table was much higher and neerer to the sea side and that there was no plaine ground to the Eastward nor hilles to the Westward but all was contrary and that behinde the hilles to the Westward was Hauana To which persuasion credit being giuen by some and they not of the woorst the captaine was persuaded to goe to leeward and so sailed along the seuenth and eight dayes finding no habitation nor no other Table and then perceiuing his folly to giue eare to such praters was not a little sory both because he did consider what time he should spend yer he could get so far to wind-ward againe which would haue bene with the weathering which we had ten or twelue days worke what it would haue bene longer he knew not and that whâch was woorst he had not aboue a dayes water and therfore knew not what shift to make but in fine because the want was such that his men could not liue with it he determined to seeke water and to goe further to leeward to a place as it is set in the card called Rio de los puercos which he was in doubt of both whether it were inhabited whether there were water or not and whether for the shoalds he might haue such accesse with his ships that he might conueniently take in the same And while we were in these troubles and kept out way to the place aforesayd almighty God our guide who would not suffer vs to run into any further danger which we had bene like to haue incurred if we had ranged the coast of Florida along as we did before which is so dangerous by reports that no ship escapeth which commeth thither as
of vs. On Sunday morning being the last of Nouember wee saw three or foure little Islands called the Monjes betwixt Aruba and the next North point of the maine At 12 of the clocke we sawe the maine where we saw a great current setting to the Westward and also the water changing very white The Phenix the carauell and one of the catches kept within and at midnight came vnder Cape de la Vela and made a fire whereby the rest of the fleeâe came to anker vnder the Cape where is a very good rode faire sholding and sandie ground fourteene twelue and tenne fadoms neere the shore Toe Cape is a bare land without trees or shrubs and falleth in eight or ten leagues Southeast and Northwest and a saker shot off the point standeth a little Island like Mewestone neere Plimmouth but somewhat bigger In the morning the first of December wee imbarked all our souldiers for Rio de la Hacha which is a towne twenty leagues to thâ Westwards one of the ancientest in all the maine although not very bigge but it standeth in a most fertile and pleasant soyle Our men tooke it by ten of the clock in the night The ships bearing all that night and the day before in 5 and 6 fadomes the lesser ships in 2 fadomes and an halfe water the Phenix went so neere the shore by the Generals commandement that shee strake on ground but got off againe There lieth to the Eastward of the towne some mile thereabout a shold of sand therefore giue a birth some halfe league or more before you come right against the town There wee came to anker in two fadomes but the great ships rode off in fiue ând siâe fadomes There is a fresh riuer about a bow-shot to the Eastward of the towne whâreinto our pinnesses could scarce enter by reason of a barre of sand in the riuers mouth but within it is nauigable for barkes of twenty or âhârây âunnes some sixe or eight leagues vp The siâth day the Spaniards came in to talke about the ransome of the towne but not to the Generall his liking and that night Sir Thomas Baskeruil marched vp into the countrey to ouer-runne those parâs and the Generall the same night with some hundreth and fifâie men went by water sixe leagues to the Eastward and tooke the Rancheria a fisher towne wherâ they drag for pearle The people all fled eâcept some sixteen or twenty souldiers which fought a little but some were taken priâoners besides many Negros with some store of pearles and other pillage In the houses we refreshed our selues and were all imbarked to come away and then had sight of a brigandine or a dredger which the Generall tooke within one houres chase with his two barges she had in her Indie-wheat which we call Maiz and some siluer and pearle but of small value On Saturday the seuenâh master Yorke captaine of the Hope dyed of sicknes and then master Thomas Drake the Generals brâther was made captaine of the Hope and master Ionas Bodenham captaine of the Aduenture and master Chaâles Caesar captaine of the Amitie The tenth day the Spaniards concluded for the ransome of the towne for 24000 ducats and one prisoner promised to pay for his ransome 4000 ducats The fourteenâh day they brought in the townes ransâme in pearles but rated so deare as the Genârall after conference with them misliking it sent it backe againe giuing them foure houres respite to cleere themseluâs wiâh their treasure The siâteenth the gouernour came into the towne about dinner and vpon conference with the Gânerall told him plainely that he cared not for the towne neither would he ransome it and that the pearle was brought in wiâhout his command or consent and that his detracting of time so long was onely to sând the other townes word that were not of force to withstand vs whereby they might conuey all their goods cattell and wealth into the woods out of danger So the Genâral gaue the gouernour leaue to depart according to promise hauing two houres to withdraw himselfe in safety The seuânteenth Sir Thomas Baskeruil with the Elizabeth Constance of Phenix the carauâl wiâh fâure or fiue piânâsses went some fiue leagues to the Wesâward landing marched some foure leagues vp into the countrey to a place called Tapia which he tooke burned certain villâges ând ferme houses about it He had some resistance as he passed ouer a riuer but had but one man âurt which he brought aboord aliue with him he marched one league farther and burnt a village called Sallamca and so returned with some prisoners the souldiers hauing gotten some pââlâgâ The 18 the Rancheria and the towne of Rio de la Hacha were burnt cleane downe to the ground the Churches and a Ladies house onely eâcepted which by her letters written to the Generall was preserued That day wee sât sayle and fell to lâe-ward to meete with Sir Thomas Baskeruil The 19 we weighed and stood to leeward for Cape de Aguja wâich the twentieth at sunne rising we saw It is a Cape subiect much to flawes by reason it is a very hie land and within the cape liâth an Island within the mouth of the sound which hath a white cliffe or spot in the Westnorthwest part of the Island The land all about the cape riseth all in hemocks or broken steâpie hils A league Southwest within that for so falleth the land thereabout thâre standeth on the top of a cliffe a watch-house and a little within that a small Island you may goe in betweene the maine and it or to leeward if you lust and hard within that iâ the rode and towne of Santa Martha which at 11 of the clocke we tooke the people all being sled except a few Spaniards Negros IndiaÌs which in a brauado at our landing gaue vs some 30 or 40 sâot so ran away That night their Lieutenant generall was taken and some little pillage brought in out of the woods for in the town nothing was left but the houses swept clean In all the main is not a richer place for gold for the hops were mixt with the earth in euery place and also in the sând a little to the leewards of the towne In the bay wee had a bad rode by reason of a small moone for euery small moone maketh foule weather all the maine along The 21 the Generall caused the towne to be burnt and all the ships to wey and stood out many of the souldiers being imbarked where the Generall had appointed in the small ships which rode neerest the shore We lost that night the company of the Phenix captaine Austin Peter Lemond and the Garlands pinnesse which stood along the shore and being chased off by gallies out of Carthagena Peter Lemond with nine of our men was taken the rest came safe âo our fleete The 26 we saw the Ilands some twelue leagues to the Eastward of Nombre
from the fury of the enemies shot And so with ensigne displayed taking with vs our sixe dead men wee retired with more safetie to the hauen where we tooke a frigat which rode ready fraught with the kings tribute in siluer and other good commodities which were presently to bee transported to S. Iuan de Vllua and brought the same and our Periago or Canoa to my ship which lay in two fadome water sixe leagues from the town being not able to come any neerer for the sholds vpoÌ that coast Ouer against the place where our ship rode stoode a towne of 300 or 400 Indians called Sebo which we likewise tooke where wee found Champeche-wood good to dye withal with waxe and hony This done we left this coast and turned vp to Cape de Cotoche againe and ankored euery day at noone because of the brizes and in turning vp I lost my barke called the Aduenture which was taken by 2 frigats of warre which were manned out from Campeche wherein Captaine Hen and thirteen of my men were taken and afterward executed as since we vnderstand by some Spanish prisoners that were taken in those parts After we had stayed fiue weekes on this coast wee shaped our course for Hauana where finding nothing we disemboqued and came along by the Isle of Bermuda and crossed ouer to The banke neere Cape Race in 22 fadomes and from thence sayling for England we fel with Sillie about the first of Iuly and within two dayes after arriued at Plimmouth where we found the Right honorable the Erle of Essex setting forth with a great fleet for the Isles of the Açores An excellent ruttier for the Islands of the VVest Indies and for Tierra firma and Nueua Espanna IF a man depart from the barre of S. Lucar in Summer time hee must steere Southwest vntil hee hath sight of Punta de Naga which is in the Isle of Tenerif The markes to know it be these An high point sâoping to the sea at the Easter point it hath two down falles like particions and they shew to be separated from the maine of the Island stand in 28 degrees a halfe And if thou wilt haue sight of the Grand Canaria and findest thy selfe with Punta de Naga thou shalt then steere Southwest and by South and so thou shalt haue sight of Canaria which standeth in 28 degrees And thou must come to ankor on the Southeast side of the Island But I aduise thee if it be in winter time that thou keepe another course and that as followeth The course that a man must keepe departing in winter for the Indies from Sant Lucar DEparting from Sant Lucar in winter thou shalt goe West and by South keeping along the coast because if thou goe farre from the coast thou shalt meete with the wind off the sea vntill thou be as high shot as Cape Cantin which is a low flat cape with the sea And thou shalt see a great wood before thou come at this cape called Casa del Cauallero And from thence thou shalt steere thy olde course that is Southwest and by South for the Isles of Alegrança and Lancerota and when thou art North and South with Alegrança thou shalt steere thence Southwest and so thou shalt see the Canaria which is a round high land and standeth in twentie eight degrees What thou must doe if a contrary wind take thee fiftie leagues off the shore VVHen thou art fifty leagues shot on thy way into the sea Southwest off and there thou chance to meete with a contrary winde off the sea and if it force thee to put roome then thou shalt steere Northeast and by East and shalt hall with sight of Cabos del Plata which shew when thou art a seaboord so farre as thou mayest descrie them to be like two points of white sand and if it be cleere thou shalt see within the land certain high hilles lying Northwest and by West called las Sierras de Zahara and being three leagues from land thou shalt haue thirtie fadomes water and sand And from thence to the bay of Cadiz thou shalt goe along Northwest by the coast and if thou be in thirtie or forty âadomes thou shalt haue âaze but if thou bee in lesse then thirtie fadomes thou shalt haue other sounding which if it chance then thou art against S. Pedro. And if it bee by day thou shalt see the Ermitage of Sant Sebastian which seemeth to be a shippe under sayle And thou shalt goe into the bay taking heede of the Puercos giue them a good birth off And if thou chance to bee benighted when thou fallest with the bay and wouldest goe into the bay thou shalt carie thy lead in thy hand and be sounding and finding thy selfe in rockie ground thou shalt steere North because of shunning the Puercos and yet giue them not too great a birth because of The Diamant and so thou mayest goe in sounding when thou thinkest good And being benighted and then not East and West with the bay and if thou doest not goe into it then make the largest boord thou caust keeping off till day If thou be at the Canaries and wouldest sayle to Nueua Espanna thou shalt sayle foure and twenty houres South because of the calmes of Fierro And from thence thou shalt goe Westsouthwest vntill thou finde thy selfe in twenty degrees And then thou must goe West and by South which is the course for the Isle Deseada And from Deseada thou shalt goe West and by North because of the variation of the compasse And falling with Deseada thou shalt finde it to rise low with the sea and it standeth in 15 degrees And the eastermost part is the sharpest and smaller then the West point And if thou are going for Tierra firma thou shalt goe West and by South vntill thou come to Dominica and there on the Northwest side is a riuer where thou mayest water The marks to know it bee a certaine high land full of hilles And seeing it when thou art farre off to the seaward it maketh in the middest a partition so that a man would thinke it deuided the Island in two parts And this Island standeth in 14 degrees and a halfe I aduise thee that if thou wouldest goe for Nueua Espanna and so doest passe betweene Guadalupe and Monserate to the Westward that being thus open off the entrance betwixt them thou shalt go Westnorthwest and so shalt haue sight of Santa Cruz which standeth in seuenteene degrees and a halfe And the markes to know it be these It is an Island not uery high and lyeth East and West and at the East end it is lower then at the West end And going forward on thy course thou shalt runne Westnorthwest and so thou shalt goe to haue sight of the Isle of San Iuan de Puerto rico which is an Island lying East and West and standeth in eighteene
if thou keeping this course findest lesse water then go West and by North and that way thou shalt bring thy selfe into 20. fathomes againe vntill thou haue brought thy selfe North and South with the triangle And being North and South with the triangle then thou shalt be also North and South with Surta from thence thou shalt go Southwest and by this course thou shalt haue sight of the high hils of S. Martin which are certaine high hils lying Northwest and Southeast and they haue a partition in the midst and to the Northwest they be highest and on the Southeast part within the land thou shalt see something an high land called Pan de Minsapa that is the loafe of Minsapa which is a round loafe not very high The hils of S. Martin stand in 18. degrees lesse one fift part I aduise thee that when thou fallest with Saint Martin and wouldest go with Saint Iohn de Vllua then thou shalt goe Westnorthwest and this is the course that thou must keepe if thou bee farre off at sea I meane so farre off as thou mayest well discrie the hils of S. Martin But if thou be neere to the land then thou must goe Northwest and by West and thou shalt so come along the coast and thou shalt find the coast to bee low land and comming this course thou shalt haue sight of certaine little hilles not very high then thou shalt fall with the poynt called Punta de Antoni Serro and these hilles lye ouer the riuer of Medelin And if when thou arâ East and West with The Volcan or hill that casteth out fire any man doe aske thee where the harbour of Sant Iuan de Vllua is thou mayest truely answere West and by South and it standeth in 18. degrees and a halfe The course to be kept from Nueua Espanna to the maine of Spaine in Europe COmming from S. Iuan de Vllua to goe for Spaine thou shalt stirre Northeast vntill thou be in 24. degrees and so beeing thou shalt goe East vntill thou bring thy selfe in the soundings of the Tortugas and thy ground wil be white sand I aduise thee that if it be by night thou goe East and finding the water to waxe shoalder then goe Southwest with a care to keepe thy lead going vntill thou loose ground and come into great depth because thou mayest fall to the North of the Tortugas And going from this sound for Hauana thou must sâirre Southsoutheast because of the currents that carrie thee to the East And if by this way thou haue sight of an hie land that seemeth to be like a loafe make account it is the loafe of Cabanas And to the East of this loafe thou shalt see a land that hath a plaine It sheweth to be low euen with the sea and as smooth as the sea and from this land to the East the land is lower and lower And from thence to Hauana thou must goe East And if the wind will not let thee go that course thou must turne vp till thou be vpon the harbour of Hauana The marks of the poynt of Hauana be these that on the East side it hath an hie blacke land which is sloping to the sea with a litle white tower on the top thereof and as thou goest into the port thou must keepe neere the high blacke land and when thou art hard to it strike thy toppe-sayles in signe of peace to the castle least it shoote at thee What course the Spaniards keepe from Hauana to Spaine IF from Hauana thou wouldest set thy course for Spaine thou must goe Northeast and shalt so haue sight of the Martyres which stand in 24. degrees and a halfe And the coast lieth East and West The marks be these it sheweth like heads of trees and in some places certaine rocks with white sandy bayes And if the wind be large thou mayest go East and by South vntill thou see the coast to lye Northeast and Southwest and if the wind be scant then go turning vp and take good heed that euery euening at Sunne going downe thou haue sight of the land and so thou must do being in the chanell vntill thou bring thy selfe into the middest of the chanell and thou must lye off from the going downe of the sunne vntill the âude of the first watch with thy coarses alone without any more sayle and from midnight forwards cast about and lye the other way with the like sayle vntill day and thus thou must doe vntill thou bring thy selfe into the chanel And if being in the Chanel thou finde the winde large thou shalt stirre Northeast with a care to goe cleane off the sholds of the Mimbres or the Osiars And if being in the chanel thou meete with the wind at North then thou must turne with a litle saile 4. glasses one way and 4. another as thou thinkest good And if thou canst not beare sayle then thou mayest goe with all thy sayles downe except when thou wouldest cast aboât thou mayest loose some small sayle to winde thy ship I aduise thee that when thou art come out of the Chanel thou shalt be in 28. degrees And if it be in summer thou shalt goe Northeast vntill thou be in 39. degrees and ½ which is the height of Flores and thou shalt goe to the Northward of Bermuda And if thou thinke good to go in more degrees to haue the seawinds thou shalt goe by the same height as I haue sayd and if thou shalt finde the winde off the sea thou hast no neede to goe in more heights and from thence thou shalt goe East and by South and thou must goe thus because of the variation of the Compasse And thus thou shalt find the isles of Flores and Cueruo which stand in 39. degrees ½ and in 40. large The markes be these Thou mayest goe from betwixt Flores and Cueruo and must goe East Southeast and so thou shalt haue sight of the Island of Sayles which is the Island of S. George And beeing at the land thou shalt goe along it and when thou hast doubled a certaine litle Head-land that lyeth in the East poynt then thou shalt stirre East and by North and East And thus going thou shalt haue sight of Terçera which is in 39. degrees The markes bee these And behinde a certaine blacke land something high which is called el Brasil standeth the Citie called Angra Going from Terçera thou shalt runne East Northeast vntill thou bring thy selfe Northwest and Southeast with the Cape of Saint Vincent And thou mayest worke thus being in summer for alwayes thou shalt haue the windes at Northwest And beeing Northwest and Southeast with this Cape thou shalt stirre Southeast and by East and thou shalt so fall with the land 6. or 7. leagues to the windward off the Cape on the coast which lyeth North and South then thou shalt goe along the coast to
currents Remember that when you see one league before you a Rocke and a Shoald that hath vpon it but 2. fathomes water and your marke if you come out of the sea is an Hill and the Hil is not very hie it standeth East and West and vpon it are some little risings and they are not very high and vpon these risings stand two round homocks close together you shall see the Teates of Hauana To know along the shore when you are against the Harbour of Xaroca the markes are these A little to the Westward one league you shall see along the shore a Hill that is broken and that broken Hill is ouer tââ Harbour of Xaroca and then a little more to the Westward a league there is another broken Hill And you shall see that North and South from these broken hits is a Flat off And from that to Hauana is 7. leagues and it is all cleane ground and you may goe along the shore till you come to Hauana To know the harbour of Hauana you shall see before you come at it one litle rocke of stone not very hie and smooth toward the sea vpon the rocke standeth a litle white tower wherein they keepe watch And then if you haue the winde large you shall see the harbour open and then you may beare in with it Your shippe being of great burthen when you are within then keepe on the West side âecââse on the East side on the West end of the Rocke aforesayde there lieth a ledge to the Westward which hath but three or foure fathoms ½ vpon it If your ship be of small burthen you may run along the weather shore vntill you come right against the Castle and then halfe the Bay ouer you may come to an anchor How to worke comming through the olde Chanell if you be not minded to goe ouer the Pracellas or shoalds If you will come through the olde Chanel when you come as hie as the Shoalds comming vpon your course from the Caio de Moa as I told you keepe 2. leagues from the Pracel or shoald and then set our course West vnto the low islands of the Firme land And vpon this course you shal kea the Flats on the point of Caio Romano and within it is one Flat higher then the other and smooth vpon and in the middest it maketh as it were broken land and when you are in the chanel in the day time you must take heede you come not neere the shore by 2. leagues and by your sounding no neerer then 3. fathoms And you must take heede stil when y e night commeth to keepe 2. or three leagues off for feare of the shoalds And in the night you must goe Northwest as is aforesaid And also you must take heed that you keepe in the middle of the chanel as nere as you can toward the shoald And finding much wind being benighted from midnight till day stirre West Northwest and when it is towards day then you may edge towards the Flats as is aforesaid And as you stirre hence one day and one night from Caio Romano to the inwards of the Chanell you shall see the firme land of Cuba and other markes and among the rest around hamocke which you may easily know It is called Alcane de Barasoga And from thence to Sauano and to Basquo is 6. leagues and likewise Hauana 6. leagues And from thence to crosse vnder the Fort is 45. leagues And stirre hence vpon your course aforesaid And if you haue gone from Barasoga 30. leagues you shall see none of the Flats of Mecala And giue them a bredth off two or three leagues and keepe your course West Northwest as aforesayd vntill it be day and presently you may edge round to the Flats And thus stirring keepe your course vntill you see the hilles of Camaloqua And looke that when you come from Caio de Moa along the Pracel or shoald by night close by it you shall not see what land it is till it be day and in the Morning you shall set your course as is aforesayd vntill you see the shoald and in seeing it you may stirre on your course as is aboue menâioned vntill you come to Hauana For to set your course from the point of Mance to Caio Romano when you are North and South with the point of Mance you shall stirre thence West Northwest vntil you thinke you be Northeast and Southwest with the hill of Hama And this hill is an high hill and smooth to the seaside And from this hill to Caio Romano you shall stirre Northwest and by West and vpon this course you may be bolde to see Caio Romano And the marke of this Flat is that it maketh an hie land and smooth vpon the top and in the middest of it it sheweth as it were broken And when you come to it you must take heede you come not neere it by 2. leagues because it is sowle And looke that you bring not your selfe too neere the hill of Hama by night For you must take heede of Caio Romano to keepe off it vntill Morning in the Morning you may goe your course vntill you see it and then set your course as is abouesaid A principal ruttier conteining most particular directions to saile from S. Lucar in Andaluzia by the Isles of the Canaries the small Isles called Las Antillas along the South parts of the Isles of S. Iuan de Puerto rico Hispaniola and Cuba and from Cabo de Corrientes or Cabo de S. Anton without and within the litle Isles called Los Alacranes to the port of S. Iuan de Vllua in Nueâa Espanna and the course from thence backe againe by Hauana and through the Chanell of Bahama to Spaine together with the speciall markes of all the Capes Islands and other places by the way and a briefe declaration of their latitudes and longitudes IF you depart from the barre of S. Lucar de Barameda toward the West Indias in the Summer time you must stirre a way Southwest vntill you come to the head-land called Punta de Naga vpon the Isle of Tenerif But if your departure be from the sayd barre in the Winter you must stirre away Southwest and by South vntill you come to the height of Cape Cantin on the coast of Babarie the markes and signes whereof be these following The markes to know Cape Canâin CApe Cantin is a lowe Câpe and small to the sea-ward and maketh a snowt like the nose of a galley and hath vpon the tâp of the poynt a Heath or shrubby place and on the toppe thereof staâd two homocks that to the sea-ward being higher then the other but that on the Souther side sheweth like a tower and this Cape is in 32. degrees and ½ And he that wil seeke from this Cape to discouer Punta de Naga beforesayd must stirre away Southwest and by West
suâe they are The Iardines and then stir out againe South till you bee cleare of them and when you haue brought them North of you then may you stirre away West if it bee by day if it bee bynight West and by South till you see the Island of Pinos The markes of Isla de Pinos THe Island of Pinos stretcheth it selfe East and West and it is full of homocks and if you chance to see it at full sea it will shewe like 3. Islands as though there weâe diuers soundes betweene them and that in the midst is the greatest and in rowing with them it will make all a firme lande and vpon the East side of these three homocks it will iââwe all ragged and on the West side of them will appeare vnto you a lowe point euen with the sea and oftentimes you shall see the trees before you shall discerne the point Directions from the Isle of Pinos to Cape de Corrientes IF you saile from the foresayde Isle of Pinos to Cape de Corrientes stir away West and by North and before you come to the sayd Cape vpon the Northside of you you shall see certâine mountaines all full of homocks which are called Las Sierras de Guanaguaâico and that vpon the West part hath more homocks then that on the other Markes of Cape de Corrientes CApe de Corrientes is a lowe Cape though not so low as the other part of the land that lyeth along by it for it is more lowe and hath vpon it 4. or 5. great splats like vnto oxen and the very point of the Cape is all white sand and from thence Westward you shall discerne no lande for it maketh a great bay and from hence you must saile to Cape de Sant Anton. Markes of Cape de Sant Anton. THe cape of Sant Anton is lowe by the sea and all full of shrubs or trees and you shall see within the land a lake of fresh water and if you want water there you may water and vpon the North side of the said Cape you shall discerne a palme tree higher then the rest of the trees and it sheweth round like a bowle at the top like to the top of a ship and North from the Cape are certaine sholdes which are 2. or 3. leagues long Directions from the Cape de S. Anton to Nueua Espanna on the outside of the small Islands called Los Alacranes or The Scorpions IF you will sayle from Cape Sant Anton to Nueua Espanna with a North winde then stirre away Westnorthwest from 21. to 22. degrees and then sound vpon the pracel or flat and if you see by this direction that you holde water then stir away Northwest vntill you lose the ground and then follow your course againe vntill you haue brought your selfe into 24. degrees and ½ and then saile West vntill you bring your selfe North and South with the Isle Veâmeja or The red Isle then stir away Southwest and by this way you shall finde Villa rica on the coast of Nueua Espanna And if by going this course you be in 19. degrees and ½ and chance not to see the lande then stir away West vntill you see Villa rica and from thence saile you South for the harbour of S. Iuan de Vllua and if you should be neere the land you must stir South and by West towardes the same harbour And if you chance to see the Volcan or burning hill to beare west by South from you then know that the harbour of S. Iuan de Vllua shal be East and west off you Markes of Villa rica VIlla rica standeth in 19. degres and ½ and the signes thereof are certaine high hilles full of homocks of many heads which haue on the top of theÌ certain white patches after the maner of white beaten wayes and these hils lie Northeast and Southwest And if you doubt whether these be the Sierras or hils of S. Martin wet your lead or sound and if you finde bottome they are the Sierras of Villa rica and saile you to the landward and looke by how much you come neerer the land so much will they seeme lower vnto you but so doe not the hilles of S. Martin for the neerer you come to them the higher will they appeare to you and likewise if they âe the hilles of Sâ Martin you shall not finde bottome but euen at land it selfe Markes of Rio de las palmas and of the riuer of mountaines called Rio de las montannas IF you should chance to fall with Rio de las palmas or The riuer of palmes or els with the riuer of Mountaines it is all of plaine lande and full of trees and certaine woodie homocks and among them certaine heapes of saâd and all this along by the sea side and if you went by land to the riuer of Panuco you shall haue many mouthes or openings of plaias or strands where also are many lizas or oazy places which ââretch to Rio Hermoso You must beware what part soeuer you happen of this coast to fall withall to discouer it and although you knowe it you must sound the depth because if the windes bee Easterly the current setteth there much to the North but if you should be 40. leagues at sea then this current setteth to the Northeast Markes of Rio Hermoso or The beautifull riuer IF you wil seeke the riuer talled Rio Hermoso looking well within the land you shal see three homocks of an high hill and those two which are to the landward within are rounder theÌ the other which is neerest the sea for that it is longer and bigger and lyeth North and South and you shall bâ 4. leagues at sea when you shall see them and they are called The sierraâ or mountaines of Tamaclipa and from thence to the riuer of Panuco there is no high land but all lowe and euen with the sea and full of palme trees and other trees Markes of the riuer of Panucâ IF you fall with the riuer of Panuco betweene which and the foresayde Villa rica standeth the Island called Isla de Lobos or The Isle of seales the markes bee these From the mouth of the riuer it maketh a great day without and at the ende of this bay vpon the Northside there is oazy low and bare ground altogether without trees and at the out ende of the oazy lowe place vpon the West side it maketh a low homock like to a Lizards head and when you see the aforesayde cliffe you shall bee in the opening of the mouth of the sayd riuer and then shall you see a little low tower hauing on the top of it a crosse which the fishermen call Marien and this barre hath on it 2. fathom waterâ and 2. and ½ and you neede not to stay for the tyde for that it floweth not there and that you may the better knowe whether you bee in this bay
this that by how much you come neerer them so much the higher will they shewe vnto you neither shall you finde any bottome till you bee at the very shoare The course from Roca partida or The clouen rocke to S. Iuan de Vllua IF you depart from Roca partida or The clouen rocke for Sant Iuan de Vllua you must stir away Westnorthwest and so shall you fetch or fall with the point of Anton Miliarco and if you happen to sound vpon The sunken rocks called Cabe ças anegadas you shall haue black sand and 17. fathom water and you shall bee but a league from the land and if you bee 2. leagues from the land you shall haue 34. fathoms The course from Sant Iuan de Vllua in the bay of Mexico to Spaine in Europe IF you depart from S. Iuan de Vllua to Hauana you must stir away Northeast vntill you bring your selfe in 25. degrees and from thence you must stir away East from the little Islands called Las Tortugas vntill you haue the sounding of them and if you finde white sande very small you shall bee East and West with them and if your sounding bee shellie ground and perwinkles or small shelles or skales then shall you be Northeast and Southwest and the shelles or skales must bee red and if at some time you take vp blacke sande then are you North and South with the sayd Tortugas Markes of The Tortugas IF you chance to fall with The Tortugas they are 5. or 6. little Islands of white sand lowe and close by the sea sauing one which hath on it some shrubs or bushes of trees and they are in 25. degrees The course from The Tortugas toward Hauana IF you depart from The Tortugas towards Hauana with a fresh winde you must stir away Southwest and if it be faire weather and a small gale of winde then stir South that the current may not draw you in nor set you too much to the Westward and if you fall with Los Organos they are a ranke of high and low hilles with many sharpe heads like vnto Organ pipes and at the entring thereof on the South side is Rio de puercos or The riuer of hogs and at the surther ââde is the deepe bay called Baya honda and there is the round loafe or heape called El pan de baya honda that is to say The loafe of the deepe bay and from this place vntill you come to Cape de S. Anton all is sholdes and flats 4. or 5. leagues into the sea euen as farre as the sayde Cape and from Baya honda or The deepe bay to Hauana all the coast is full of high and lowe hilles which they call La Quadrilla de sierras which is as much to say as A companie of hilles together like souldiers on a heape and more to the Eastward you shall descry an high hill which is called El pan de Cabannas And if you fall with Hauana you shall see on the Southwest side an hill called La meza de Marien or The Table of Marien and if it be cleare you shall see lower to the Westwarde the heape or loafe that is called El pan de Cabannas You must note that about Hauana it is all lowe land euen with the sea till you come to Mesa de Marien and then looke well within the lande and you shall see 2. little round trees like to the teaâes of womens breasts and bringing your selfe North and South you shall be with the harborough of Hauana and then shall you soone perceiue the tower that is vpon the cliffes of Hauana Markes of the hauen or port called Puerto de Marien PVerto de Marien is a harbour that you may enter into without any danger or feare but at the entrance thereof you must borrow on the West side by reason of the rockes and shelues and when you are within then borrow on the East shoare and leaue the other side and so shall you enter safe and from this place to Hauana is all lowe lande Note that if you ouerpasse the harborough of Hauana to the Eastward or if the current hath set you past it by meanes of calmes then shall you perceiue at full sea vpon the coast certaine broken places like the enterances of harbours because the lande is lowe and comming neere the shoare you shall see in some places of the coast Playas or strandes of sande which shew like vnto Chipiona and looking Eastward along the sea coast you shall see a round loafe which is called Elpon de Matanças and also you shall perceiue in certaine places round white heapes of sande called Barrancas along the coast close by the lande for the current runneth very swift in the chanell and there is no feare but of that which you may see for all the coast is cleane ground The course from Hauana to Spaine IF you will saile from Hauana to Spaine you must stirre away Northeast till you come to the head of The Martires called La Cabeça de los Martires If it chance before you come to the said head that the winde should chop vp at North on you then stand to the Eastward vntill you bring your selfe as farre ahead as Matanças then cast about to the West to discouer the lande of The Martires or of Florida that the current may not set you on The Mimbres and if by chance you see The Pan de Matanças at ful sea it hath these markes following It is a round heape or loafe and high withall and on the Westerne side thereof appeareth a rocke like to the head of a Tortoise and betweene this Pan and the hilles of Seluco there will appeare vnto you a great broken lande like as it were sunken places and vpon the East side of this Pan toward Punta de los Puercos it is all lowe lande and you shall see no high lande as all and being so farre shot that this Pan de Matanças shall beare Westnorthwest and Southsoutheast off you and being desirous also to auoyde the furie of the current of the chanell of Bahama stir away Northnortheast and by this course you shall passe the chanell and win the coast of Florida Markes of the head of The Martires called Cabeza de los Martires THe head of The Martires are three heapes of white sande full of trees and that in the midst hath on the top a crowne as it were of white sande and is higher and bigger then the other two and to know whether you be entred into the chanell marke well how the coast lyeth off you and if you perceiue that the coast beareth off you East and West you are not in the chanell but if the coast should beare off you Northeast and Southwest then are you in the chanell and taking your heigth you shall know for if you finde your selfe in 24. degrees and ½ then are you East and West with
our pilot withall for being naturall of those riuers we assured our selues hee knew the way better then any stranger could And indeed but for this chance I thinke we had neuer found the way either to Guiana or backe to our ships for Ferdinando after a few dayes knew nothing at all nor which way to turne yea and many times the old man himselfe was in great doubt which riuer to take Those people which dwell in these broken islands and drownâd lands are generally called Tiuitiuas there are of them two sorts the one called Ciawani and the other Waraweete The great riuer of Orenoque or Baraquan hath nine branches which fall out on the North side of his owne maine mouth on the South side it hâth seuen other fallings into the sea so it disâmbâqueth by sixteâne armes in all betweene Ilands and brokân ground but the Ilands are very great many of them as bigge as the Isle of Wight and bigger and many lesse Fâom the first branch on the North to the last of the South it is at least 100 lâagues so as the riuers mouth is 300 miles wide at his entrance into the sea which I take to be farre bigger then that of Amazones All those that inhabit in the mouth of this riuer vpon the seuerall North branches are these Tiuitiuas of which there are two chiefe lords which haue continuall warres one with the other The Ilands which lie on the right hand are called Pallamos and the land on the left Horotomaka and the riuer by which Iohn Dowglas returned within the land from Amana to Capuri they call Macuti These Tiuitiuas are a very goodly people and very valiant and haue the most manly speech and most deliberate that âuer I heard of what nation soeuer In the Summer they haue houses on the ground as in other places in the Winter they dwell vpon the trees where they build very artificiall townes and villages as it is written in the Spanish story of the Weât Indies that those people do in the low lands nere the gulfe of Vâaba for betweâne May September the riuer of Orenoque riseth thirty foot vpright and then are those ilands ouerflowen twenty foot high aboue the leuell of the ground sauing sâme few raised grounds in the middle of them and for this cause they are inforced to liue in this maner They neuer eat of any thing that is set or sowen and as at home they vse neither planting nor other manurance so when they come abroad they refuse to feed of ought but of that which nature without labour bringeth âorth They vse the tops of Palmitos for bread and kill deere fish and porks for the rest of their sustenance They haue also many sorts of fruits that grow in the woods and great variety of birds and fowle And if to speake of them were not tedious and vulgar surely we saw in thâse passagâs of very rare colours and formes not elsewerâ to be found for as much as I haue either seene or read Of these people those that dwell vpon the branâhes of Orenoque called Capuri and Macurâo are for the most part carpenters of canoas for they make the most and fairest canoas and sel them into Guiana for golde and into Trinidad for tabacco in the âxcessiue taking whereof they exceed all natâons and notwithstanding the mâistnesse of the aire in which they liue the hardnesse of their diet and the great labours they suffer to hunt fish and fâwle for their liuâng in all my life either in the Indies or in Europe did I nâuâr bâhold a more goodly or better fauâurâd pââple or a more manly They werâ woont to make warre vpon all nations and especially on the Canibals so as none durst without a good strângth trade by those riuârs but of late they are at peace with their neighbours all holding the Spaniards for a common enemy When their commandârs die they vse greât lamentation and when they thinke tâe flesh of their bodies is putrified and fallen from the boâes then they take vp the caâcase againe and hang it in the caciques house that died and dââke his scull wâth feathers of all colours and hang all his golde plates about the bones of his armes thighs and legs Thosâ natiâns which are callâd Aâwacas which dwell on the South of Orenoque of whââh place and nation âur Indian pilot was are disperâed in many other places and doe vse to bâ at the bones of their lords into âowder and their wiues and friends drinke it all in their seuerall sorts of drinks After we departed from the port of these Ciawani wee passed vp the riuer with the flood and ankered the ebbe and in this sort we wânt onward Thâ third day that we ântred the riuer our galley came on ground and slucke so fast as we tâought that âuen there âur discâuery had ended and that we must haue left fourescâre and ten of our men to hâue iâhaâited like râoks vpân trees with those nations but the next morning after we had cast out all her âallast with tugging and halling to and fro we got her aflote and went on At fouâe dâyâs ând wee fell into as gâodly a riuer as euâr I beheld which was called The great Amana which rânne mâre dirâctly withâut windings and turnings then the other but soonâ after the flood of the sea left vs and bâing inforced eitâer by maine strength to row against a violent current or to returne aâ wisâ as we went out we had then no shift but to perswade the companies that it was bât two or threâ dayeâ wârke and therefore desired them to take paines euâry gentleman others taking their turnes to row and to spell âne the other at the houres end Euâry day we passed by goodly branches of riuers some falling from the West otheâs froÌ the East into Amana but thosâ I leaue to the dâscription in the Cart of discouery where euery one shal be namâd with his rising and dâscent When three dayes more were ouergone our companies began to despaire the weather being extreamâ hote the riuer bordered with very high trees that kept away the aire and the current against vs âuery day strongâr thân othâr but we euermore commanded our pilots to promise an ende the next day and vsed it so long as we were driuen to assure them from foure reaches of the riuer to three and so to two and so to the next reach but so long we laboured that many dayes were spent and wee driuen to drawe our selues to harder allowance our bread euen at the last and no drinke at all and our men and our selues so wearied and scorched and doubtfull withall whether wee should euer performe it or no the heat increasing as we drew towards the line for wee were now in fiue degrees The further we went on our victuall decreasing and the aire breeding great faintnesse wee grâw weaker and weaker when wee had most need of
will they should aduance the crosse in what part or place of the towne it pleased theâ for he was for the Gouernour Antonio de Berreo who was his master Thereupon the said master of the campe tooke a great crosse and set it on end towarde the East and requested the whole campe to witnesse it and Domingo de vera firmed it thus It is well and firmely done And vnderneath Before me Rodrigo Carança Register of the armie THe first of May they prosecuted the said possession and discouerie to the towne on Carapana From thence the said Master of the campe passed to the towne of Toroco whose principall is called Topiawary being fiue leagues farther within the land then the first Nation and well inhabited And to this principall by meane of the Interpretor they gaue to vnderstand that his Maiestie and the said Corrigidor commanded them to take the possession of that lande and that thây should yeelde their obedience to his Maiestie and to his Corrigidor ând to the master of the campe in his name and that in token therof he would place a crosse in the middle of his towne Whereunto the said Cassique answered they should aduance it with a very good will and that he remained in the obedience of our lord the king and of the said Gouernour Antonio de Berreo whose vassall he would be The fourth of May we came to a Prouince aboue fiue leagues thence of all sides inhabited with much people the principall of this people came and met vs in peaceable maner and he is called Reuato he brought vs to a very large house where he entertained vs well and gaue vs âs much Golde and the interpreter asking him from whence that golde was he answered From a Prouince not passing a dayes iourney off where there are so many Indians as would shadowe the sunne and so much Golde as all yonder plaine will not contâine it In which Countrey when they enter into the Borracheras or their drunken feasts they take of the said Golde in dâst and anoynt themselues all ouer therewith to make the brauer shew and to the end the Golde may couer them they anoynt their bodies with stamped herbes of a glâwy substance they haue warre with those Indians They promised vs that if we would goe vnto them they would ayde vs but they were such iâfinite numbers as no doubt they would kill vs. And being asked how they gat y e same Gold they told vs they went to a certaine Dâwne or playne and pulled or digged vp the grasse by the roote which done they tooke of the earth putting it in great buckets which they caried to wash at the riuer and that which came in powder they kept for their Borraâheras or drunken feaâts and that which was in peeces they wrought into Eagles The âight of May wee went from thânce and marched about fiue leagues at the foote of a Hill wee found a principall called Arataco with three thousand Indians men and women all in peâce and with much victuall as Hennes and Uenison in great abundance and many sortes of wine Hee intreated vs to goe to his house and to rest that night in his Towne being of fiue hundred houses The interpreter asked whence hee had those Hennes he sayde they were brought from a mountaine not passing a quarter of a league thence where were many Indians yeâ so many as grasse on the ground and that these men had the points of their shoulders higher theââhe Crownes of their heads and hâd so many Hennes as was wonderfull and if wee would haue any wee should send them Iewes harpes for they would giue for euâry one two Hennes Wee tooke an Indian and gaue him fiue hundred Harpes the Hennes were so many that hee brought vs as were not to be numbred Wee sayde wee would goe thither they tolde vs they were now in their Borracheras or drunken feasts and would kill vs. Wee asked the Indian that brought the Hennes if it were true hee sayde it was most true Wee asked him how they made their Borracheras or drunken feasts hee sayde they had many Eagles of golde hanging on their breasts and Pearles in their eares and that they daunced being all couered with Golde The Indian sayde vnto vs if wee would see them wee should giue hâm some Hatchets and he would bring vs of those Eagles The Master of the Campe gaue him one Hatchet hee would giue him no more because they should not vnderstand we went to seeke golde he brought vs an Eagle that weighed 27. pounds of good Golde The Master of the Campe tooke it and shewed it to the souldiers and then threw it from him making shewe not to regard it About midnight came an Indian and sayd vnto him Giue mee a Pickeate and I will tell thee what the Indians with the high shoulders meane to doe The Interpreter tolde the Master of the Campe who commanded one to be giuen him hee then tolde vs those Indians were comming to kill vs for our marchandize Hereupon the Master of the Campe caused his company to bee set in order and beganne to march The eleuenth day of May wee went about seuen leagues from thence to a Prouince where wee found a great company of Indians apparelled they tolde vs that if wee came to fight they would fill vp those Plaines with Indians to fight with vs but if wee came in peace wee should enter and bee well entârtained of them because they had a great desire to see Christians and there they tolde vs of all the riches that was I doe not heere set it downe because there is no place for it but it shall appeare by the information that goeth to his Maiestie for if it should heere bee set downe foure leaues of paper would not containe it The Letter of George Burien Britton from the sayde Canaries vnto his cousin a French man dwelling in S. Lucar concerning El Dorado SIr and my very good cousin there came of late certaine Letters from a new discouered countrey not farre from Trinidad which they write hath Golde in great abundance the newes seemeth to bee very certaine because it passeth for good amongst the best of this Citie Part of the information of the Discouery that went to his Maiestie goeth inclosed in Alonsos letters it is a thing worth the seeing The report of Domingo Martinez of Iamaica concerning El Dorado HE sayth that in 1593. being at Carthagena there was a generall report of a late discouery called Nueuo Dorado and that a litle before his comming thither there came a Frigat from the said Dorado bringing in it the portrature of a Giant all of Gold of weight 47. kintals which the Indians there held for their Idoll But now admitting of Christianitie and obedience to the King of Spaine they sent their sayd Idol vnto him in token they were become Christians and held him for their King The company comming in the said Frigat reported Golde to be there in most
consuluisse bono Prouidus excubuit simili discrimine Ioseph Sic fratres fratrem deseruêre suum Fama coloratam designet sibona vestem Vestis Scissa malis sic fuit illa modis Miraleges Auresque animumque tuum arrigeâ Tellus Haec aurum gemmas graminis instar habet Ver ibi perpetuum est ibi prodiga terra quotannis Luxuriat sola fertilitate nocens Anglia nostra licet diâes sit vndique foelix Angliaâ siconfers indigna frugis erit Expertes capitum volucresâ piscesque ferasque Praetereo haud prosunt quae nouitate placent Est ibi vel nusquamâ quod quaerimus Ergo petamus Det Deus hanc Canaan possideamus Amen Tui Amantiss L. K. The second voyage to Guiana MUnday the 26. of Ianuary in the yeere of our Lord 1596. we departed from Portland road in the Darling of London hauing in company the Discouerer a small pinnesse whom we lost at sea in foule weather the Thursday next following Friday the 13. of February wee fell with the Canarie Islands where we expected our pinnesse according to our appoyntmemt seuen or eight dayes Here we tooke two boats the one a passenger we bulged the other wee towed at our shippe sterne steering Southsouthwest for the Islands of Cape Verde Therehence we set saile the 28. of Februarie keeping a Westsouthwest course In this passage wee found very smooth seas faire weather and steddie winds blowing ordinarily betweene the East and Northeast poynts Neere 30. leagues from these Islands wee came into a growne sea the swollen watârs making a strange noise hurtling together as if it might be two strong currents encountring ech other The 12. of March wee sounded and had sandie ground in 47. fathome At midnight in twelue fathom wee came to an anker the ground sandie oaze Sunday the 14. towards night about some siâe leagues from the shore wee descried a low land in the bottome of a Bay From the 9. of March vnââll this time we kept for the most part a Southsouthwest course The water in this place is smooth but muddie and the colour red or tâwny From the Westermost of the Cape Verde-Islands vnto this Bay I doe estimate the distance to be neere 550. leagues It seemed to most of our sea-men to be the very banke of a sâoald vpon a lee-sâore the rather because without it in the cleane greene sea wee had but 7. fathome depth but after by proofe finding that there is no sudden alteration in any part of the coast and that the sea is smoothest neere the land we alwayes at night sought to anker in three or foure fathome And doubtlesse as the hand of God is woonderfull in all his workes so herein his mercifull prouidence is most admirable that vpon a lee-shore subiect vnto a perpetuall Easterly gale neither much wind can endanger shipping by reason that the foule heauie water is not capable of vehement motion and the soft light oaze if they touch cannot bruise them nor is there any ieopardie in beeing wind-bound or imbayed for the most forcible windes make the greatest flood-tides whereby the freshets when they take their ordinarie course of ebbe doe grow strong and swift setting directly off to sea against the wind Wee by turning went cleere of all Bayes howbeit in this case as also in the riuers the vse of a droue sayle seemeth a good and readie helpe The first place wherein wee ankered was in the mouth of Arrowari a faire and great riuer It standeth in one degree and fourtie minutes for we fell so farre to the Southwardes by your lordships direction The barre without hath at the least three fathome at the shoaldest place when it is lowe ebbe The depth within is eight and tenne fathome The water alwayes brackish We found not any inhabitants in this place neere the sea coast I omit here to recite the names of the nations that are borderers their townes Captaines and commodities that their countreys doe yeelde as also the soundings tydes and how the coast lyeth c. thinking it fittest to reduce these disioyned and scattered remembrances to one place As wee passed we alwayes kept the shore within viewe and stopped the floods still ankering at night in three or foure fathome When we came to the North headland of this Bay which wee named Cape Cecyl we sawe two high mountaines like two Islands but they ioyne with the mayne In this tract lying Northnorthwest neere 60. leagues there fall into the sea these seuerall great riuers Arrowari Iwaripoco Maipari Coanawini Caipurogh Wee ankered in two fathome not farre from these hilles and filled all out caske with fresh water by the shippe side for in the sea thirtie miles from the mouth of any riuer it is fresh and good This second Bay extendeth it selfe aboue thirtie leagues to the Westward and containeth within it these riuers Arcooa Wiapoco Wanari Caparwacka Cawo Caian Wia Macuria Cawroor Curaslawini Here leauing the ship at anker I tooke into the boate Iohn Prouost my Indian Interpreter Iohn Linsey and eight or nine others intending to search some of these riuers and to seeke speech with the Indians In Wiapoco at the foote of the Eastermost mountaine where the riuer falleth into the sea wee found twentie or thirtie houses but not inhabited Wee stayed there but one night Wanari we ouerpassed because the entrance is rockie and not deepe In Caperwacka we sailed some fourtie miles but could see no Indian At one of their portes vnder the side of a hill wee tooke in so much Brasill wood as our boate could carrie Amongst other trees we cut downe one for an example which I do verily beleeue to be the same sort of sinamon which is found in the streights of Magellan From Caperwacka wee passed to Cawo and there met with a Canoa wherein were two Indians It was long time before wee could procure them to come neere vs for they doubted least wee were Spanish When my interpreter had perswaded them the contrarie and that wee came from England they without farther speech or delay brought vs to Wareo their Captaine who entertained vs most friendly and then at large declared vnto vs that hee was lately chased by the Spaniards from Moruga one of the neighbour riuers to Raleana or Orenoque and that hauing burnt his owne houâes and destroyed his fruites and gardens hee had left his countrey and townes to bee possessed by the Arwaccas who are a vagabound nation of Indians which finding no certaine place of abode of their owne doe for the most part serue and follow the Spanyards Hee shewed me that he was of the nation of the Iaos who are a mightie people and of a late time were Lords of all the sea coast so farre as Trinidad which they likewise possessed Howbeit that with a generall consent when the Spanyards first began to borrow some of their wiues they all agreed to change their habitation and doe now
herein because so many ships being heere I doubted least they would take order that no Indian should speake with vs. For so indeede it fell out This Captaine of the Cyawannas came likewise to ioyne with vs and had prouided fifteene Canoas for that purpose Their dwelling was lately in Macureo where the Spaniardes one night stealing on them killed twentie of their men and burnt their houses because they refused to trade with them for certaine images of golde made with many heades which they had gotten out of Guiana I sent a present of Yron to Carapana and then set sayle In turning downe the riuer wee spent eight dayes In many places where the chanell lyeth wee found twentie fathome depth where it is sholdest wee had two fathome and a halfe and that but in one or two places Of the worthinesse of this Riuer because I cannot say ynough I will speake nothing Wee haue presumed to call it by the name of Raleana because youâ selfe was the first of our nation that euer entred the fame and I thinke it nothing inferiour to Amazones which is best knowen by the name of Oâellana the first discoueâer thereof By turning onely without helpe of oares to passe so long away in so short a time against the winde may sufficiântly prooue that the chanell is very large good and likâly to âecond our hopes in all that wee can desire Without the mouth of this Riuer our Pinnesâe the Discoueâer whome wee lost neere the coast of England came vnto vs. Shee fell with this land somewhat to the Southwarde of Cape Cecyl and had spânt three weekes and odde dayes in ranging alongst the coast when shee mette with vs. William Downe the Master informed mee that they entred and searched these foure riuers In Wâapoco they sayled so farre vntill the rockes stopped their passage In Caiane they went vp one dayes iourney In Cunanama they found many inhabitantes Curitini was the last Riuer they had beene in Whence hauing no other meanes to finde Raleana they were inforced to borrow a Pilot against his will whom afterwardes I would haue returned with reward to his contentment buâ he would not Our English that to steale the first blessing of an vntraded place will peâhaps secretly hasten thither may bee beholding to mee for this caueat if they take notice thereof They may bee assured that this people as they no way sought our harme but vsed our men with all kindnesse so are they impatient of such a wrong as to haue any of their people peâforce taken from them and will doubtlesse seeke reuenge The example of the like practise vpon the coast of Guinie in the yeere 1566 and againe at Dominica where Alderman Wars his shippe hardly escaped being taken may serue for our warning in like case to looke for no good before they bee satiâfied for this iniury When wee had taken aboorde vs such victuals as were in the Pinnesse wee set fire in her for her Rudder could serue her to no longer vse and stopping the floodes plyed to windwarde with the ebbe neere the shoare vntill wee were sixteene leagues to the Easâwarde of thâ Riuers mouth and then standing off to Sea wee fell in twentie foure houres sayling with Punta de Galera the Northeastermost part of Trinidad But hauing Tobaco-isâand in sight wee first went thither This Island is plentifull of all things and a very good soyle It is not nowe inhabited because the Charibes of Dominica are euill neighbours vnto it They of Trinidad haue a meaning and purpose to flie thither when no longer they can keepe Trinidad Their onely doubt is that when they are seatâd there the Spaniard will seeke to possesse it also The Gouernour of Margarita went lately in a Pinnesse to viewe this Island Gilbert my Pilot who sometime liued there noteth it for the best and fruitfullest ground that hee knoweth Thence wee returned to Punta de Galera and ancored in tenne fathome vnder the North side of the Island some fiue or sixe miles from the sayde point The flood-tyde striketh alongst the the coast to the Eastward very strongly Wee discharged a peece of ordinance and afterwards went to the shoore in our boat but no Indian came vnto us I would haue sent Iohn of Trinidad to procure some of them to speake with us but he was altogether vnwilling alleaging that their dwellings were faire within the mountaines and that hee knewe no part of that side of the Island From this place we set sayle for Santa Lucia but fell with Granata which wee found noâ inhabited Saint Vincent we hardly recouered by turning vnder the Ice of the island The Tabaco of this place is good but the Indians being Canibals promising vs store and delaying vs from day to day sought onely oportunitie to betray take and eate vs as lately they had deuoured the whole companie of a French shippe This their treacherie being by one of their slaues reuealed from thenceforth they did all forbeare to come vnto vs. To sit downe on their lowâ stooles when they by offering such ease will seeme to shewe curtesie abodeth death to strangers that shall trust them At Matalino or Martinino we found not any inhabitants Lastly wee came to Dominica where we could get no good Tabaco But hauing intelligence of a Spanish shippe that was taking in of fresh water at the Northwest side of the Island wee wayed ancor to seeke him Hâe discrying vs stole away by night The Indians of this place haue detârmined to remooue and ioyne with them of Guanipa against the Spaniardes who lately diâpeopled one of their Islands and at our being there one of their Canoas returned from Guanipa and certified vs that the tenne Spanish shippes at Trinidad doe ride some of them at Conquerabia the rest at the small Ilands neere the disemboging place Herehence we steeâed North and by East taking the directest course to shorten our way homewards Thus haue I emptied your purse spending my time and trauell in following your lordships dirâctions for the full discoueriâ of this coast and the riuers thereof Concerning the not mâking of a voyage for your priuate profite I pretend nothing Sorie I am that where I sought no excuse by the Spaniardes being there I found my defect remeâilesse And for mine owne part I doe protâst that if the consideration of the publique good that may ensue had not ouer poyled all other hopes and desires I would rather haue aduentured by such small and weake meanes as I had to doe well with danger then to returne onely with safetie Nowe although in a cause not doubtsull my allegation is no way needeâull yet because the weightnesse thereof and the expectation of others seemeth of due and right to claime something to bee sayde by mee whome your especiall trust and âauour hath credited and graced with this employment Pardon it I beseech your honour if where my lampe had oyle it borrow light also and my âpeach which is
whereof and of the setting together of a pinnesse which they were about the French admiral and the carauel stayed behind So wee in the Watte and the other 6. ships weyed the 10. of Februarie and stood away for the isle of Mayo This night the other two French shippes that came from Sal with vs as it seemeth of purpose because their consorts were not with them lost vs. The next morning wee sawe Maio. So wee and the flieboate of Dartmouth compassed the Northermost part of the Island and master Beniamin Wood in the China-fleete the Southermost and came all to an anker together at the Southwest part thereof where rode sixe sayles oâ Flemmings lading salte who had brought their horses and cartes and wheele-barrowes and plankes for their barrowes to runne vpon Here is abundance of salte in this Island made by Gods hande without mans labour These tolde vs that there were thirtie sayles more which fell to leeward of Fogo who as I heard since beat it vp with much adoe came thither also for salte This trade may bee very beneficiall to England considering the dearnesse of salte Of goates on this Island there is such store as is incredible but to those that haue seene them and it is a wonder howe they liue one by the other the ground being stonie and barren It is thought that there are dwelling in it some twentie Mountainiers which got one of the Flemmings men stragling and God knowâth what they did with him for they sawe him no more This Island is somewhat lowe and round hauing no great mountaines vpon it Here ended our determination concerning the inuading of Fogo And here wee leât the flie-boat of Dartmouth lading salte and the China-fleete to refresh themselues with goates who as I haue heard since had at the village from whence the Mountainiârs were fledde into the furthest partes of the Island and rocks great store of dryed goates which they carried along with them which wâre like to bee a great helpe vnto them in their long voyage So vpon Saturday the 12 of Februarie at night wee set saile and stood for the coast of Wiana which wee were bound for Upon Sunday the twentieth of Februarie wee came into the maine current that setteth from the Cape of Buena Esperança along the coast of Brasil and so toward the West Indies for the most part setting away Northwest The Tuesday night following whereas before our course was Westsouthwest wee stoode away West and by South by reason wheâeof and of the current that set vs to the Northward wee were the next day by noone twentie minutes further to the Northward then the day before So that then wee lay away Southwest because wee were loath to fall to the Northward of our place intended which if wee should bee put to leeward of there was small hope left to recouer it By Thursday wee were within out degree ½ of the Equinoctiall line therefore this day wee halled away West and by South and West among This night wee âounded but had no ground at 90 fathoms The next day in the morning the colour of the water began to change and to bee more white so wee made another sound and had ground at thirtie fathoms but saw no lande and in the afternoone wee halled away Westnorthwest Northwest and Northnorthwest In the night wee sounded diuers times and had twelue ten and nine fathoms water All Saturday wee had a thick red water and had seuen and eight fathoms both day and night and vpon Sunday morning by day being the seuen and twentieth of Februarie wee made the lande which appeared lowe and trended neerest as we fell with it South and by East North and by West about two degrees ½ toward the North. Right on head of vs was a Cape or headland so that had wee beene shot a little further into the bay the winde being more Northerly wee should hardly haue doubled it off For with much adoe making many boords and stopping euery tyde it was the Tuesday following before wee cleered our selues of the bay and recouâred the Cape Nowe the lande trended Northwest and by North and Southeast and by South And still wee were faine to anker euery tyde sometimes in foure fathoms and sometimes in three as farre as wee could see lând So about night we sawe Cape Cecill and after some two houres came to an anker Betweene these two Capes the lande lyeth âowe and euen Upon Wednesday morning hauing the winde large at Eastnortheast wee layd it away vpon a board into the bay of Wiapoucou and came to an anker in the riuers mouth in two fathoms ouer the barre there is little water as 6 and 7 foote and lesse in many places And this riuer of Wiapoucou standeth almost in 4 degrees to the Northward of the line The next morning wee weyed and standing in with our pinnesse by night wee got some eight leagues vp the riuer This day sometimes wee had but 5 âoote water and drew 7 foot but being soft oaze we went cleere and a little before wee came to anker wee were on ground vpon a rocke but with some trouble and labour wee got off and had no hurt Upon Friday the 4 of March towards night wee came to the falles The next day M. Leonard Berrie our captaine the Master my selfe and some 5 more went through the woods and spent all the day in searching the head of the falles but could not finde it for though wee passed by many yet were there more still one aboue the other So that finding no Indians in this riuer to buy victuals of neither any kind of thing that might intice vs to come to so short allowance as we must haue done if wee had spent any long time here finding it ouer hard to passe the falles wee fell downe the riuer againe and by Friday the 11 of March wee cleered our selues of the riuer and bay This riuer from the mouth to the falles is some 16 leagues in many places a mile ouer but for the most part halfe a mile There are many Islands in it as are also in most of the riuers vpon the coast This night wee ankered against Cawo in two fathoms whereinto wee thought to haue put with our pinnesse but found the water so shoald and the sea so growân that neither with our shippe nor shallope wee durst goe in On Saturday by noone wee came to anker vnder one of the 7 Islands vpon which going on shoare wee found neither man nor beast but great store of yellow plumbes which are good to eate Upon Sunday after dinner our Master William Dowle and 6 more went off with our boat to a towne called Aramatto where they found many inhabitants and brought victuals and some Tabacco with them and one Indian named Caprima who lying aboord all night the next day being Munday the 14 of March went with our Captaine into Wias and there traded with the
our ship of the harmes and leakes which the wormes had made in her while wee ridde at the yland of S. Sebastian and in the meane time we departed from before the towne of Santos Our Master sent his skiffe from the barre of Santos thinking to haue brought Thomas Babington and William Euet with the Pilot which wee had âarried for three dayes and as the skiffe was going William Euet being by the Riuers side called to our pinnesse and sent a letter to our Master which Thomas Babington had written wherein were no newes but that the Ministrador was arriued at Santos from the Riuer of Ienero and would speake with our Master but he willed that whatsoeuer Thomas Babington did write no credit should be giuen to it And further he wished vs presently to depart for Sant Sebastian and there to dispatch our businesse and then to sende backe for Babington and himselfe to Guaybea where he if he were well would giue his attendance to come abord As we rid two leagues a sea-bord the barre of Santos wee broke a cable in the open sea which happened the 15. day of this moneth We arriued at S. Sebastian the 15. day and there shifted our balast and had in stones and halled our ship a ground to stop our leakes caried our caske a shoare to be hooped for water which indeed might better haue bene done in Santos before the Ministrador came thither yet we finished all things pertaining to our ship by the 22. of this moneth at S. Sebastian The first day of Iuly Thomas Babington came abord with William Euet in our pinnesse and the rest of our men that went for them but there was no Pilot brought according to promise to cary vs to Baya The things that we obserued and noted in the time of our being at Santos were these All such wares and marchandizes as owe no custome in Brasill their vse is to set a price vpoâ the same how they shal be sold which is done by the magistrates of the towne according to the ordinances of their king But for all such marchandizes as do owe custome there the marchants are to sell them according as they may to the greatest profit and aduantange that they can Concerning the prouince of Peru wee learned that one part of it by land water is but twelue dayes iourney from the towne of Santos and from thence it may be about foure or fiue dayes iourney by water to the maine riuer of Plate From the head of the riuer of Plate and from their chiefe townes there they doe trade and trafique by lând into Peru by waggons and horses or mules The saide riuer of Plate is so full of sands and dangers and the fresh to fierce sometimes that no shipping dares to deale with it small barks to their knowledge may go vp it and not els The Portugales here cannot bee suffered to vse their Mines of treasure in these parts vpon paine of death the contrary being commanded by the king and the Uice-roy who is as their king in place of authoritie About twentie leagues from Santos there is a certaine kinde of wilde Sauages lying in the mountaines which are in friendship with the Portugales and they haue continuall warres with certaine other Sauages that dwell towards the borders of Peru which is distant from Santos about 400. or 500. leagues Those Sauages of Peru haue store of gold and siluer but they knowe not the vse of it Looke what Sauages of their enemies they take they sell them to the Portugales for kniues combes ares or hatchets and other ârifles they will sell one for a pennie-knife to a Portugal and after two yeeres they are worth twentie or thirtie duckets to the Portugal This people haue also continuall warres with the Spaniards and this was tolde vs by one of those Sauages which hath âwelt among the Portugales these seuen yeeres with his master called Sennor Manoel Veloso And this fellowe âould willingly haue come with vs for England There are certaine rockes that lie off betweene the yle of Alcatrarzas and S. Sebastian about two leagues which are to be taken heed of which a farre off in faire weather shewe like the sailes of ships There are other rocks that lie off S. Catelina also fiue leagues to the East and by South into the sea off the yland At our comming vp to Santos we found foure fadom and a halfe water in the shallowest place and the like we found within a league after we were departed from S. Catelina litle more or lesse but after you haue runne in the depth of foure fadome and a halfe about a mile or lesse then you shall haue it deeper againe more and more Before the towne of Santos we rode in eight and tenne fadome water A letter of Francis Suares to his brother Diego Suares dwelling in Lisbon written from the riuer of Ienero in Brasill in Iune 1596. concerning the exceeding rich trade newly begunne betweene that place and Peru by the way of the riuer of Plate with small barks of 30. and 40. tunnes SIr we set saile from Lisbon the fourth of April 1596. and arriued here in this riuer oâ Ienero the twentie seuenth of Iune next ensuing And tâe same day the Visitadores did visit our ship with great ioy thinking that those commodities which wee brought with vs had bene for the marchants of this countrey but it prooued to the contrary The pilot brought with him in the sayd shippe two pipes of wine which were taken from him and solde by the Iustice for foure and twenty reals euery gallon But I solde mine for two and thirty and sixe and thirty reals the gallon If I had brought any great store of wine I should haue made a great gaine of it for I should haue gotten eight reals for one The next day in the morning wee went all on shore and gaue God thanks for our prosperous voyage and good successe which he had sent vs. And because the gouernour of this countrey was gone from this Towne to another house of his three leagues vp into the riuer beyond the place where we rode at anker I desired the captaine of our shippe after dinner that we might take the shippe boat and goe to the place where the gouernour did lie And so going vp the riuer we met with a canoa which was comming downe the riuer and going aboord our shippe which canoa was laden with fresh victuals and in the same was one Portugall which met vs and tolde vs that the gouernour of that captaine shippe had sent vs a present which we receiued very thankefully and sent it aboord And we went vp the riuer to the place where the gouernour did dwell and comming to the place where we landed hard by the the riuers side the gouernour came thither and receiued vs very courteously So we remained at his house two dayes talking of many matters of Portugall then we departed from him
Nouember Take this aduise that if thou depart in February or March from Lisbone then thou shalt goe to beare with the land in nine degrees because that from March forwards raigne most commonly Southeast and Southwest windes And if by this height and course thou bring thy selfe nigh to the shore feare not to bring thy ship into 18 or 20 fadomes for all the coast is cleane and there are no more dangers but such as the sea doth breake vpon And if after thy fall with the land thou haue occasion to goe to the Northward and so going seest certaine sholdes doubt not to come for the North and thou shalt see the cape of Saint Augustine which lyeth as it were sloaping to the seaward and hath as it were a Whales head and hath vpon it a round hill with many hilles round about it And if thou come along the sea coast much about the depth aboue mentioned thou shalt see a little Island called Saint Alexio And from this Island to the cape of Saint Augustine are foure leagues and it standeth in eight degrees and three quarters The course that a man must keepe to the bay called A Bahia de Todos os Santos that is to say The bay of all Saints which lieth on the foresayd coast of Brasil IF thou goe for Bahia de Todos os Santos thou must keepe the course which I haue already set downe and shalt obserue the time from March forwards as also from October forwards Thou shalt vnderstand that the Bahia de Todos os Santos standeth in 13 degrees and â
and if thou goe in October or after October then goe to fall with the land in 12 degrees or 12 and a halfe And take this for a warning that when thou seest a white land and long bankes of white sand which shew much like linnen cloth when it is in whiting then thou must go along from the North to the South vntill this white land doe end and thou needest not to feere to goe along the coast for there are no sholds Before thou be cleane past the white land or white sands thou shalt haue sight of an Island that standeth along the bay I say on the Northside of the bay which is called Tapaon and here the land lieth West and by South When thou art so farre shot as Tapaon thou shalt see a certaine great tree which is round and standeth neere the sea vpon the very point of the entrance into Bahia on the Northside And marke well that if thou looke to the Southward and seest no white grounds such as I wrote of before but that they be all behind thee to the Northward then when thou seest none to the Southward thou mayest bee bold to beare in with Bahia And if when thou goest into Bahia to the Northwest and seest the sea to breake feare nothing for it is the breach of a certaine banke whereon thou shalt haue alwayes 5 or 6 fadomes water and this be sure of Thou shalt vnderstand that if thou come for this place from March to the end of April I would wish thee not to fall to the Southward of 13 degrees and a halfe And falling with the land and not seeing the white sands thou shalt striue to goe to the Northward And seeing the land in 13 degrees and a halfe thou shalt haue sight of an hill along the sea And if thou be nigh the land and cannot make it certaine what land it is thou shalt marke if it bee a round high hill along the sea that it is O morro de San Paulo or The hill of Saint Paul and it lieth blacke and bare on the top And from thence to Bahia is tenne leagues And here along this hill on the Northwest side there is a great riuer called Tinsare and it is a very good riuer And in the entrance of Bahia there are sixe or seuen fadomes water in the chanell And I aduise thee that being in the height of 13 degrees and a halfe thou come not neere the land for it hath a bay very dangerous And if thou goe from Bahia to Fernambuck then I aduise thee that thou take good heede of the coast on the Northeast and Southwest and thou shalt goe East if the winde will suffer thee to goe East and so goe thirtie or forty leagues off to the sea I aduise thee that thou beare not in with the land of Fernambuck but in the height of 9 or 10 degrees because that in 11 degrees thou shalt fall with the bay called A Enseada de Vazabaris Also if thou come from Portugal and fallest with the land in eleuen degrees beare not in with it neither come neere it for thou mayest hurt thy selfe in so doing but thou shalt shunne it and goe to the Southward For if thou lie to the North thou shalt bring thy selfe into some trouble This Bay of All Saints standeth in thirteene degrees And from thence to Fernambuck thou hast a hundreth leagues and the coast lyeth Northeast and Southwest And from thence to Rio das Ilhas that is the riuer of the Islands the coast runneth Northeast and Southwest I meane taking a quarter of the North and South The course for Baia das Ilhas that is The bay of the Islands which lie on the sayd coast of Brasil the marks for the finding of them IF thou goe for Baia das Ilhas thou must looke for it in fifteene degrees lacking a quarter If thou be minded as I sayd to goe for these Isles if it bee from March forward thou shalt fall with the land in 15 degrees and a halfe and though it be in 15 degrees and 2 3 it is all the better And if thou haue sight of certaine high hilles that seeme to reach to the skie these hilles are called As Serras Raiemores Then hauing sight of these hilles thou shalt goe along the coast and feare nothing for there are no sholdes along to the North. And when thou seest the Islands thou mayest make accompt they be these which thou seekest for there are no other on al this coast and thou shalt see a round hil along the sea Thou shalt vnderstand that on the North side of this hill is the going in of the riuer But if it chance that thou finde thy selfe in a time that will not suffer thee to goe in then goe along the Islands giuing them a bredth off And thou mayest well come to an ankor hard aboord them for all is cleane ground And thou shalt finde eight or nine fadomes and from thence thou mayest goe into the riuer hard aboord the shore And if it chance that thou goe from the North to the South all along the great Island thou must keepe thy selfe from the land and when thou hast brought it Eastnortheast then thou mayest ankor two cables length from the shore for all is cleane ground If thou chance to arriue on this coast
in the time of the Northeast windes thou shalt seeke to fall with the land in foureteene degrees And if thou see a lowe land thou mayest make accompt it is the land called Ciemana and then thou shalt see Mangues And also thou shalt come along this coast to the South and when thou seest an ende of the low land then thou shalt finde an high land along the sea like the other that I haue made mention of before that is all sandie along the sea coast And thou must vnderstand that where the high land beginneth there is a little riuer called Rio das Contas but enter not into it it hath for a marke to be knowen by as it were a white mouth And from thence to the Islands thou hast nine leagues And at the ende of this high land to the Southward of it thou shalt find a great bay within the land then thou shalt looke to the Westsouthwest and shalt see another high land which lieth as it were in the middest of the bay and thou shalt there see certaine white houses which are the Ingenios or houses wherein they make sugar of Lucas Giraldo From thence thou shalt see the Isles being so farre shotte as Rio de Contas And thou shalt see within the land a round hill which is like Monte de laude and it hath another copple on the South side The course to sayle to Porto Seguro that is to say The safe hauen lying on the foresayd coast of Brasil the markes to know the same by IF thou goe for Porto Seguro and goest in the time of the Southeast windes which is from March forwards I aduise thee that thou fall not in more degrees then sixteen and a halfe because of the sholdes called Os baixos dos Abrolhos which are very dangerous and stretch very farre into the sea And also going West from them that thou keepe thy lead going and be often sounding And if thou chance to see the land and an high hill and long withall much like to The pike it is the hill that is called Monte Pasqual And from thence thou must goe to the North and when thou hast brought it Southwest of thee then thou mayest beare with the land but with great care to looke about thee Marke when thou seest the land and commest to see a red cliffe then looke to the Southward and thou shalt see a great smooth coast along the sea and then on the North side thou shalt deserue Porto Seguro And going along the coast thou shalt see the towne of Porto Seguro standing vpon the toppe of an hill which hill is a white rocke and on the North side of the sayd rocke there is a very hie land I aduise thee that when thou art East and West with the sayd land I meane with this rocke that then thou looke to the Northward and thou shalt see certaine rocks lying two leagues off into the sea whereon the sea doth breake and to the Southward of them thou mayest come to an ankor against the towne and hast a good place to ride in thirteen fadomes in sight of the towne And if it be thy chance to arriue in the time of the Northeast winds and commest in the height of fifteene degrees and two third parts and seest not certaine hilles then thou must goe along the coast being in 16 degrees and vnder the first hie land that thou shalt descrie thou shalt see certaine sandie bayes along the sea coast And if thou haue sight of a riuer in this height put not thy selfe into it neither beare with the land for it hath many sholdes And off them lie certaine sunken grounds called Os Baixos de Santo Antonio And from hence to the Southward lyeth Porto Seguro I aduise thee that going along the coast to the Southward and seeing such sholdes and the sea to breake vpon them as the other which I last spake of thou shalt runne along them a sea boord of them and when thou art at the end of them then the towne will beare West of thee and then thou mayest goe to thine ankoring place as is abouesayd giuing these sholds a good birth The course to the hauen named Baia do Spirito Santo that is to say The bay of the holy Ghost lying on the sayd coast of Brasil and the markes thereof THou shalt vnderstand that the ship that goeth for Spirito Santo when it hath doubled the sholdes called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos and hath brought it selfe in 20 or 19 degrees and a halfe then it may hall with the land in 18 or 19 degrees and a halfe and in twentie And the sayd shippe must goe in this height because on this coast there are no Monçoins If thou chance to come in the height of 19 degrees ½ and seest lowe land to the Northwest off thee then thou art on the North side of Spirito Santo and thou mayest make accompt that it is the land lying ouer Criquare and ouer the riuer called Rio dolce that is the riuer of sweete or fresh water If thou come along the land thou shalt find certaine high hilles but trust not the first that thou seest only For besides the rest thou shalt see a round hie hill which is at the capes end which is called la Sierra de mestre Aluaro Take heede that going for this land thou looke to the North and thou shalt see a riuer called Rio dos Reyes Magos that is The riuer of the three kings And comming to the Southward thou shalt see presently the mouth of the bay to open At the end of this hill on the South side thou hast a point of a rocke which is called A punta do Tubaron And on the South side of the bay it hath two or three blacke hie hilles and in the middest of the bay thou shalt goe in westward I aduise thee that in going in thou take heede of a sholde which lieth in the mouth of the bay thou must leaue it to the Southward of thee and then plie to double a certaine Island which lieth within and thou must leaue it to the Northward of thee and when it beareth on the North or Northeast thou mayest come to an ankor for all is cleane ground And if thou chance to come by this course and fallest in 20 degrees and seest many hilles and one among the rest very high and craggie it is called A Sierra de Guariparim that is the hill of Guaraparim and seest another hill on the North side which is called A Sierra de Pero Cam both these lie on the South side of Spirito Santo And from these hils thou shalt see a little hill named Guaipel And when thou seest these hilles thou shalt see three little Islands together lying to the Southward And then from these thou shalt see another rockie bare and round Island and to the land off this Island
for this containeth fortie leagues in length From this you must enter by the mouth of the riuer of Palmas vnto Santo Spirito the way is fiftie leagues you are to passe still along the cliffes As you enter on the left hand which is on the West shore vp this riuer there are many Isles lakes and small riuers and many Indians which are your enemies From Santo Spirito vnto a people which are called Los Tenbuis is fifteene leagues This is by the narrow arme whereby they passe into the riuer Parana it is the more because it is the longer way From the Tenbuis by this narrow arme vpward vnto the Quiloacas which is another nation are twentie leagues and all vp this riuer is great store of people From the Quiloacas to a place where the Spaniards now haue builded a towne are fifteene leagues From this towne vnto the people called Los Mequaretas is twentie leagues Here are many sholds which continue thirtie leagues All these thirtie leagues are sunken landes where are many Isles flats and nations which are our enemies From the Mâquaretas vnto the people called Mepenes are these thirtie leagues And from hence begin the coasts of the âirme land vnto the mouth of the riuer Paraguai sauing that there are eight leagues more of sunken ground From the Mepenes vnto the mouth of the riuer of Paraguai are thirtie leagues it is a riuer that cannot be mistaken although it hath many armes and Iâlands and dangers it hath a marke two leagues beneath the mouth on the East side to witâ an high land where are 7 points which we call the 7 currents and immediatly aboue these curâents there is an Island as you passe vp the riuer ouer against the poynt aforâsaid standeth the mouth of Paraguai This mouth is very plaine to be found in seeking whereof a man cannot be deceiued From this mouth the riuer of Parana is diuided which is a very great riuer and it goeth vnto the towne of Piquiri which is an hundred and seuentie leagues and it runneth all this space North and South and in the way are many flats and shealds and great store of people which are a bad nation although they bee diuided From the place where these two riuers are diuided that is to say ârom the mouth of Paraguai are sixtie leagues vnto the citie of Assumption This is a good riuer and better to sayle then all the rest of the riuers which are in this countrey And from this towne to Los Xaraes are 200. leagues very well inhabited with people of diuers natiâns which serue the Spanyards THE TWO FAMOVS VOYAGES HAPPILY perfourmed round about the world by Sir Francis Drake and M. Thomas Candish Esquire together with the rest of our English voyages intended for the South Sea the kingdomes of Chili Peru the backe side of Nueua Espanna the Malucos the Philippinas the mightie Empire of China though not so happily perfourmed as the two former Whereunto are annexed certaine rare obseruations touching the present state of China and the kingdome of Coray lately inuaded by Quabacondono the last Monarch of the 66. princedomes of Iapan The famous voyage of Sir Francis Drake into the South sea and therehence about the whole Globe of the earth begun in the yeere of our Lord 1577. THe 15. day of Nouember in the yeere of our Lord 1577. M. Francis Drake with a fleete of fiue ships and barkes and to the number of 164. men gentlemen and sailers departed from Plimmouth giuing out his pretended voyage for Alexandria but the wind falling contrary hee was forced the next morning to put into Falmouth hauen in Cornewall where such and so terrible a tempest tooke vs as few men haue seene the like and was in deed so vehement that all our ships were like to haue gone to wracke but it pleased God to preserue vs from that extremitie and to afflict vs onely for that present with these two particulars The mast of our Admirall which was the Pellican was cut ouer boord for the safegard of the ship and the Marigold was driuen ashore and somewhat bruised for the repairing of which damages wee returned againe to Plimmouth and hauing recouered those harmes and brought the ships againe to good state we set forth the second time from Plimmouth and set saile the 13. day of December following The 25. day of the same moneth we fell with the Cape Cantin vpon the coast of Barbarie and coasting along the 27. day we found an Island called Mogador lying one mile distant from the maine betweene which I stand and the maine we found a very good and safe harbour for our ships to ride in as also very good entrance and voyde of any danger On this Island our Generall erected a pinnesse whereof he brought out of England with him foure already framed While these things were in doing there came to the waters side some of the inhabitants of the countrey shewing foorth their flags of truce which being seene of our Generall hee sent his ships boate to the shore to know what they would they being willing to come aboord our men left there one man of our company for a pledge and brought two of theirs aboord our ship which by signes shewed our General that the next day they would bring some prouision as sheepe capons and hennes and such like whereupon our Generall bestowed amongst them some linnen cloth and shooes and a iaueling which they very ioyfully receiued and departed for that time The next morning they failed not to come againe to the waters side and our Generall againe setting out our boate one of our men leaping ouer rashly ashore and offering friendly to imbrace them they set violent hands on him offering a dagger to his throte if hee had made any resistance and so laying him on a horse caried him away so that a man cannot be too circumspect and warie of himselfe among such miscreants Our pinnesse being finished wee departed from this place the 30. and last day of December and coasting along the shore wee did descrie not contrary to our expectation certaine Canters which were Spanish fishermen to whom we gaue chase and tooke three of them and proceeding further we met with 3. Carauels and tooke them also The 17. day of Ianuary we arriued at Cape Blanco where we found a ship riding at anchor within the Cape and but two simple Mariners in her which ship we tooke and caried her further into the harbour where we remained 4. dayes and in that space our General mustered and trayned his men on land in warlike maner to make them fit for all occasions In this place we tooke of the Fishermen such necessaries as wee wanted and they could yeeld vs and leauing heere one of our litle barkes called the Benedict wee tooke with vs one of theirs which they called Canters being of the burden of 40. tunnes or thereabouts All these things being finished
when the Indians had well eaten and drunke they departed thence and going somewhat farre from them one of the Indians cryed to them and sayde Magallanes Esta he minha Terra that is Magallanes this is my countrey and because the Englishmen followed them it seemed the Indians fledde vpward into the land and beeing somewhat farre off they turned backe againe and with their arrowes slewe two of the English shippers one being an Englishman the other a Netherlander the rest came backe againe and saued themselues in the boate wherewith they presently put off from the shore Here they stayed till the seuenteenth of August vpon the which day they set saile running along by the coast about a league and a halfe from the land for there it is all faire and good ground at twentie and fiue and twentie fathome deepe and were about foure or fiue dayes before they came to the mouth or entrie of the Streight but because the wind was contrary they stayed till the 24 of August before they entred The entrie or mouth of the Streight is about a league broad on both sides being bare and flatte land on the North side they sawe Indians making great fires but on the Southside they saw no people stirring The foure and twentieth day aforesayd they beganne to enter into the Streight with an Eastnortheast wind This Streight may bee about an hundred and tenne leagues long and in bredth a league About the entry of the Streight and halfe way into it it tunneth right foorth without any windings or turnings and from thence about eight or tenne leagues towards the ende it hath some boutes and windings among the which there is one so great a hooke or headland that it seemed to runne into the other land and there it is lesse then a league broad from one land to the other and from thence forward it runneth straight out againe And although you finde some crookings yet they are nothing to speake of The issue of the Streight lieth Westward and about eight or tenne leagues before you come to the ende then the Streight beguineth to bee broader and it is all high land to the ende thereof after you are eight leagues within the Streight for the first eight leagues after you enter is low flat land as I sayd before and in the entrie of the Streight you find the streame to runne from the South sea to the North sea And after they began to saile in with the Eastnortheast wind being entred they passed along without any let or hinderance either of wind or weather and because the high land on both sides lay couered with snow and that all the Streight is faire and cleare they helde their course a harquebuse-shot in length from off the North side hauing nine and tenne fathome depth with good ground as I said before where if neede require a man may anker the hilles on both sides being full of trees some of the hilles and trees reaching downe to the sea side in some places hauing plaine and euen land and there they sawe not any greât riuers but some small riuers that issued out of the riffes and breaches of the land and in the countrey where the great Cape or crooking is on the South side they saw certaine Indian fishermen in their Canoas or skiffs being such as they saw first on the North side but more people they saw not on the South side Being out of the Streight on the other side vpon the sixt of September of the aforesaid yeere they held their course Northwest for the space of three dayes and the third day they had a Northeast wind that by force draue them Westsouthwest which course they held for the space of ten or twelue dayes with few sailes vp and because the wind began to be very great they toâke in all their sailes and lay driuâng till the last of September The 24 day of the same moneth hauing lost the sight of one of their shippes which was about an hundred tunne then againe they hoised saile because the winde came better holding their course Northeast for the space of seuen dayes and at the ende of the sayde seuen dayes they had the sight of certayne Islands which they made towards for to anker by them but the weather would not permit them and being there the wind fell Northwest whereupon they sailed Westsouthwest The next day they lost the sight of another ship of their company for it was very foule weather so that in the ende the Admirals shippe was left alone for the ship of Nuno da Silua was left in the Bay where they wintered before they entred into the Streights and with this foule weather they ranne till they were vnder seuen and fiftie degrees where they entred into a hauen of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great piece from the land at twentie fathome deepe where they stayed three or foure dayes and the wind comming Southward they weyed anker holding their course Northward for the space of two daies and then they espied a small vnhabited Island where being arriued they stroke sailes and hoised out their boate and there they tooke many birds and Seales The next day they set saile againe holding their course Northnortheast and North to another Island lying fiue or sixe leagues from the firme land on the Northside of the Streight where they ankered about a quarter of a league from the land in twelue fathome water This Island is small and lowe land and full of Indians the Island being altogether possessed and inhabited by them where they hoysed out their boate wherein the Admirall and twelue Englishmen entred going to fetch fresh water and to seeke for victuals and being landed vpon the Island the Indians in exchange of other things brought two Spanish sheepe and a little Maiz or rootes whereof they make bread and because it was late they returned againe vnto their ship without doing any other thing for that day The next day the said Captaine with the aforesaid twelue men being harquebusiers rowed to land againe and set two of their company on shore with their vessels to fetch fresh water and by the place where they should fill their water there lay certaine Indians secretly hidden that fell vpon the two Englishmen and tooke them which they in the boat perceiuing went out to helpe them but they were so assailed with stones arrowes that all or the most part of them were hurt the Captaine himselfe being wounded with an arrow on the face and with another arrow in the head whereby they were constrained to tuâne backe againe without once hurting any of the Indians and yet they came so neere the boate that they tooke foure of their oares from them This done they set saile againe running along the coast with a South winde sailing so for the space of sixe dayes passing by the hauen called Sant Iago and put into another hauen and
Eastsoutheast till sixe a clocke at night that wee sawe the lande of Guinie which bare Northeast of vs about 12 leagues off which seene wee sounded and had no ground then went I and our Master and Pilot aboord the Admirall and after mâny debatements concluded to run in Northeast by East and at eleuen at night wee came aboord againe and went all night Northeast by East The 4 at eight a clocke in the forenoone wee were within 2 leagues of the lande which bare off vs Northeast which rose like a hill full of woods and on each side low land wee being perswaded by our pilots that it was the entrance into Sierra leona went in Northeast vntill wee were within an halfe league of the shoar and had brought thâ South point Southeast by East off vs. At eleuen a clocke finding it a bay and not Sierra leona wee brought our tacks aboord and stoode along West by North and West larboord tacked In this time our Admirals pinnesse rowed in and went on land vpon the South side of the bay and the Elizabeths boate with her They found houses of boughes and in one of the houses the tongue of a beast and a bullocks tongue fresh killed also a lake with plentie of fresh water and fresh-water-fish in it had by the sea side they found drie pomegranates and pease like nurs with other vnknowen fruites vnder the trees The Elizabeth ranne in and brought the South poinâ South by West of her and ankered within Faulcon shot of the shore in seuen fathom oaze where they tooke fish with hookes while hee stayed for the boates The 4 all the afternoone wee ran along the coast which lyeth Northwest and by North and Southeast by South West and within a point one way or the other seeing the lande vnder our âee three or foure leagues off and all night likewise The 9 at three a clock in the morning our Admiral shot off a peece and at foure wee weyed and went hence Northeast At fiue in the morning wee saw the land along and the Island which wee saw the night before and diuers other Islands about it so ran in Northeast vntil we had brought our selues thwart of the riuer and then ran in East about sixe at night being a league within the riuer Our Admirall shot off a peece and there wee ankered in eight fathâm sand Being at anker I manned our boate and would haue gone aboord the Admirall but could not the flood was bent so strong and she rode halfe a mile beneath vs in the tyde but we had no tyde The 10 in the morning at fiue a clocke I sent our skiffe with our pilot in her to find a roade and a watring place in the meane time at sixe a clocke we set saile with our ship and bâing calme wee towed with our boat vntill ten and then ankered a mile short of the watering place After dinner I wânt on land with my skiffe to finde timber to fish our maste and searching along the shoare we found a good watring place and further seeking in the wood which all the countrey is full of and of diuers sorts wee found Limmon trees full of fruits also trees growing by the water side with the stalkes hung full of oysters and great periwinkles and crabs amongst them wee found drie pomegranates with many other fruits vnknowen to vs. In the meane time our Admirall and the Edward with the barkes hauing a gale at West set saile and ran vp and ankered in the rode before the accustomed watering place The 22 day certaine Portugals which had bene with vs before came down and brought some other Portugals and Negros with them in a shippe-boate wherein they brought vs 80 mewes of rice 500 and odde weight of Elephants teeth and a Negro boy which boy they gaue the Generall and the rice and teeth for the Elizabeth which wee solde them with all her tackle and sailes hauing neede of the rice because our meale which wee brought out of England was decayed and naught whereof wee had into the Edward 30 bushels which is a mewe and a halfe the Francis had 5 bushels and the Gallion had the rest And wee had 200 weight of Elephants teeth and the Gallion 300 and a halfe and sixe pound During this time we sent our skiffe with the Admiralls pinnesse vp the riuer to meete with a Gundall which the Portugals had sent for fresh victuals for vs who not finding her returnâd at night All this day I with M. Walker remainâd aboord with the Admirall and after their dinner and supper wee ended our businesse and returned aboord hauing had many good speaches with the Portugals The 26 day being Sunday Captaine Hawkins M. Maddox M. Hall M. Bannister Captaine Drake M. Euans M. Hoode and others came aboord and heard the Sermon and dined with me after dinner wee went on shoare to the lower point where we followed the footing of an Elephant but saw him not and so spent the time to and fro till supper time and then came aboord and supped together which done each man departed to his abode This night I was very sicke and so were all they that were on shoare with mee with eating of a fruite of the countrey which wee found on trees like nuts whereof some did eate foure some fiue some sixe and more but wee vomitted and scoured vpon it without reason The 27 day in the afternoone the olde Greeke Fracisco came aboord to me with request that hee might haue the Francis boate to goe vp for his owne boate which was not come downe with whom I talked of this Countrey and Countrey-people vntill fiue of the clocke at night that the flood was come and then I went aboorde to the Admirall and got his consent and sent themselues in her viz. Ferdinando the Portugall Master and his Negro In the meane time I sent foure of my men to watch in the Elizabeth all night The 28 day in the morning at foure a clocke I sent my skiffe with the Admirals pinnesse down to the West point to fish who came aboorde againe at one in the afternoone and brought as much fish as all our companies could eate During the time that our boates were a fishing came downe the riuer a canoa and the Portugals former boate with hennes orenges plantans which they presented the Generall and mee with and also the rest of the rice due to vs for the payment of the Elizabeth For the partitions whereoâ I went aboord the Admirall where I dined After dinner M. Euans began to barter awây certaine of the ships commodities with the Negros without acquainting the Generall or any other vntill hee had done whereof grâwe more wordes then presite as by the bookes of marchandise appeareth Which done I came aboord and had two of the Portugals to supper with mee About two of the clocke in the morning we had a Ternado and much raine The 29 about 4
North and by West off vs about noone wee espied land to beare West off vs which as we did imagine was the cape of Buena Esperança whârof indeed we were short some 40. or 50. leagues and by reason of the skantnesse of the winde we stood along to the Southeast vntill midnight at which time the winde came faire and we halâd along Westward The 12. and 13. dayes we were becalmed and the sky was very hazie and thicke vntil the 14. day at three of the clocke in the afternoone at which time the sky cleared and we espiâd the land againe which was the cape called Cabo Falso which is short of the Cape de buena Esperança 40 or 50 leagues This Cape is very easie to be knowen For there are right ouer it three very high hilles standing but a smal way one off another and the hiest standeth in the middest and the ground is much lower by the seaside The Cape of Good hope beareth West and by South from the said Cabo Falso The 16. day of May about 4. of the clocke in the afternoone the winde came vp at East a very stiffe gale which helde vntill it was Saturday with as much winde as euer the shâp could goe before at which time by siâe of the clocke in the morning wee espâed the promontorie or heaâland called the Cape de Buena Esperança which is a reasonable hiâ land at the Westermost point a litle off the maine do shew two hammocks the one vpon the other and three other hammocks lying further off into the sea yet low land betweene and adioyning vnto the sea This cape of Buena Esperança is set down and accompted for two thousand leagues from the yland of Iaua in the Portugall sea carts but it is not so much almost by an hundred and fiftie leagues as we found by the running of our ship We were in running of these eightâene hundred and fiftie leagues iust nine weekes The eighth day of Iune by breake of day we fel in sight of the yland of S. Helena seuen or eight leagues short of it hauing but a small gale of winde or almost none at all insomuch as we could not get vnto it that day but stood off and on all that night The next day being the 9. of Iune hauing a pretie easie gale of wind we stood in with the shore our boat being sent away before to make the harborough and about one of the clocke in the afternoonâ we came vnto an ancker in 12. fathoms water two or thrâe cables length from the shore in a very faire and smooth bay vnder the Northwestside of the ylandâ This yland is very high land and lieth in the maine sea standing as it were in the middest of the sea betweene thâ maine land of Africa and the maine of Brasilia and the coast of Guinea And is in 15. degrees and 48. minuts to the Southward of the Equinoctiall line and is distant from the Cape of Buena Esperança betweene 5. and 6. hundreth leagues The same day about two or three of the clocke in the afternoone wee went on shore where wee found a marueilous faire pleasant valley wherein diuers handsome buildings and houses were set vp and especially one which was a Church which was tyled whited on the outside very faire and made with a porch and within the Church at the vpper end was set an altar whereon stood a very large table set in a frame hauing in it the picture of our Sauiour CHRIST vpon the Crosse and the image of our Lady praying with diuers other histories curiously painted in the same The sides of the Church were all hanged with stained clothes hauing many deuises drawen in them There are two housâs adioyning to the Church on âach side one which serue for kitchins to dresse meate in with necessary roomes and houses of office the couerings of the saide houses are made flat whereon is planted a very faire vine and through both the saide houses runneth a very good and holsome streame of fresh water There is also right ouer against the saide Church a faire causey made vp with stones reaching vnto a valley by the seaside in which valley is planted a garden wherein grow great store or pompioâs and melons And vpon the saide causey is a frame erected whereon hange tâo bells wherewith they ring to Masse and hard vnto it is a Crosse set vp which is squared framed and made very artifically of free stone whereon is carued in cyphers what time it was builded which was in the yeere of our Lord 1571. This valley is the fairest and largest lowe plot in all the yland and it is marueilous sweete and pleasant and planted in euery place either with fruite trees or with herbes There are figtrees which beare fruit continually marueilous plentifully for on euery tree you shal haue blossoms greene figs and ripe figs all at ones and it is so all the yere long the reason is that the yland standeth so neere the Sunne There be also great store of lymon trees orange trees pomegranate trees pomecitron trees date treâs which beare fruite as the fig trees do and are planted carâfully and very artificially with very pleasant walkes vnder and betweene them and the saide walkes bee ouershadowed with the leaues of the trees and in euery voyde place is planted parceley sorell basill fenell anuis seede mustard seede radishes and many speciall good hearbes and the fresh water brooke runneth through diuers places of this orchard and may with very small paines be made to water any one tree in the valley This fresh water streame commeth from the tops of the mountaines and falleth from the cliffe into the valley the height of a cable and hath many armes out of it which refresh the whole yland and almost euery tree in it The yland is altogether high mountaines and steepe valleis except it be in the tops of some hilles and downe below in some of the valleis where marueilous store of all these kinds of fruits before spoken of do grow there is greater store growing in the tops of the mountaines then below in the valleis but it is wonderfull laboursome and also dangerous traueâling vp vnto them and downe againe by reason of the height and steepenesse of the hilles There is also vpon this yland great store of partridges which are very came not making any great hast to flie away though one come very neere them but onely to runne away and get vp into the steepe cliffes we killed some of them with a fowling piece They differ very much from our partridges which are in England both in bignesse and also in colour For they be within a little as bigge as an henne and are of an ashe colour and liue in couies twelue sixteene and twentie together you cannot go ten or twelue score but you shall see or spring one or two couies at the least There are likewise
Item the yland of S. Mary in 37. degr 15. min. Item the bay of Valpares in 33. degr 40. min. Item the bay of Quintero in 33. degr 20. min. Item Coquimbo in 29. degr 30. min. Item Morro moreno in 23. degr 20. min. Item Arica standeth in 18. degr 30. min. Item the bay of Pisca standeth in 13. degr 30. min. Item the bay of Lima standeth in 11. degr 50. min. Item Santos standeth in 9. degr 20. min. Item the bay of Cherrepe in 6. degr 30. min. Item the bay of Paita in 5. degr 4. min. Item the yland of Puna in 2. degr 50. min. Item Cape Sant Francisco to the North of the Equinoctiall in 1. degr A note of the height of certaine places to the Northwards of the Equinoctiall line on the coast of New Spaine INprimis Panama standeth in the latitude of 9. degrees Item the yland called Isla de Canoas in 9. degr 10. min. Item Cape Blanco in 10. degr 10. min. Item Rio Lexo in 12. degr 40. min. Item Aguatulco in 15. degr 50. min. Item Acapulco in 17. degr 20. min. Item Sant Iago in 18. degr 50. min. Item Cape de los Corrientes in 20. degr 30. min. Item the bay of Xalisco in 21. degr 30. min. Item the ylands of the Maries in 21. degr 20. min. Item the yland of Saint Andrew in 22. degr Item the ylands of Ciametlan in 23. degr 40. min. Item that the Cape of Santa Clara on the point of California is in 23. degrees A note of the heights of certaine places beginning from the ylands of the Ladrones and passing by the Philippinas the Malucos Iaua minor Iaua maior the Cape of Bona Sperança and the yle of Santa Helena INprim one of the ylands of the Landrones called Guana standeth in 13. degr 50. min. Item Cape De Spirito Santo on the yle of Luçon standeth in 13. degr Item the yland of Capul in 12. degr 30. min. Item that the yland of Seboyon standeth in 12. degr Item that the Easterly end of the yland of Pannay is in 11. degr Item that the opening betweene the South head of Pannay and the South head of Isla de los Negros is in 10. degr 10. min. Item that the South-head of Isla de los Negros is in 9. degr 10. min. Item that the North-head of the yland Mindanao is in 7. degr 50. min. Item the South-head of Mindanao called Cape Cannel is in 6. degr 40. min. Item the Cape of Batochina is in 10. min. Item that 12. small ylands stand in 3. degr Item the latitude of two other ylands is in 4. degr 10. min. Item the Westerly head of Iaua minor is toward the South in 8. degr 30. min. Item the Easterly head of Iaua maior is toward the South in 8. degr 20. min. Item Malaca standeth to the Northward in 2. degr Item Cape Falso on the promontory of Africa standeth in 34. degr 20. min. Item the Cape of Bona a Sperança standeth in 34. degr 40. min. Item the yland of Santa Helena standeth in 15. degr 40. min. Item the Cape of S. Augustine standeth Southward in 8. degr 40. min. Soundings on the coast of Barbarie from Rio del Oro vnto Cape Blanco INprimis about 3. leagues off Rio del Oro you shall haue very faire shoulding fine white sand 18. fathoms and so alongst vnto Cape Blanco two or three leagues off the shore you shall haue 18. and 20. fathoms And when you come within one league of the Cape you shall haue twelue or thirteene fathoms browne sand very faire shoulding And if you will hall in with Cape Blanco beware you come not within seuen or eight fathoms of the Cape for there lyeth a sand off the Cape Also about 7. or eight leagues off the Cape lyeth a long should next hand Southwest and by South off the Cape Soundings on the coast of Guiny ITem Going vnto Sierra Leona hauing the cape Eastnortheast off you 7 leagues off you shall haue 22 fadome browne sand And halling in you shall finde very faire shoalding You may be bold to borrow on the Southermost shore but take heed of a rocke that lieth in the faire way a good birth off the shore but there is no feare of it for it lieth aboue the water and is distant two miles off the South shore Item You may be bolde to borrow hard by rocke for on the North side going in there lieth one long sand which runneth Southeast and Northwest and lieth distant from the South shore 2 leagues And you shall anker in 14 or 15 fadoms hard by the shore Also going vnto the island called Illha Verde the which iland lieth 10 leagues to the Southward of Sierra Leona the course is Southsouthwest and Northnortheast and you shall haue betweene them 9 or 10 fadome And if you will anker at the sayd iland you shall haue 5 or 6 fadome hard by the shore Also you must haue especiall care of a great current that setteth alongst the coast of Guiny to the Eastward Item And if you be bound vnto the Southwards you must go Westsouthwest off for feare oâ the shoald that is called Madera Bomba the which shoald is to the Southwards of the iland Soundings on the coast of Brasil ITtem Unto the Northwards of Cape Frio the cape bearing southwest off you about 17 or 1â leagues off you shall haue 45 fadoms streamy ground and running Southwest you shall find 32 fadoms blacke sand and then running Westsouthwest into a deepe bay which lieth tenne leagues to the Northwards of the cape you shall haue 22 fadoms oaze that depth you shall hauâ all alongst except you be farre into the bay and then you shall haue 16 fadoms all oazie Item To the Northwards of Cape Frio about 6 or 7 leagues you shall haue many small islands Item To the Northwards of the cape 6 leagues you shall haue two small islands one mile distant the one from the other and they are distant from the maine fiue leagues And betweene those ilands and the cape you shall haue very many islands hard aboord the maine Item The cape bearing West of you two leagues off you shall haue 55 fadoms oaze Also you shall know when you are shot about the cape vnto the Southwards by deeping of the water Also if you will go for S. Sebastian from the cape you must go West and South and Westâsouthwest among And the distance from the cape vnto S. Sebastian is 50 leagues And being shot into the bay any thing nere the shore you shall haue 24 fadoms all oazie And halling in for S. Sebastian you shall know it by two little islands which be round anâ those ilands lie from the iland of S. Sebastian next hand East and by South and are distant the one from the other about foure leagues Also off the Southermost end of S. Sebastian there lieth one iland about 6 leagues off which iland is
Spaine Portugall Remember this great arrest of the Hollanders An. 159â Commodities oââââro voyage in shortnesse Commodities of the countrey more then those of Moscouie The seuerall merchandise A lake of salt in Vasques his voyage Obiection Answere The ewer of metâl brought by M. Frobisher caused two seuerall supplies the two yeeres next allowing whereof the latter was of thirteene tall ships Master Cârlilâs owne experience The Frenchmens trade renewed in Canada in the yeere 158â The South part best for inhabiting and traffiquâ The furnishing foorth of 100. men for one yeere will cost 4000. li. 1591. The fleeââââ Canada Cape Rase The Isles ââ S. Peterâ Cape de Rey The Isles of Aponas The Isââââ Brioâ The Isle Rââmeâ The Isle of Douronâ The markes of the harbour of the Isle Ramea An Isle like a Floure de lice A banke of sand Cape du Chapt. The maine a shold coast Lisle Blanche The place where they killed 1500. Morses The Isle Hupp Sands and sholds A smal Island conteining a league of ground A hard hauen Markes to come into the hauen The Barre The best anchorage Another entrance The Isle of Cormorants The voyage of M. Drake of Apsham to Ramea The Isle of Rameââ or Menquit The English mân ââd vpon Cape Briton They goe on those in another place The people of the coââtrey came downe to ouâ men Blacke dogs A secret trade to the Southwest of Cape Briton Soundings to the South and Southwestward of Cape Briton The sayle 50 or 60 leagues to the Southâ West of Cape Briton Great store of Stales Porposes Whales and Cods They continue on the coast from Cape Briton Westwards full eleuen weekes An huge Whale pursued their ship by the space of many dayes till one of their men fell ouer boord Cape Raz Cape S. Marie The Islands of the Martyers The Isles of S. Peâer Cape de Rey. Cape de Angullie The bay of Saint George They land on the Isle of Naâiscotec The Isle of Menego The 2 Islands of Birdes Store of Moâsses In Bryans Island excââllent ground for come and medow The Isle Ramea Another harborough in Ramea A sâirmish betweene the French men and vs. A new treason of the Britons The bar of the hauen of Ramea They depart from Ramea Isle Blanch oâ the White Isle The riuer of Cape Briton Their arriuall in the Isle of Cape Briton The Chancewâl cast away 18 leagues within Cape Briton Woods on the Isle of Cape Briton The Sauages of Cape Briton come aboord of our ship Cibo an harborow in the Isle of Cape Briton New Port. Port Ingles They departed from Cape Briton S. Peters Islands A Spanish ship taken M. Crafton The harborow of Cape S. Marie A Briton ship of 200 tunnesâ taken The Isle oâ Birds A great whiâe beaâe âeâ Chasteauâ Carpunt Blane Sablon or white Sands Brâst a plââ to the North in Newfoundland The riuer of Sâ Iaques Boats made of the barke of Birch trees Three Ilands The Islands of Margaulx Moâses or Sââoxen Brionâ Iland An exceeding goodly land Marâetie of goodly trees The passage deâ Chasteaux Trees able to mast ships of 300. tunnes Fortie or 50 boates of Saluages Three hunred gentle Sauages Baye ââ Chaleur or the Bay of heat Hemp. Maââ Damsins figs nuts apples Tâis hauen seemeth to be Gaspay Two sauages taken Fifty degrees of latitude The Streit oâ S. Peter Cape Tiennot The Isle of birds in 49 degrees 40 minutes The Bay des Chasteaux oâ The Grand Bay Câpâ Thiennââ âole S. Nicholaâ Cape Rabast The gulfe of S. Laurence A Cape of tâe Isle of Asâââption A mighây ãâã of Whales The Isle of Assumpââon The month of the riuer of Hochelaga about thirty leagues broad The seuen Isâes A swiât riuer Sea-horses The Isle of Asâââptâon or Natâleoteâ ââauen on the Southerne coaââ A great riuer â Iohnâ Islets This is the riuer of Tadiâeâ or of Saguenay The riuer oâ Saguenay Inâumerable Tortoââes The I le of Coâââes ãâã Filberds This great Iland is called The I le of Oâleans Maââ ãâ¦ã Stadacona Goodly deury The I le of Bacchus or the I le of Orleans Uines laden with grapes Hochelay The lake of Angoleâme âild rats as big as âoâââ They leaue âheir Pinnesse behind Hochelaga distant from the lake of Angolesme 45â leagues The third of October Hochelaga siâe miles from the riuer side This Millet is Maââ The description of Hochelaga Maââ pease beanes musk-millions cucumbers and other fruits Plenââe of fish and the preseruing thereof âuâgâi gââd to sâanch blood Mount Roial â ridge of â ountaâââs to ãâã Fâorâh or locaâlogo and another to the South The 3 faults or falleâ of water in 44 degrees of latitude The riuer of Sagâenay commeth from the West Where there is gold and siluer Red copper in Sagueâây Stadacona Toudamani dwâling Southwareâ of Canada They âesire to be baptized Their Maiz. Tâbaââo described It is now found to be but 200 leagues Riuerâ falling from mountaines Bâasts Birdeâ Fishes The right way to Saguenay Store of golde red copper Two or three great lakes Mâre dulcium aquarium The riuer of Irâoââcâs âalling into the lake of Aâgâleââne A perfect remedy against the French Pocks A long winter Rubies Gold and wollen cloth with other riches in Saguenay A people called Picquemians The towne of Sidatin Donnacona Taignoagny Domagaia take Foure and twenty chaines of Esurgny The Isle of Orleans Isle de Coudres A knife of red coper brought from Saguenay The Isle of Hares The Isle of Brion Ten Sauages brought into France Iohn Francis de la Roche lord of Roberual Great riches very good soile in Saguenay which to beyond y e saults The kings letters to Cartier 23. of May 1540. The great mischiefe of leesing the season Carpont Hauen Transporting of diuers sorts oâ cattell for breed The 23 of August The new king of Canada Great dissimulation of a Sauage A good roade 4. leagues aboue Saincte Croix Trees aboue 3. fathâms about Hanneda the most excellent tree of the world Abundance of Uines full of grapes Fruit like Medlers Seed sprong out of the ground within 8 dayes A great plaine of very good arable ground Diamants of Canada An yron Mine Leaues of fine gold as thicke as a mans naile found in Canada Excellent and âtrong hempe The Uicount of Beauââe and the rest of their councell The rich coântrey of Saguenaâ sâmaâd hârond the Saules which are in 44. deg They depart from Charlesburg Royal the 7. of Septem They delight in red cloth The 11 of September The Towne of Tutonagây Bad groundâ and a great current A Towne of friendly people Another viâlage of good people which dwell ouer against the second Sault They were at the second Sault The riuer not nauigable to passe to Saguenay 400 personâ about their boaâeâ Like those of new Albion The Sauageâ are great diââsembââââ Maisouna The Sauages conspiâe together against the French A very great number of Sauages asseâbled together The Saults
âaken ââo trueth in Negrosâ âââinica Rio de la Hacha takeâ âartageââ Furicanoâ Stoâme Saint Iohn dâ Vllua a Port. The Spaniards deceiueâ Our requestâ The fleete of Spaine The maner oâ the Port S. Iohn de Vllââ North wind periâous 1800. thousand pond A Uiceroy Faire woâdeâ beguiled Our requestâ The peacâ concludâ A Viceroy false of his faith The treason brake foorth The Minion escaped hardly The Iesus escaped hardly Sharpe wars 3. ships of the Spaniards consumed â hard casâ Small hope to be had of tyrants A storme Small hopes of life âard choleâ Miseries An hundred men set on land in 23. deg and a halfe The greatest miserie of all The balâant exploit of M. Francis Drake betwixt Panama and Nombre de Dios. M. Francis Drake burnt the house of Crosses The Iland of pearles 25. leagues from Panama A skirmish between the English men and the Spaniardâ The English betrayed to the Spaniards The death of Iohn Oxnam The English mens coÌming to the Indies caused the king of Spaine to build gallies to keepe the Seas âsla del sal The Isle of Maio. Two villaââs burnt The Isle ãâã Trinidad The Isle ãâã Margarita The Isle oâ Curaââââ Ca ãâ¦ã Nombre de dios Simerons reââââ to the Spâniards Verag The bay oâ Honduras The Isle oââ Francisco A conspiracy against the Captainâ M. Andrew Barker and 8 other slaine by the Spaniards The towne of Truxillio sacked by the English The death of Philip Roche master of the Ragged staffe Their arriual in the Isle of Sillie Certaine Ordinance of Iohn Oxnam recouered from the Spaniards San Vicente Islas de Madera Canaria y Cabo Verde Rio de Ienero Lugar por haeâa vn fuerte Estrecho de Magallanes Mar del Sur. Lima es ciudad de dos mil vezi noâ pero facil â tomar Panama La segunda viaje San Domingo Cartagena Rio de Chagre Panama lugar a bierto y facil a laquear La Huana Tomar las flotas Quarenta naos gruesas The damage which may be done by passing by the riuer of Ieâero into the South sea Madera Canaries The Isle of Cape Verde The riuer of Ienero A âort may bee âiuided on an Island in the mouth of the riuer of Ienero The streight of Magelan The citie of Lima easie to bee takenâ though it haue 2000 inhabitants The ships in the South sea may be burnt Panama may be taken The second course which indeede Drake tooke Panama bâing an open place is easie to be taken Hauana easie to be taken The Indian fleete may bâ taken Sir Barnarâ Drake tooke I7 sailes of the Spanish and Portugall fishers returning from Newfoundland 1585. His intelligence was âoâ true as since I found in the osfice of the Admiralty Fortie greaâ ships to be prouided 1583. Terzena was won by the Marqueâ of Santa Cruz. Another armâ of ten sailes The Indian fleete to be strengthened with 4. shipâ of warrâ What prouision is to be made if Don Antonio shoulâ come with aâ army An armie of 14 gallies âo be proâided Another army oâ 12 great ships 4 pataches and 1500 souldiersâ The citie of S. Iago taken aââ possessâd for 14. dayes A wise couâse âo be âââtated in all great actions The ãâã of ãâã Poââugal againââ M. Wilââam Hawkins The citie of S. Domingo taken Most vnsatiable Spanish ambition Cartagena Alonso Brââo the gouernour of Cartagena taken The Island of Cares A most commendable example of diligence in a Generall Nicolas Boâgâgnoâ Santa Helena Roanoac Santa Marta situate in 10. degrees and a halfe A new course to Noâa ãâã by ãâ¦ã Santa Marta lessâ ãâ¦ã then the ordained course Cartagena situate in 11. degrees sâanââ ãâ¦ã The gallies of ãâ¦ã The poynt of Ycacos Nombre de Dios in 9. deg and one tierce Panama hath 350. houses Negros Simerons mortall enemies to the Spanyards The best way to take Panama Perico An Island in the harbour of Panama Places good to land in 1 Place 2 Place This was Oâenâam 3 Place The place of most aduantage for the English Rebellion seated in the West Indies 5. or 6. millions of gold siluer The harbour of Perico Nota. A new way into the south-sea These fiue leagues are very good ground or champion countrey Spanish treason The newe fortification in Hauana Souldiers sent to Hauana A fort vpon an hill Fiue Frigats made at Hauana Iohn de Orimo General of the fleete The excellency of the great Frygates built in Cuba Copper mines newly found in Cuba Pedro de Valdes prisoner in England Iohn Baptista Antonio the generall Iugenour of the West Indies A strong fort newly builded in S. Iuan de puerto Rico. This Fort was taâen by thâ Eaâle of ãâã lând 1ââ6 Copper mines âoând neere Hauana 200 souldiers sent to S. Iâan de Puerto Rico. 1500 fighting men in S. Iuan de puerto Rico Island The boldnes of the English The souldiers run away from Hauana The boldnes of the English 18 ships builded in Cuba against England Acapuâco the âarbour where the âhips ââe that goe for Châna FroÌ Acâpulcoâ to China aboue â000 leaguesâ Flemish wares good in China A wonderfull gaââe M. Thomas Candish Gold mââes siluer mâââs and Pearles in China Fiâe liââeâ cloth greatly âsteemed in China Not aboue one thousand Spaniards in the Philippinas The people of the Riuer of Plate 100 men wanting Good watch continually kept English men in the South sea âought 3 yeres This was M. Chidleys fleet whereof the Delight was in the streights of Magelan in Ianuary and Feb. 158â This was M. Iohn Chidlâys fleet âaâiââ Plague Peâu vtteâly vndoââ with the plague A short passage from Buenos Aeres in the âiuer of Plaâe to Peru. The tediousnesse of the way by Cartagena to Peru. Prinâe seales to borrow money sent into Peru. Adundance of money to come from Lima and from The Valleâ The citie of Santa Fee in the new kingdom of Granada Great store of metal âound in the newe mines of Marequita The great riuer of Magdalena The richest mines in all Peru. The great profite of the trade to the Philippinas Twenty li. of beefe may bee bought for sixe pence in Peru. The Englishmen eââremely fâââed in Peru. A fight from 7. in the morning till 11 at night This towne standeth from the waters side a league They thought some fleete had bene come from Spaine for so they expected Iaâaâcâ A good riuer of fresh water in Grand Caimââ Preseruing of hogs-flesh The excellent hauen of Cauannas A Portugal ship takenâ They double the cape of Buena Esperanza Quitangone ââre Mozaâbique The isle of Comoro They Wiâneâ at the isle of Zanzibar The isles of Pulo pinaom The isle of Nicubar They returne homeward They double the cape of Bona Speranza The isle of S. Helena The strange force of sudden feare and sudden ioy The isle of Trinidad in the West Indies The isle oâ Monâ Cape Tiburon * Of Gonnauy They wracked vpon Bermuda the 17 of December 1593.